Canon imagePROGRAF iPF8100 User manual

Lar g e F o r m a t P r i n t e r
User Manual
ENG
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Contents
Introduction
1
How to use this manual.....................................................................................1
About This User Manual...............................................................................................................1
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing......................................................................................3
Printer Parts
7
Printer parts.......................................................................................................7
Front.............................................................................................................................................7
Back.............................................................................................................................................9
Top Cover (Inside)......................................................................................................................10
Carriage...................................................................................................................................... 11
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)...............................................................................................................12
Control Panel..............................................................................................................................14
Stand..........................................................................................................................................16
Media Take-up Unit (Optional)....................................................................................................17
Output Stacker...........................................................................................................................18
Control Panel...................................................................................................19
Turning the Printer On and Off...................................................................................................19
Printer Modes.............................................................................................................................21
Switching Modes........................................................................................................................26
Printer Menu Operations............................................................................................................28
Main Menu Operations...............................................................................................................30
Menu Structure...........................................................................................................................35
Main Menu Settings....................................................................................................................49
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)........................................................................................60
Submenu Display.......................................................................................................................63
Status Print.................................................................................................................................64
Hard Disk.........................................................................................................71
Printer Hard Disk Operations.....................................................................................................71
Saved Print Jobs........................................................................................................................72
Saving Print Jobs.......................................................................................................................74
Checking a List of Saved Jobs...................................................................................................80
Printing Saved Jobs...................................................................................................................85
Managing Saved Jobs................................................................................................................91
Deleting Saved Jobs................................................................................................................109
Modifying the Current Job (Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)............................................. 115
Modifying Personal Boxes........................................................................................................ 119
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space........................................................................................129
Erasing all data on the printer's hard disk................................................................................132
Optional accessories.....................................................................................133
Roll Holder Set.........................................................................................................................133
Media Take-up Unit..................................................................................................................133
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents �
Contents
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board...................................................................................134
Printer Specifications.....................................................................................135
Specifications...........................................................................................................................135
Basic Environmental Performance...........................................................................................140
Print Area..................................................................................................................................141
Basic Printing Workflow
142
Printing procedure.........................................................................................142
Loading and Printing on Rolls..................................................................................................142
Loading and Printing on Sheets...............................................................................................146
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets.................................................................................149
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing................................................................150
Printing from Windows.............................................................................................................151
Printing from Mac OS X............................................................................................................152
Printing from Mac OS 9............................................................................................................154
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)....................................................................156
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)..................................................................158
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9)...................................................................160
Canceling print jobs.......................................................................................162
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel...........................................................................162
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows.........................................................................................163
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X.......................................................................................164
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9.......................................................................................166
Handling Paper
168
Paper.............................................................................................................168
Paper........................................................................................................................................168
Types of Paper.........................................................................................................................169
Paper Sizes..............................................................................................................................175
Handling rolls.................................................................................................178
Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source....................................................................................178
Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder...........................................................................................179
Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder......................................................................................181
Loading the Roll in the Printer..................................................................................................182
Removing the Roll from the Printer..........................................................................................186
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)................................................................................................188
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)...........................................................................................189
Feeding Roll Paper Manually...................................................................................................190
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper....................................................................................191
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically.............................................................192
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls...................................................................................193
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls............................................................................................197
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls...................................................................................198
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................201
Roll Holder Set.........................................................................................................................205
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)..........206
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................208
ii Downloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X).....................................................................209
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)......................................................................210
Handling sheets for paper feed slots............................................................. 211
Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source................................................................................ 211
Loading the Sheet in the Printer...............................................................................................212
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................................................................................215
Removing the Sheet.................................................................................................................216
Clearing a Jammed Sheet........................................................................................................217
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing................................................................220
Output Stacker...............................................................................................221
Using the Output Stacker.........................................................................................................221
Stowing the Output Stacker......................................................................................................226
Media take-up unit.........................................................................................228
Media Take-up Unit..................................................................................................................228
Media Take-up Unit (Optional)..................................................................................................229
Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional).................................................................................230
Enabling the Take-Up Reel Function........................................................................................231
Disabling the Take-Up Reel Function.......................................................................................231
Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit............................................................232
Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)...................................239
Enhanced Printing Options
242
Print quality and color settings.......................................................................242
Choosing a Paper for Printing..................................................................................................242
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing....................................243
Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X).................................................................247
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)..................................................................................249
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X)..........................................................251
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................252
Printing Office Documents........................................................................................................253
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver...................................................................................254
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment...................................................257
Printing Photos in Monochrome...............................................................................................258
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows)..........................................259
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X)........................................261
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS 9)........................................264
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows).............................................................267
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)...........................................................270
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)............................................................273
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Windows).....................................276
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Mac OS X)...................................278
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos (Mac OS 9)...................................281
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows).............................................................................284
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)...........................................................................286
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................289
Printing Office Documents (Windows)......................................................................................291
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)....................................................................................293
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9)....................................................................................295
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents iii
Contents
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)...................................................................................297
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................299
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)..................................................................................302
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows).............................................................................305
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)...........................................................................307
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9)............................................................................310
Printing enlargements or reductions..............................................................313
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size.............................................................................313
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width....................................................................................314
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......................................................................315
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER.............................316
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........317
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X).........319
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows).....................................................321
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X)....................................................323
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS 9)....................................................326
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..................................................................330
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)................................................................332
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9).................................................................335
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)...........................................................338
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).........................................................340
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9)..........................................................343
Printing at full size..........................................................................................346
Printing on Oversized Paper....................................................................................................346
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................348
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................350
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................352
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9).........................................................................355
Printing at Full Size (Windows)................................................................................................358
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)...............................................................................................360
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9)...............................................................................................363
Borderless Printing........................................................................................365
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size......................................................................365
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width................................................367
Borderless Printing at Actual Size............................................................................................369
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)..........................................................................371
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)........................................................................373
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9).........................................................................376
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)..............................379
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................381
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9)............................384
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows).......................387
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................389
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9).....................392
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes............................................395
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing)..............................................395
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes....................................................................................396
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)..................................................................397
ivDownloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X).................................................................401
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9).................................................................403
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows)..............................406
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X)............................410
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9)............................413
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet...............................................................417
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other.........................................................................417
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously.......................................................................................419
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet............................................................................................420
Printing Posters in Sections.....................................................................................................421
Printing Large Posters (Windows)............................................................................................422
Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9)..........................................................................................424
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows).......................................................426
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X).....................................................428
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows).....................................................................430
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)...................................................................431
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9)...................................................................433
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................435
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)........................................................................437
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9)........................................................................440
Centering originals.........................................................................................443
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls........................................................................................443
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets.....................................................................................444
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)......................................................................445
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)....................................................................447
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9).....................................................................450
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)...................................................................453
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X).................................................................455
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9)..................................................................457
Conserving roll paper.....................................................................................460
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees.......................................................460
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins.......................461
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).....462
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)...464
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9)....467
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows).....................................469
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X)....................................471
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9)....................................474
Printing CAD Drawings..................................................................................476
Printing CAD Drawings.............................................................................................................476
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows).............................................................................477
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)...........................................................................479
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................482
Other useful settings......................................................................................485
Printing With Watermarks.........................................................................................................485
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation..................................................486
Using Favorites........................................................................................................................487
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents Contents
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing...............................................................................................487
Printing from Photoshop...........................................................................................................488
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals.................................................................................489
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows).............................................................................490
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)...........................................................................491
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................493
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows)................................495
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X)..............................497
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS 9)..............................500
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows)......................................502
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9).....................................504
Software
507
Windows........................................................................................................507
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)............................................................................................507
Confirming Print Settings (Windows)........................................................................................509
Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)........................................................................ 511
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)................................................................512
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows).............................................................................513
Using Favorites (Windows)......................................................................................................514
Main Sheet (Windows).............................................................................................................516
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)..................................................................................................520
Layout Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................................................522
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)..........................................................................................524
Favorites Sheet (Windows)......................................................................................................525
Utility Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................................526
Support Sheet (Windows)........................................................................................................527
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)............................................................................................528
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)...............................................................529
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)..................................................................................531
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)............................................................................534
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................................535
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................536
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................537
Digital Photo Front-Access.......................................................................................................538
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)....................................539
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)..........541
Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows)....................................................................................543
Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows).......................................................................549
Confirming the Print Image Before Printing..............................................................................551
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows).......................................................................552
Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)..............................................................................553
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows)...........554
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)...................................................................................556
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows)............................................557
Mac OS X......................................................................................................558
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)..........................................................................................558
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X)......................................................................................559
Checking the Layout Before Printing........................................................................................561
viDownloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)....................................................................562
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)......................................................................563
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)..............................................................564
Main Pane (Mac OS X)............................................................................................................565
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X).................................................................................................567
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................................................................................569
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)..........................................................................................570
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)......................................................................................571
Support Pane (Mac OS X)........................................................................................................572
Using Favorites (Mac OS X).....................................................................................................572
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X).................................................................................573
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)..............................................................................576
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X)..................................578
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)...................................................................................579
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X).......................................................................581
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X).....................................................................582
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X)...........................................583
Mac OS 9.......................................................................................................584
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)...........................................................................................584
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)......................................................................................585
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9).......................................................................587
Main Pane (Mac OS 9).............................................................................................................588
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9)..................................................................................................590
Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9)......................................................................................................592
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9)..........................................................................................593
Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)............................................................................................594
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9).......................................................................................595
Using Favorites (Mac OS 9).....................................................................................................596
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9).................................................................................598
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)..............................................................................601
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS 9)...................................603
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9)...................................................................................605
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9).......................................................................608
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)......................................................................610
Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9).................................................................................. 611
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS 9)...........................................612
Network Setting
613
Network Setting.............................................................................................613
Network Environment...............................................................................................................613
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer................................................................................615
Initializing the Network Settings...............................................................................................616
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network Settings..................................................................617
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel....................................................619
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands................................................620
Specifying Printer-Related Information.....................................................................................622
Using RemoteUI.......................................................................................................................623
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or Errors Occur..................................................624
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents vii
Contents
Network Setting (Windows)...........................................................................625
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network Settings................................................................625
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type.........................................................................................627
Specifying NetWare Print Services...........................................................................................629
Specifying NetWare Protocols..................................................................................................632
Configuring NetWare Network Settings....................................................................................634
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)..............................................................635
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility......................................................................636
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility................................637
Network Setting (Macintosh)..........................................................................638
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network Settings..............................................................638
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)............................................................639
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)..............................................640
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)..................................................644
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network (Macintosh).................................................648
Maintenance
650
Adjusting the Printhead..................................................................................650
Correcting Print Misalignment..................................................................................................650
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically.....................................................................650
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually............................................................................652
Adjusting the Printhead Height.................................................................................................654
Adjusting the feed amount.............................................................................655
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically................................................................................655
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually.......................................................................................658
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength................................................................................................661
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy............................................................662
Color adjustment............................................................................................664
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors..................................................................................664
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing Environment...................................................668
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows).................................................669
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light.........................................................673
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)....................................676
Ink Tanks........................................................................................................678
Ink Tanks..................................................................................................................................678
Replacing Ink Tanks.................................................................................................................680
Checking Ink Tank Levels.........................................................................................................692
When to Replace Ink Tanks......................................................................................................693
Printheads......................................................................................................694
Printhead..................................................................................................................................694
Checking the Print Quality........................................................................................................694
Improving the Print Quality.......................................................................................................694
Checking for Nozzle Clogging..................................................................................................695
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................696
Replacing the Printhead...........................................................................................................697
viiiDownloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Cutter Unit......................................................................................................705
Cutter Unit................................................................................................................................705
Replacing the Cutter Unit.........................................................................................................705
Maintenance Cartridge..................................................................................708
Maintenance Cartridge.............................................................................................................708
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge......................................................................................708
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity......................................................716
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge..........................................................................717
Cleaning the Printer.......................................................................................718
Cleaning the Printer Exterior....................................................................................................718
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover.................................................................................................720
Cleaning the Printhead.............................................................................................................723
Other Maintenance........................................................................................724
Preparing to Transfer the Printer..............................................................................................724
Updating the Firmware.............................................................................................................730
Troubleshooting
731
Frequently Asked Questions..........................................................................731
Frequently Asked Questions....................................................................................................731
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver......................................................................................733
Printing does not start....................................................................................734
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up.............................................................734
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent.....................................................734
The Display Screen indicates the system is filling with ink.......................................................734
Cannot print over a network...........................................................................735
Cannot connect the printer to the network...............................................................................735
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually......................................................................736
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network.........................................................................................737
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks....................................................................738
Cannot print over a NetWare network......................................................................................739
The printer stops during a print job................................................................740
An error message is shown on the Display Screen..................................................................740
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper.................................................................................740
Problems with the printing quality..................................................................741
Printing is faint..........................................................................................................................741
Paper rubs against the Printhead.............................................................................................742
The edges of the paper are dirty..............................................................................................743
The surface of the paper is dirty...............................................................................................744
The back side of the paper is dirty...........................................................................................744
Banding in different colors occurs............................................................................................744
The contrast becomes uneven during printing.........................................................................745
Colors in printed images are uneven........................................................................................745
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type of paper...............................................746
Lines are misaligned................................................................................................................746
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents ix
Contents
The length of printed images is inaccurate...............................................................................746
Documents are printed in monochrome...................................................................................746
Printed colors are inaccurate....................................................................................................747
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs................................................................748
Documents are printed crooked...............................................................................................748
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)..................................................................................748
Installation problems......................................................................................749
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly...............................................................749
Removing Installed Printer Drivers...........................................................................................750
Clearing jammed paper.................................................................................751
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper...................................................................................................751
Clearing a Jammed Sheet........................................................................................................755
If the Printer makes a strange sound.............................................................758
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound......................................................................................758
Other problems..............................................................................................759
The printer consumes a lot of ink.............................................................................................759
A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not cleared after you replace the
Maintenance Cartridge.............................................................................................................759
Paper is not cut neatly..............................................................................................................759
Paper cannot be cut.................................................................................................................760
The printer does not go on.......................................................................................................760
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot...........................................................760
Cannot Load Sheets.................................................................................................................760
The Media Take-up Unit Continues Rotating............................................................................761
Ink level detection.....................................................................................................................762
Error Message
764
Responding to Messages..............................................................................764
Responding to Messages.........................................................................................................764
Error Messages........................................................................................................................766
Messages regarding paper............................................................................768
Paper Mismatch.......................................................................................................................768
Papr Type Mismatch.................................................................................................................768
Papr Size Mismatch.................................................................................................................769
This paper cannot be used.......................................................................................................769
Insufficient paper for job...........................................................................................................770
No sheets.................................................................................................................................770
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.......................................................................771
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded........................................................................771
Roll printing is selected............................................................................................................771
Sheet printing is selected.........................................................................................................771
Borderless printng not possible................................................................................................772
Paper loaded askew.................................................................................................................773
Paper size not detected............................................................................................................774
Leading edge detection error....................................................................................................774
End of paper feed.....................................................................................................................774
Downloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents
Cannot feed paper....................................................................................................................774
Paper jam.................................................................................................................................774
Cannot cut paper......................................................................................................................775
Rel lever is in wrong position....................................................................................................775
The roll is empty.......................................................................................................................776
Rewinding error........................................................................................................................776
Turn on the media take-up unit.................................................................................................776
Media take-up unit ready..........................................................................................................776
Messages regarding ink.................................................................................777
Ink Level: Check.......................................................................................................................777
No ink tank loaded....................................................................................................................777
Ink insufficient...........................................................................................................................778
Ink tank is empty. Press OK and replace the ink tank..............................................................778
Ink tank is empty. Replace the ink tank....................................................................................778
Close Ink Tank Cover...............................................................................................................779
Ink tank error............................................................................................................................779
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected..........................................................779
Messages regarding printing or adjusment....................................................780
Use another paper....................................................................................................................780
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.....................................................................780
Cannot print as specified..........................................................................................................780
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................780
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................781
Excessive temperature or humidity..........................................................................................781
Cannot calibrate.......................................................................................................................781
Messages regarding printheads....................................................................782
Cannot adjust printhead...........................................................................................................782
Cannot adjust band..................................................................................................................782
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)........................................................................782
PHeads: wrong pos..................................................................................................................782
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)..............................................................................783
x printhead error (x is Left or Right)..........................................................................................783
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge............................................784
No maintenance cartridge........................................................................................................784
Prepare for maint cart replacement..........................................................................................784
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................................................................................784
Maintenance cartridge full........................................................................................................784
Maintenance cartridge problem................................................................................................784
Messages regarding the hard disk.................................................................785
Mail box nearly full....................................................................................................................785
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.........................................................................785
Mail box full. Cannot save........................................................................................................785
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing...............................785
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data.........................................................................................785
Hard disk error..........................................................................................................................786
File read error...........................................................................................................................786
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contents xi
Contents
Other Messages............................................................................................787
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)....................................................................................787
Top cover is open.....................................................................................................................787
Carriage Cover is open............................................................................................................787
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)...............................................................787
Unknown file.............................................................................................................................788
Prepare for parts replacement..................................................................................................788
Parts replacement time has passed.........................................................................................788
Multi-sensor error.....................................................................................................................788
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)............................................788
xiiDownloaded
Contents from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
Introduction
How to use this manual
About This User Manual
• Symbols
The following symbols are used in this User Manual to indicate safety information and explanations
on restrictions or precautions in use.
Important
Indicates important information
that must be followed when using
the printer. Be sure to read this
information to prevent printer
damage or operating errors.
Caution
Indicates caution items for which
operating error poses a risk of
injury or damage to equipment
or property. To ensure safe use,
always follow these precautions.
Note
Indicates helpful reference
information and supplemental
information on particular topics.
• Button names and user interface elements
Key and button names on the control panel and user interface elements in software (such as menus and
buttons) are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Control Panel Buttons
Example: Press the OK button.
Control Panel Interface Items and Messages
Example: Head Cleaning is displayed.
Software Interface Items
(Menus and Buttons)
Example: Click OK .
Keyboard Keys
Example: Press the Tab key.
• Part Names
Names of printer parts are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Printer part names
Example: Open the Top Cover .
Introduction 1
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
• Cross-reference
Other pages or manuals that provide related information are indicated as follows in this User Manual.
Cross-Reference in the Same User Manual
Example: see “Turning the Printer On and Off”.
(→P.19)
Click the link to jump to the corresponding page.
Cross-Reference in Related Manuals
Example: See the Paper Reference Guide .
Other Cross-Reference
Example: See the printer driver help.
• Figures and software screens
• Figures in this User Manual may be different from the actual appearance of the printer in some
cases.
• Screens depicted in this User Manual for the printer driver or other software may be different from
the actual screens because of subsequent updates.
• Windows XP screens are used in explanations of Windows operations in this User Manual.
• Trademarks
• Canon, the Canon logo, and imagePROGRAF are trademarks or registered trademarks of Canon
Inc.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and other countries.
• Macintosh is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. in the United States and other countries.
• Other company and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
owners.
• Copyright
© 2007 Canon Inc.
• Unauthorized reproduction of this User Manual in whole or part is prohibited.
• May we request
Thank you for understanding the following points.
• The information in this User Manual is subject to change without notice.
• We strive to ensure accuracy of information in this User Manual, but if you notice errors or
omissions, please contact us.
2 Introduction
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing
For your convenience when printing this manual, HTML versions of the sections in “Using the Printer” on the
top page are available. All topics in a section are combined in one le for printing. This section describes how
to print sections of the manual, using the content of Printing Procedure in Basic Printing Workow as
an example.
1.
On the top page, click Basic Printing Workow.
2.
Under Basic Printing Workow in the left frame, click Printing Procedure.
Introduction 3
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
3.
In the title area of Printing Procedure, click Access to the HTML for printing.
An HTML version of the topics in Printing Procedure is displayed, suitable for printing.
4 Introduction
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
4.
Access the printing dialog box as follows, depending on your computer’s operating system.
• Windows
In Windows, right-click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link. In the shortcut
menu, click Print to display the Print dialog box.
• Macintosh
On a Macintosh computer, click anywhere in the explanation area except on a gure or a link while
holding the Ctrl key. In the shortcut menu, click Print Frame to display the Print dialog box.
Introduction 5
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
How to use this manual
5.
Specify conditions as needed, and then click Print (Windows) or Print (Macintosh).
• Windows
• Macintosh
Note
• To print “Software” on the top page or individual topics that are displayed, follow steps 4 and 5.
6 Introduction
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Printer Parts
Printer parts
Front
a. Top Cover
Open this cover to install the Printhead, load paper, and remove any jammed paper from inside the
printer as needed. (→P.10)
b. Cutter Groove
Paper is cut (using the cutter or manually with scissors) over this groove.
c. Ejection Guide
Guides printed documents as they are ejected. Open this guide when loading a roll.
d. Roll Holder Slot
Slide the Roll Holder into this slot.
e. Roll Holder
Load the roll on this holder.
f. Ejection Support
Prevents printed documents from winding around the Roll Holder or Paper Feed Slot.
g. Output Stacker
A cloth tray that catches ejected documents. (→P.18)
h. Paper Feed Slot
When loading a roll, insert the edge of the roll paper here.
i. Holder Stopper
Secure the roll on the Roll Holder with this part.
j. Ink Tank Cover
Open this cover to replace an Ink Tank. (→P.12)
k. Control Panel
Use this panel to operate the printer and check the printer status. (→P.14)
Printer Parts 7
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
l. Release Lever
Releases the Paper Retainer. Lift this lever toward the front of the printer when loading paper.
m.Maintenance Cartridge
Absorbs ink used for maintenance purposes such as head cleaning. (Replace the cartridge when
it becomes full.)
n. Carrying handles
When carrying the printer, have four people hold it by these handles under both sides.
o. Maintenance Cartridge Cover
Open this cover to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
p. Stand
A stand that holds the printer. Equipped with casters to facilitate moving the printer. (→P.16)
8 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Back
a. Carrying handles
When carrying the printer, have four people hold it by these handles under both sides.
b. Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet
Connect the power cord of the optional Media Take-up Unit here.
c. Expansion Board Slots
Install an optional IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion board, as desired.
d. Ethernet Port
Connect an Ethernet cable to this port. The lamp is lit if the Ethernet cable is connected correctly
and communication is possible between the computer and printer.
e. USB Port
Connect a USB cable to this port. This port is compatible with USB 2.0 High Speed mode.
f. Accessory Pocket
Holds printer manuals, assembly tools, and other items.
g. Power Supply Connector
Connect the power cord to this connector.
Printer Parts 9
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Top Cover (Inside)
a. Top Cover Roller
Prevents paper from rising when ejected.
b. Paper Alignment Line
Align paper with this line when loading it.
c. Carriage
Moves the Printhead. The carriage serves a key role in printing. (→P.11)
d. Carriage Shaft
The Carriage slides along this shaft.
e. Paper Retainer
Important in supplying the paper. This retainer holds paper as it is fed.
f. Platen
The Printhead moves across the platen to print. The Vacuum holes on the platen hold paper in place.
g. Borderless Printing Ink Grooves
These grooves catch ink outside the edges of paper during borderless printing.
h. Cleaning Brush
When cleaning inside of the Top Cover, use this brush to sweep away paper dust on the Platen.
i. Fixed Blade
The Cutter Unit passes through this blade to cut paper.
10 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Carriage
a. Carriage Cover
Protects the Carriage.
b. Printhead Fixer Cover
Holds the Printhead in place.
c. Printhead L
Equipped with ink nozzles. Printheads serve a key role in printing.
d. Printhead R
Equipped with ink nozzles. Printheads serve a key role in printing.
e. Printhead Fixer Lever
Locks the Printhead Fixer Cover.
f. Cutter Unit
A round-bladed cutter for automatic paper cutting. The cutter blade is retracted inside when not
cutting.
g. Shaft Cleaner
Prevents the Carriage Shaft from becoming dirty.
Printer Parts 11
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)
Left Side
Right Side
Note: The gure shows the printer as loaded with 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank.
a. Ink Tank
Cartridges of ink in each color.
b. Ink Tank Lock Lever
A lever that locks the Ink Tank in place and protects it. Lift and press down the lever when replacing an
Ink Tank. To open it, lift the stopper of the lever until it stops, and then push it down toward the front.
To close it, push it down until it clicks into place.
a. Ink Color Label
Load an Ink Tank that matches the color and name on this label.
12 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
b. Ink Set
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer (→P.678) is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle
on the side. When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label.
c. Ink Lamp (Red)
Indicates the state of the Ink Tank as follows when the Ink Tank Cover is opened.
• On
The Ink Tank is installed correctly.
• Off
No Ink Tank is installed, or the ink level detection function is disabled.
• Flashing Slowly
Not much ink is left.
• Flashing Rapidly
Ink tank is empty.
Printer Parts 13
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Control Panel
a. Online Button (Green)
Switches the printer online and ofine. (→P.26)
• On
The printer is online.
• Flashing
The printer is switching modes.
• Off
The printer is ofine.
b. Menu Button
Displays the main menu of the printer. (→P.49)
c. Data lamp (Green)
• Flashing
During printing, the Data lamp ashes when the printer is receiving or processing print jobs.
Otherwise, this lamp ashes when the print job is paused or the printer is updating the rmware.
• Off
There are no active print jobs when the Data lamp is off.
d. Message lamp (Orange)
• On
A warning message is displayed.
• Flashing
An error message is displayed.
• Off
The printer is off or is operating normally.
e. Paper Source Section
After you press the Feeder Selection button, the lamp for your chosen paper source is lit.
1. Roll Media lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
2. Cut Sheet lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates that a sheet is selected as the paper source.
• Off
Indicates that a roll is selected as the paper source.
f. Feeder Selection Button
Switches the paper source. Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the
roll and the sheet, and the corresponding lamp on the Paper Source Section is lit.
14 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
g. Display Screen
Shows the printer menu, as well as the printer status and messages.
h. Color Label
This label indicates the Ink Tank color. The label corresponds to the ink level on the Display Screen.
i. HDD lamp (Green)
• On
Indicates the printer is accessing the hard disk.
• Off
Indicates the printer is not accessing the hard disk.
j. ◄ Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level higher.
k. ▲ Button
Ofine: Press this button to rewind rolls manually. (→P.190)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the previous menu item or setting value.
l. ▼ Button
Ofine mode: Press this button to feed the roll manually in the direction of ejection, as needed.
(→P.190)
Menu mode: Press this button to display the next menu item or setting value.
m.► Button
Menu mode: Press this button to display the menu one level lower.
n. OK Button
In Menu mode, press this button to conrm or execute the selected item or setting. Also press this
button if the Display Screen indicates to press the OK button.
o. Information Button
Displays printer submenus. Press this button to display information about ink, paper, and so on.
(→P.63)
You can also hold down this button for three seconds to clean the Printhead ( Head Cleaning A ).
p. Power Button
Turns the printer on and off. (→P.19)
q. Load/Eject Button
By pressing this button, you can check instructions on loading and removing paper. Instructions for
loading paper are shown on the Display Screen if pressed when no paper is loaded, and instructions
for removing paper are shown if paper is loaded.
r. Stop Button
Hold down for at least a second to cancel print jobs in progress or end the ink drying period.
Note
• In Sleep mode, you can press any button except the Power button to bring the printer online again.
Printer Parts 15
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Stand
a. Stand L
The left leg of the Stand.
b. Stand R
The right leg of the Stand.
c. Top Stand Stay
Supports Stand L and Stand R. Attach the optional Media Take-up Unit to this part.
d. Bottom Stand Stay
Supports Stand L and Stand R.
e. Leg Covers
Covers for Stand L and Stand R.
f. Stopper
Locks the Stand casters.
Always release the Stopper before moving the printer. Moving the printer while a Stopper is locked
may scratch the casters or the oor.
16 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Media Take-up Unit (Optional)
■Main Unit
a. Left Media Take-up Unit
Load the Rewind Spool here.
b. Right Media Take-up Unit
Load the Rewind Spool here. Includes the Media Take-up Unit Power button, ▲ and ▼ buttons to
advance or rewind paper, and a power cord.
c. Rewind Spool
Winds documents printed on rolls.
d. 3-inch Adapter
When rewinding rolls with 3-inch paper cores, attach the adapter to the Rewind Spool.
e. Media Take-up Sensor
A sensor for automatically rewinding rolls.
■Weight
a. Weight Roll (6)
Weights required when rewinding rolls. Use one roll or combine two (with a Weight Joint ),
depending on the roll width.
b. Weight Joint
Fastens two Weight Rolls.
c. Weight Flange (2 Sets)
Attached to the ends of Weight Roll to adjust the weight. Use Weight Flange 1 or Weight Flange
2, depending on the type of paper. (→P.232)
Printer Parts 17
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer parts
Output Stacker
a. Output Stacker
A cloth tray that catches ejected documents. (→P.221)
b. White tag
A point of reference for attaching the Output Stacker in the right direction.
c. Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L
Holds the Basket Rod (tag side) attached to the Output Stacker. When the Output Stacker is not
used, push it down and store it next to the Stand Leg.
d. Basket Rod (tag side) and Basket Rod (cord side)
Holds the cloth Output Stacker securely in specic positions.
e. Basket Rod
Keeps Basket Arm R and Basket Arm L at the same angle.
f. Rod Holder
Holds the middle of the Basket Rod (cord side).
18 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Control Panel
Turning the Printer On and Off
Turning the printer on
1.
Press the Power button to turn on the printer.
The printer will now start up.
After the Display Screen shows the Canon logo, Starting up... Please wait. is displayed.
2.
The printer goes online in preparation for printing after startup, and the Online lamp and paper
source section lamp remain lit.
The printer will not go online in the following situations. Take action as needed.
• The Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover.
• The Ink Tank Cover is open
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
• The Printhead is not installed
Please see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.697)
• Ink Tank is not installed
Please see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.680)
• “ERROR” is shown on the Display Screen
Turn off the printer and contact your Canon dealer.
• The Online lamp and Message lamp are not lit (even once), and nothing appears on the Display
Screen
Make sure the printer is plugged in correctly. Check the connection at the plug and electrical outlet.
• No paper is loaded
Load paper. (→P.142) (→P.146)
Important
• Starting the printer when it is connected via the USB cable to a Macintosh computer that is off may
cause the computer to start up at the same time. To prevent this, disconnect the USB cable before
starting the printer. Connecting the printer to the computer via a USB hub may solve this issue.
Printer Parts 19
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Turning the printer off
Important
• Never disconnect the printer’s power supply or unplug it during a print job. This could damage the printer.
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
If the Message lamp is ashing, check the message on the Display Screen and take action as
necessary. (→P.766)
If the Data lamp is ashing, the printer is receiving a print job. Turn off the printer only after
printing is nished.
2.
Hold down the Power button for more than a second.
After Shut Down.. Please Wait.. is shown on the Display Screen, the printer shuts off.
20 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Printer Modes
Printer modes are classied as follows and described in this topic.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Modes (→P.21)
Mode transition (→P.22)
Online, and state of the Control Panel (→P.23)
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel (→P.24)
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel (→P.25)
Modes
The printer has ve modes as follows:
• Online
The printer is ready to receive jobs sent from the computer. Jobs sent from the computer are processed
immediately. If jobs are received in other modes, they are printed the next time the printer goes online.
• Ofine
Any jobs sent from the computer are held without being processed.
While the printer is ofine, you can feed or cut roll paper manually.
The printer goes ofine automatically if jobs cannot be processed, such as if errors occur.
• Menu mode
Menus are displayed on the printer, and you can select, set, or execute menu items. Any jobs sent
from the computer are held without being printed.
• Submenus
Submenus are displayed regarding ink and paper information. Jobs can be received and printing is
possible while submenus are displayed and the printer is online. In other modes, any jobs sent from the
computer are held without being printed while submenus are displayed.
• Sleep mode
The printer is in power-saving mode. The printer automatically enters Sleep mode to conserve power if
it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or
buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
You can specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode in the Sleep Timer menu. (→P.49)
If any print jobs are received when the printer is in Sleep mode (after it was originally online), the
printer goes online and prints the jobs.
Printer Parts 21
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Mode transition
The printer mode transitions are as follows:
*1: When submenus are displayed, you can press any button other than the Information button to return
to the previous mode.
*2: The printer automatically enters Sleep mode if it is idle for a specic period (by factory default, ve
minutes), that is, if no print jobs are received or buttons are pressed while all covers are closed.
However, it does not enter Sleep mode while error messages are displayed.
*3: In Sleep mode, the printer can be restored to the previous state by pressing any button. Sleep mode is
also terminated if a print job is received or a command is issued from RemoteUI.
22 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Online, and state of the Control Panel
Not printing
Printing in progress (receiving or
processing print jobs)
Display Screen
• Top Level of the Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right
corner.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.766)
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
• Bottom Level of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.692)
Control Panel
• Online lamp
Lit when the printer is online.
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received or processed.
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Printer Parts 23
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Ofine, and state of the Control Panel
Ofine
Not printing
Printing is paused
Display Screen
• Display Screen
The printer status is displayed here. The selected paper source is indicated by an icon in the upper-right
corner.
Any warning messages are displayed here on lines 2-4. Take action as needed. (→P.766)
• Middle Level of the Display Screen
The rst and second lines display the paper type and size.
• Bottom Level of the Display Screen
Here, the remaining ink level is indicated. (→P.692)
Control Panel
• Message lamp
Lit when warning messages are displayed.
Error Messages
If action can be taken
If no action can be taken
• Top and Middle Levels
• Top and Middle Levels
• Top and Middle Levels
of the Display Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Level of the
Display Screen
Here, the remaining
ink level is indicated.
(→P.692)
of the Display Screen
Error messages are
displayed.
• Bottom Level of the
Display Screen
The corrective actions
are displayed here.
of the Display Screen
The error message
is displayed with the
following instructions:
Turn off printer, wait,
then turn on again.
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Take action as needed. (→P.766)
24 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
• Display Screen
“ERROR” is displayed,
followed by the error
code and Call for
service.
• Data lamp
Flashes when print jobs are being received.
• Message lamp
Flashes when error messages are displayed.
Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
before restoring the power.
If the message is still displayed after this, write down
the error code and message, turn off the printer, and
contact the Canon dealer for assistance.
Control Panel
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Main menu
• Display Screen
Pressing the Menu button
when printing is not in progress
displays the main menu.
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menus immediately under
the current menu are displayed
on the second and subsequent
lines. The lower level menus
are available if “►” is displayed
at right. (→P.30)
Menu items and settings
• Display Screen
The title of the selected menu
is displayed on the rst line,
and menu items or settings are
displayed on the second and
subsequent lines. (→P.30)
The menu of options available
during printing (top gure) can
be displayed by pressing the ►
button when the main menu is
displayed (left gure).
Main menu (during printing)
• Display Screen
Menus available during printing
are displayed if you press the
Menu button during printing.
If you select a menu, the title of
the selected menu is displayed
on the rst line, and menus
immediately under the current
menu are displayed on the
second and subsequent lines.
The lower level menus are
available if “►” is displayed at
right. (→P.30)
Submenu mode, and state of the Control Panel
Remaining Maintenance
Information of the loaded paper
Cartridge capacity and ink levels
Printer information
Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information. (→P.63)
Printer Parts 25
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Switching Modes
Switching the Printer Online/Ofine
Press the Online button to switch the printer online or ofine.
The Online lamp is lit in Online mode. Printing is possible in this mode.
The Online lamp is off in Ofine mode.
Depending on the status, the printer switches online and ofine as follows.
Printer Status
When the Online Button is Pressed
Online
The printer switches ofine and the Online lamp goes
off.
Online, printing
Switches ofine and printing is paused.
When printing is paused, the Printing menu is
available.
Ofine
If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online
and the Online lamp is lit.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
In the case of error messages other than those
shown below or if paper is not loaded, the printer
remains ofine until you solve the problem. The
Online lamp remains off.
If the following error messages are displayed, the
printer switches online and printing is resumed.
• Insufcient paper for job
• PHead needs cleaning.
• Papr Size Mismatch
• Papr Type Mismatch
Menu mode
If paper has been advanced, the printer goes online
and the Online lamp is lit.
Menu mode, printing
Switches online and the Online lamp is lit.
Printing is resumed.
26 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Switching to Menu Mode
Press the Menu button to display the main menu.
Depending on the status, the printer switches to Menu mode as follows.
When the Menu Button is Pressed
Printer Status
Online
Switches to Menu mode.
Online, printing
Either menus available during printing or a screen to
manage print jobs is displayed. If you select a menu,
the printer switches to that menu mode.
Ofine
Switches to Menu mode.
Ofine, printing
Menus available during printing are displayed.
Ofine, when an error message is displayed
Not switch to Menu mode until the problem is solved.
Press the Information button to display the submenus.
Press the Information button to display the Maintenance Cartridge capacity and remaining ink levels, as well
as information on the loaded paper and the printer. Press the Information button repeatedly to change the
information displayed. (→P.63)
Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ve seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Note
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
(→P.696)
Printer Parts 27
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Printer Menu Operations
The printer menu includes a main menu and submenus.
• Main menu operations when no print job is in progress (→P.28)
• Main menu operations during printing (→P.28)
• Submenu operations (→P.29)
Main menu operations when no print job is in progress
Access the main menu by pressing the Menu button on the Control Panel.
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following case even if you press the Menu button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu.
•
•
•
•
Paper settings
Print settings
Printer settings
Job management
For a description of specic items available in the main menu, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)
Note
• By default, main menu settings apply to all print jobs. However, for settings that are also available in the
printer driver, the values specied in the printer driver take priority.
Main menu operations during printing
After pressing the Online button during printing to pause printing, if you press the Menu button on the
Control Panel, only the menu options you can execute during printing ( Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj.,
Information, and Job Mgmt Menu ) are displayed.
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed during printing in the following case even if you press the Menu
button.
• An error message is displayed:
Switches to Menu mode after the problem is solved.
The following operations are available from the main menu during printing.
•
•
•
•
Printhead cleaning
Manual adjustment of the paper feed amount
Display of printer-related information
Job management
For a description of specic items available in the main menu during printing, see “Main Menu Settings
(During Printing)”. (→P.60)
For instructions on selecting and setting main menu items during printing, see “Main Menu Operations”.
(→P.30)
28 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Submenu operations
Access submenus by pressing the Information button on the Control Panel. You can check the following
information in submenus.
•
•
•
•
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity
Ink levels
Information on the loaded paper
Printer information
For a description of specic items displayed in submenus, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.63)
Printer Parts 29
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Main Menu Operations
Press the Menu button to display the main menu. For details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)
• Main menu (displayed if you press the Menu button when printing is not in progress)
• Menu selection (if you press the Menu button when printing is in progress)
Note
• The main menu will not be displayed in the following cases even if you press the Menu button.
• An error message is displayed
You can access the Menu mode after you have solved the problem.
To access each function menu from the main menu, and set or execute menu items, use buttons on the
Control Panel.
The following section describes menu operations and how they are presented in this User Manual.
•
•
•
•
Accessing Menus (→P.31)
Specifying menu items (→P.32)
Specifying numerical values (→P.33)
Executing menu commands (→P.34)
30 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Accessing Menus
Printer menus are grouped by function.
Menus are displayed with the upper line selected. Use the buttons on the Control Panel to access each menu.
• Press ▲ to access a higher menu in the menu list, and press ▼ to access a lower one. If items of the
menu list are more than the lines of the screen, press ▲ and ▼ to scroll the menu. Items you select
are highlighted.
The scroll bar at right indicates the current position in the overall menu.
• The lower level menus are available if “►” is displayed at right. To access these lower level menus,
select a menu and press ►.
• The upper level menus are available if “◄” is displayed at left. To access these upper level menus,
select a menu and press ◄.
Printer Parts 31
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Specifying menu items
Follow the steps below to specify menu items.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting, and then press the OK button.
The check box at left is selected, and the setting is conrmed.
After two seconds, the display reverts to the upper level menu.
3.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
32 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Specifying numerical values
Follow the steps below to enter numbers for items such as network settings.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
Note
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
• Make sure the IP address you enter for the printer is not the same as any computer IP address
in your network.
7.
8.
Repeat steps 2 and 3 to continue entering numbers.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Note
• If a conrmation message is displayed regarding the setting you entered, press the OK button. The
setting is applied, and the printer goes online.
Printer Parts 33
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Executing menu commands
Follow the steps below to execute menu commands.
1.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select a menu, and then press the ► button.
Repeat these steps until the desired menu options are displayed.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the action to execute, and then press the OK button.
After two seconds, the menu command is executed. After commands are executed, the printer
commonly reverts to the state before the menu operation, either online or ofine.
34 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Menu Structure
Main Menu
The structure of the main menu is as follows. Values at right indicated by an asterisk “*” are the defaults.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)
For details on menu items, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)
First Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Second Level
Fifth Level
Paper Cutting (*1)
No *
Yes
Rep. Ink Tank
No *
Yes
Head Cleaning
Head Cleaning A *
Head Cleaning B
Auto Feed (*11)
No *
Yes
Take-up Reel (*9)
Disable *
Enable
Media Menu
Cut Sheet Type
Plain Paper (*5)
Plain Paper HQ
(*5)
Plain Paper HG
(*5)
Recycled Coated
(*5)
Coated Paper (*5)
HW Coated (*5)
Ex HW Coated (*5)
Premium MatteP
(*5)
Glossy Photo (*5)
Semi-Gl Photo (*5)
HW GlossyPhoto2
(*5)
HW SemiGlPhoto2
(*5)
Poster Semi-Gl
(*5)
Syn. Paper (*5)
Adh. Syn. Paper
(*5)
Backlit Film (*5)
Printer Parts 35
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Backprint Film (*5)
Flame-Res.Cloth
(*5)
Fabric Banner (*5)
ThinFab.Banner
(*5)
Proong Paper
(*5)
News Proof 1 (*5)
News Proof 2 (*5)
FineArt Photo (*5)
FneArt HW Photo
(*5)
FineArt Txtr (*5)
FineArt Wtrclr (*5)
FineArtBlockP (*5)
Canvas Matte (*5)
JPN Paper Washi
(*5)
Colored Coated
(*5)
CAD Trace Paper
(*5)
CAD Matte Film
(*5)
CAD Clear Film
(*5)
Special # Here, the
number is 1-10 (*5)
Roll Media Type
(*1)
Plain Paper (*5)
Plain Paper HQ
(*5)
Plain Paper HG
(*5)
Recycled Coated
(*5)
Coated Paper (*5)
HW Coated (*5)
Ex HW Coated (*5)
36 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Premium MatteP
(*5)
Glossy Photo (*5)
Semi-Gl Photo (*5)
HW GlossyPhoto2
(*5)
HW SemiGlPhoto2
(*5)
Poster Semi-Gl
(*5)
Syn. Paper (*5)
Adh. Syn. Paper
(*5)
Backlit Film (*5)
Backprint Film (*5)
Flame-Res.Cloth
(*5)
Fabric Banner (*5)
ThinFab.Banner
(*5)
Proong Paper
(*5)
News Proof 1 (*5)
News Proof 2 (*5)
FineArt Photo (*5)
FneArt HW Photo
(*5)
FineArt Txtr (*5)
FineArt Wtrclr (*5)
FineArtBlockP (*5)
Canvas Matte (*5)
JPN Paper Washi
(*5)
Colored Coated
(*5)
CAD Trace Paper
(*5)
CAD Matte Film
(*5)
Printer Parts 37
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
CAD Clear Film
(*5)
Special # Here, the
number is 1-10 (*5)
Chk Remain.Roll
Off *
On
Roll Length Set (*1, ### m
*2)
### feet
Paper Details
(The paper type is
Roll DryingTime
displayed here.) (*5)
Off
30 sec.
1 min.
3 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
60 min.
Scan Wait Time
Off
1 sec.
3 sec.
5 sec.
7 sec.
9 sec.
Feed Priority
Automatic *
Band Joint
Print Length
Adjust Length
From -0.70% to
0.70%
Head Height
Automatic *
Highest
High
Standard
Low
Lowest
Skew Check Lv.
Standard *
Loose
38 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Off
VacuumStrngth
Automatic *
Strongest
Strong
Standard
Weak
Weakest
Width Detection
Off
On *
NearEnd RollMrgn 5mm
20mm
Cut Speed
Fast
Standard
Slow
Trim Edge First
Automatic
Off
On
Cutting Mode
Automatic
Eject
Manual
Bordless Margin
Automatic
Fixed
CutDustReduct.
Off
On
NearEnd Sht Mrgn 3mm
20mm
Return Defaults
No
Yes
Job Management
Job Queue Ope.
Job List
(Choose a print job.) Delete
Priority
Com. BOX Ope.
Job List
(Choose a print job.) Print
Delete
Print Job List
No
Yes
Psnl. BOX Ope.
Job List
Print
Printer Parts 39
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Delete
Print Job List
No
Yes
Adjust Printer
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj.
No
Yes
Auto Print
Off
On *
Manual Head Adj
(*10)
No
Yes
Auto Band Adj.
Standard Adj.
No
Yes
Advanced Adj.
No
Yes
Manual Band Adj
No
Yes
Adjust Length (*3)
No
Yes
Calibration
Auto Adjust
No
Yes
Calibration Log
Date
Paper Type
Use Adj. Value
Disabled
Enabled *
Return Defaults
No
Yes
Interface Setup
EOP Timer
10 sec.
30 sec.
1 min.
2 min.
5 min.
10 min. *
30 min.
40 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
60 min.
TCP/IP
IP Mode
Automatic
Manual *
Protocol (*4)
DHCP
On
Off *
BOOTP
On
Off *
RARP
On
Off *
IP Setting
NetWare
NetWare
IP Address
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Subnet Mask
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
Default G/W
0.0.0.0 255.255.255.255
On
Off *
Frame Type (*6)
Auto Detect
Ethernet 2
Ethernet 802.2 *
Ethernet 802.3
Ethernet SNAP
Print Service (*6)
BinderyPServer
RPrinter
NDSPServer *
NPrinter
AppleTalk
On
Off *
Ethernet Driver
Auto Detect
On *
Off
Comm.Mode (*7)
Half Duplex *
Full Duplex
Ethernet Type (*7) 10 Base-T *
100 Base-TX
Spanning Tree
Not Use *
Use
Printer Parts 41
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
MAC Address
Ext. Interface
Fourth Level
000085XXXXXX
No *
IEEE1394
Return Defaults
No *
Yes
Maintenance
Repl. maint cart
No
Yes
Replace P.head
Printhead L
No
Yes
Printhead R
No
Yes
L & R Printheads
No
Yes
Repl. S. Cleaner
No
Yes
Change Cutter
No
Yes
Move Printer
Level 1 *
Level 2
Level 3
System Setup
Warning
Buzzer
Off
On *
Detect Mismatch
Pause
Warning
None *
Skip Take-Up Err
(*9)
Off *
On
Keep Media Size
Off *
On
Paper Size Basis
Sht Selection 1
ISO A3+ *
13"x19"(Super B)
Sht Selection 2
ISO B1
28"x40" (ANSI F)
Noz. Check Freq.
42 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Off
Fifth Level
Control Panel
First Level
Second Level
Third Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
1 page
10 pages
Automatic *
Sleep Timer
5 min. *
10 min.
15 min.
20 min.
30 min.
40 min.
50 min.
60 min.
240 min.
Length Unit
meter *
feet/inch
Time Zone
0:London (GMT)
+1:Paris,Rome
+2:Athens,Cairo
+3:Moscow
+4:Eerevan,Baku
+5:Islamabad
+6:Dacca
+7:Bangkok
+8:Hong Kong
+9:Tokyo,Seoul
+10:Canberra
+11NewCaledonia
+12:Wellington
-12:Eniwetok
-11:Midway is.
-10Hawaii(AHST)
-9:Alaska(AKST)
-8:Oregon (PST)
-7:Arizona(MST)
-6:Texas (CST)
-5:NewYork(EST)
Printer Parts 43
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
-4:Santiago
-3:Buenos Aires
-2:
-1:Cape Verde
Date Format
yyyy/mm/dd *
dd/mm/yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
Date & Time
Date
yyyy/mm/dd (*8)
Time
Language
Contrast Adj.
-4,-3,-2,-1,0*,
+1,+2,+3,+4
Reset PaprSetngs
No
Yes
Erase HDD Data
Null
No
Yes
Random Data 1x
No
Yes
Random Data 3x
No
Yes
Test Print
Status Print
44 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
No
hh:mm
Control Panel
First Level
Third Level
Second Level
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
Yes
Media Details
No
Yes
Print Job Log
No
Yes
Menu Map
No
Yes
Nozzle Check
No
Yes
Information
System Info
Error Log
########-####
Job Log
(Choose from
Document Name
information about
the latest three print
jobs.)
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start Time
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Print End Time
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm
Print Time
xxx sec.
Print Size
xxxxxxxxsq.mm
Media Type
Interface
Ink Consumed
xx.x ml
*1:
*2:
*3:
*4:
*5:
Available only if a roll is loaded.
Available only if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
Available if Feed Priority is Automatic or Print Length.
Not displayed if IP Mode is Manual.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.169) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.See the Media Conguration Tool Guide
(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
*6: Not displayed if NetWare is Off.
*7: Not displayed if Auto Detect is On.
*8: Follows the setting in Date Format.
*9: Displayed if the Media Take-up Unit is attached.
*10: Available after you have used Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. once.
Printer Parts 45
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
*11: Available if: (a) Take-up Reel is Enable, (b) roll paper is loaded, and (c) you have not executed
Auto Feed for the loaded roll.
*12: Not displayed if IP Mode is Automatic.
*13: Follows the setting in Length Unit.
Caution
• Only the following menus are displayed during printing.
• Menu Durng Prtng
Choose this menu to display Head Cleaning, Fine Band Adj., and Information.
• Job Mgmt Menu
Choose this menu to display Job Management.
Submenus
Each time you press the Information button on the Control Panel, printer information is displayed in the
following order.
■The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
■Information on the loaded paper
■Printer information
For details on submenu screens, see “Submenu Display”. (→P.63)
46 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Main menu during printing
The structure of the main menu during printing is as follows.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)
For details on menu items available during printing, see “Main Menu Settings (During Printing)”. (→P.60)
Second
Seventh
First Level
Third Level Fourth Level Fifth Level
Sixth Level
Level
Level
Menu Durng Head
Head
Prtng
Cleaning
Cleaning A
Head
Cleaning B
Fine Band
Adj.
From -5 to 5
Information
System Info
Error Log
######## ####
Job Log
(Choose from Document
information
Name
about the
latest three
print jobs.)
User Name
Page Count
Job Status
Print Start
Time
Print End
Time
Print Time
Print Size
Media Type
Interface
Ink
Consumed
HDD
Information
Job Mgmt
Menu
Job Queue
Ope.
Job List
(Choose a
print job.)
Priority
Delete
Com. BOX
Ope.
Job List
(Choose a
print job.)
Print
Delete
Print Job List No
Yes
Printer Parts 47
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
First Level
Second
Level
Psnl. BOX
Ope.
Third Level
Folder List
Fourth Level
Fifth Level
(Enter a
Job List
password if
one has been
set.)
Sixth Level
(Choose a
print job.)
Seventh
Level
Print
Delete
Print Job List No
Yes
48 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings
Main menu items are described in the following tables.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Paper Cutting
This command is available only if a roll is loaded.
Choose Yes to cut the roll at the current position. However, if paper cannot be
advanced to the cut position, it will not be cut. In this case, manually advance the
roll before cutting it. (→P.190)
Rep. Ink Tank
When replacing the Ink Tank , choose Yes and follow the instructions on the screen.
(→P.680)
Head Cleaning
Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.696)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or contains foreign
substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is not improved
by Head Cleaning A.
Auto Feed
This command is available only if Take-up Reel is set to Enable. Choose Yes to
advance roll paper automatically on the Rewind Spool , up to the fastening position.
Take-up Reel
Choose Enable to use the Media Take-up Unit .
Media Menu
Specify the type and size of paper. (→P.50)
Paper Details
Specify detailed paper-related settings, including the ink drying time and borderless
printing options. (→P.51)
Job Management
Manage print jobs on the printer’s hard disk. (→P.53)
Adjust Printer
Adjust the Printhead alignment or amount of feed by printing a test pattern. (→P.54)
Interface Setup
Congure the EOP timer and network settings. (→P.55)
Maintenance
Access maintenance settings when replacing the Printhead or preparing to move
the printer. (→P.56)
System Setup
Specify the printer system settings, including the date format and display language.
(→P.57)
Test Print
Choose Status Print to print information about the printer.
Choose Media Details to print the paper settings as specied in Paper Details.
Choose Print Job Log to print a record of print jobs, including the paper type and
size, amount of ink used, and so on. (Information on ink consumption is general,
not specic in nature.)
Choose Menu Map to print a list of the main menu options.
Choose Nozzle Check to print a test pattern for checking the nozzles.
Information
Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs. (→P.59)
Printer Parts 49
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Media Menu
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Cut Sheet Type (*1)
Choose the type of sheets.
(→P.215)
Roll Media Type (*1)
Choose the type of roll.
(→P.188)
Chk Remain.Roll
Choose On to print a barcode at the end of a roll before you remove it. The printed
barcode can be used in managing the amount of roll paper left. Choose Off if you
prefer not to print the barcode.
Roll Length Set
Displayed if Chk Remain.Roll is On.
If a barcode is not printed on rolls, specify the roll length. The roll length is displayed
in meters or feet, depending on the setting in Length Unit.
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.169) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide
(Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
50 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Paper Details
Setting Item
(The paper type is Roll DryingTime
displayed here.)(*1)
Scan Wait Time
Description, Instructions
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry for each sheet.
Specify the time to wait for the ink to dry between each scan in
bidirectional printing, in consideration of how quickly the ink
dries. Note that printing will take longer if you specify a wait time.
Feed Priority
Specify exact paper feeding, if desired. Normally, select
Automatic. Choose Print Length if you prefer to feed the
paper an exact amount. However, note that choosing Print
Length may result in slight banding in the direction of Carriage
scanning.
Adjust Length
Displayed if Feed Priority is Print Length.
Adjustment relative to the amount of stretching or shrinkage of
the current paper.
Enter either the adjustment results from Print Pattern or the
discrepancy that you measured (as a percentage).
For paper that tends to stretch, increase the feed amount by
choosing a higher adjustment value. For paper that tends
to shrink, decrease the feed amount by choosing a lower
adjustment value.
Head Height
Adjust the Printhead height. (→P.654)
Skew Check Lv.
If you print on Japanese paper (washi) or other handmade
paper that has an irregular width, choose Loose for a higher
skew detection threshold, or choose Off to disable skew
detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when detection is
Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
VacuumStrngth
Specify the level of suction that holds paper against the Platen .
(→P.661)
Width Detection
When this setting is set to Off , the printer prints without
detecting the paper width. Specify Off when printing at a width
different from the paper width.
NearEnd RollMrgn
Specify the minimum margin at the leading edge of roll paper to
ensure better printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 5mm , it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge. It may also cause the Platen to become soiled.
Cut Speed
Choose the cutting speed. If you use adhesive paper, choosing
Slow helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter and
keeps the cutter sharp.
Trim Edge First
If a roll is loaded, the end of the paper will be cut.
Cutting Mode
Specify whether or not to cut with the standard round-bladed
cutter.
Choose Automatic to have the roll cut automatically after
printing. If you choose Manual, the paper will not be cut after
printing. Instead, a line will be printed at the cut position.
Choose Eject if you prefer not to have documents dropped
immediately after printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.
Printer Parts 51
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Setting Item
(The paper type is Bordless Margin
displayed here.)(*1)
Description, Instructions
Adjust the margin during borderless printing.
Choose Automatic to have the printer automatically detect the
paper width and congure the margin settings for borderless
printing. If margins are mistakenly created when Automatic is
selected, choose Fixed. In this case, the paper width is not
detected automatically, and the document is printed without
borders, using the margin settings required by the printer.
CutDustReduct.
Choose On to reduce the amount of debris generated when
cutting lm and similar media by printing a line at the cut
position. This option reduces the amount of debris given off after
cutting. It also helps prevent adhesive from sticking to the cutter
and keeps the cutter sharp if you use adhesive paper. (→P.197)
NearEnd Sht Mrgn
Specify a margin at the leading edge of sheets to ensure better
printing quality at the leading edge.
Note that if you choose 3mm , it may lower the printing quality
at the leading edge and affect feeding accuracy. The printed
surface may be scratched, and ink may adhere to the leading
edge.
Return Defaults
Choose Yes to restore Paper Details to the factory default
values.
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.169) The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control
Panel ) is updated when you install the printer driver from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool.
52 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Job Management
Description,
Instructions
Delete the
current job or
queued jobs.
(→P.115)
Setting Item
Job Queue
Ope.
Job List
Com. BOX Ope. Job List
(Choose a print
job)
(Choose a print
job)
Delete
Priority
Print the job
rst after the
current print
job is nished.
(→P.115)
Print
Print jobs in the
Common Box.
Delete
Delete jobs in
the Common
Box.
Print Job List
Psnl. BOX Ope. Folder List
Print a list of jobs
in the Common
Box.
(Enter a
password if one
has been set.)
Job List
Print Job List
Print
Print jobs in
Personal Boxes.
Delete
Delete jobs in
Personal Boxes.
Print a list of
jobs in Personal
Boxes.
Printer Parts 53
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Adjust Printer
Setting Item
Auto Head Adj.
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern
for the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to
the printing direction. (→P.650)
Advanced Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a test pattern for
the automatic adjustment of Printhead alignment relative to the
nozzle and printing direction. (→P.650)
Auto Print
Choose On to have the printer automatically execute the
Advanced Adj. operations after you replace the Printhead .
(→P.650)
Manual Head Adj
Auto Band Adj.
Description, Instructions
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment of Printhead
alignment relative to the printing direction. Enter the adjustment
value manually based on the resulting pattern. (→P.652)
Standard Adj.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount.
(→P.655)
Advanced Adj.
Choose this option when using paper other than genuine Canon
paper, or paper for purposes other than checking output.
Choose Yes to have the printer print and read a band adjustment
test pattern for automatic adjustment of the feed amount. Note
that this function takes more time and requires more ink than
Standard Adj. (→P.655)
Manual Band Adj
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjusting the feed amount
based on the paper type.
(→P.658)
Adjust Length
Choose Yes to print a test pattern for adjustment relative to
paper stretching or shrinkage, after which you can enter the
amount of adjustment. (→P.662)
Calibration
Auto Adjust
Choose Yes for automatic adjustment of the adjustment value
after a test pattern for color calibration is printed. The latest color
calibration adjustment value is applied for all paper.
Calibration Log
The date of color calibration and the paper type is indicated on
the Display Screen .
Use Adj. Value
Choose Disabled and press the OK button to print without
applying the color calibration adjustment value. The printer
driver settings are given priority.
Select Enabled and press the OK button to apply the color
calibration adjustment value in printing. However, the printer
driver settings will be given priority.
Return Defaults
Clears the color calibration adjustment value and log.
54 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
EOP Timer
TCP/IP
Specify the timeout period before cancellation of
print jobs that cannot be received by the printer.
IP Mode
Protocol
Choose whether the printer IP address is
congured automatically or a static IP address is
entered manually.
DHCP
BOOTP
Specify the protocol used to congure the IP
address automatically.
RARP
IP Setting
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default G/W
NetWare
NetWare
Specify the NetWare protocol. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting .
Frame Type
Specify the frame type to use.
Print Service
Choose the print service.
AppleTalk
Ethernet Driver
Specify the printer network information when using
a static IP address.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer, as
well as the network subnet mask and default
gateway.
Specify whether to use the AppleTalk protocol. To
apply your changes, choose Register Setting .
Auto Detect
Specify the communication method. To apply your
changes, choose Register Setting .
Choose On for automatic conguration of the
LAN communication protocol. Choose Off to use
settings values of Comm.Mode and Ethernet
Type.
Comm.Mode
Choose the LAN communication method.
Ethernet Type
Choose the LAN transfer rate.
Spanning Tree
Choose whether spanning-tree packets are
supported over the LAN.
MAC Address
Displays the MAC address.
Ext. Interface
Choose the expansion interface.
Return Defaults
Execute? is displayed if you press the ▼ button.
Choose OK to restore the network settings to the
default values.
Printer Parts 55
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Maintenance
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Repl. maint cart
When replacing the Maintenance Cartridge , choose Yes and follow
the instructions on the screen. (→P.708)
Replace P.head
Not displayed during a warning message that the remaining
Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low.
When replacing the Printhead , choose Yes and follow the instructions
on the screen. (→P.697)
Repl. S. Cleaner
When replacing the Shaft Cleaner , choose Yes and follow the
instructions on the screen. (→P.708)
Change Cutter
When replacing the Cutter Unit , choose Yes and follow the
instructions on the screen. (→P.705)
You can also reset the cut counter after the Cutter Unit is replaced.
Move Printer
When transferring the printer to another location, choose the level of
transfer and follow the instructions on the screen. (→P.724)
56 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
System Setup
Setting Item
Warning
Description, Instructions
Buzzer
Set the buzzer. Choose On for the buzzer to sound once for
warnings and three times for errors.
Detect Mismatch
Choose Warning for notication (display of a warning
message) during printing if the paper type specied in
the printer menu does not match the paper type in the
printer driver. Choose None to continue to print without
notication. Choose Pause to have printing paused under
these circumstances. In this case, you can continue printing
by pressing the Online button.
Skip Take-Up Err
Choose On to continue with printing even if an error occurs
with the Media Take-up Unit . Choose Off to have the printer
pause before printing if a rewinding error occurs.
Keep Media Size
Choose On to use the paper size setting as the basis for
printing instead of other settings. The margin setting of the
printer menu will be used instead of the margin setting of the
printer driver if the latter is smaller, which may prevent text or
images in the margin from being printed.
Choose Off to use the printer driver settings instead. Even if
the margin setting of the printer driver is smaller than that of
the printer driver, text or images will not be cut off. However,
this requires longer paper because the actual margin will be
equal to the margin setting of the printer driver plus the margin
setting of the printer menu.
Paper Size Basis
Sht Selection 1
If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO A3+
or 13"x19"(Super B) is applied when an intermediate size is
detected.
Sht Selection 2
If sheet size detection is activated, choose whether ISO B1
or 28"x40" (ANSI F) is applied when an intermediate size is
detected.
Noz. Check Freq.
Specify the timing for automatic checks of nozzle clogging.
Choose 1 page to check once per printed page. Choose
10 pages to check once per ten printed pages. Choose
Automatic to have the printer automatically adjust the timing
for checks based on the frequency of nozzle use.
Sleep Timer
Specify the period before the printer enters Sleep mode.
Printer Parts 57
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Setting Item
Description, Instructions
Length Unit
Choose the unit of measurement when roll length is displayed.
You can switch the unit displayed for Roll Length Set and the
remaining paper amount displayed in the submenu.
Time Zone
Specify the time zone. Time zone options indicate a main city
in this time zone and the difference from Greenwich Mean
Time.
Date Format
Specify the date format.
Date & Time
Date
Set the current date.
Time
Set the current time.
Language
Specify the language used on the Display Screen .
Contrast Adj.
Adjust the Display Screen contrast level.
Reset PaprSetngs
Restores settings that you have changed with Media
Conguration Tool to the factory default values. If paper
added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color
calibration, such color calibration can no longer be applied to
any type of paper.
Erase HDD Data
Erase all data on the hard disk.
58 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Version
Description, Instructions
Firm
Displays the printer rmware version.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot
ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT
database format.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address of the
printer.
IP
Displays the printer’s IP address.
Error Log
########-####
Displays the most recent error
messages (up to two).
Job Log
(Choose from
information about
the latest three print
jobs.)
HDD Information
HDDSpace
Document Name
Displays the document name in the
last print job.
User Name
Displays the name of the user who
sent the print job.
Page Count
Displays the number of pages in the
print job.
Job Status
Displays the results of the print job
processed.
Print Start Time
Displays the time when the print job
was started.
Print End Time
Displays the time when the print job
was nished.
Print Time
Displays the time required to print the
job.
Print Size
Displays the paper size in the print
job.
Media Type
Displays the paper type in the print
job.
Interface
Displays the interface used for the
print job.
Ink Consumed
Displays the ink consumption.
Displays the space available on the
printer’s hard disk.
Printer Parts 59
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Main Menu Settings (During Printing)
Main menu items during printing are described in the following tables.
For instructions on menu operations, see “Main Menu Operations”. (→P.30)
For details on menu levels and values, see “Menu Structure”. (→P.35)
Setting Item
Menu Durng
Prtng
Description, Instructions
Head Cleaning
Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.696)
Choose Head Cleaning A if printing is faint, oddly colored, or
contains foreign substances.
Choose Head Cleaning B if no ink is printed at all, or if printing is
not improved by Head Cleaning A.
Fine Band Adj.
Fine-tune the feed amount manually.
Information
Displays information about the printer and record of print jobs.
(→P.61)
Job Mgmt Menu
60 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Perform operations related to print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.
(→P.62)
Control Panel
Information
Setting Item
System Info
Version
Description, Instructions
Firm
Displays the version of the printer and
rmware.
Boot
Displays the version of the boot ROM.
MIT
Displays the version of the MIT
database format.
Ext I/F
Displays the name of interfaces
compatible with the expansion slot.
s/n
Displays the printer’s serial number.
MAC
Displays the MAC address.
HDDSpace
Displays the space available on the
printer’s hard disk.
Error Log
########-####
Displays the most recent error
messages (up to two).
Job Log
(Choose from
information about
the latest three print
jobs.)
HDD Information
HDDSpace
Document Name
Displays the document name in the last
print job.
User Name
Displays the name of the user who sent
the print job.
Page Count
Displays the number of pages in the
print job.
Job Status
Displays the results of the print job
processed.
Print Start Time
Displays the time when the print job
was started.
Print End Time
Displays the time when the print job
was nished.
Print Time
Displays the time required to print the
job.
Print Size
Displays the paper size in the print job.
Media Type
Displays the paper type in the print job.
Interface
Displays the interface used for the print
job.
Ink Consumed
Displays the ink consumption.
Displays the space available on the
printer’s hard disk.
Printer Parts 61
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Job Mgmt Menu
Description,
Instructions
Print the job rst
after the current
print job is
nished printing.
(→P.115)
Setting Item
Job Queue
Ope.
Job List
Com. BOX Ope. Job List
(Choose a print
job.)
(Choose a print
job.)
Priority
Delete
Delete the
current job or
queued jobs.
(→P.115)
Print
Print jobs in the
Common Box.
Delete
Delete jobs in
the Common
Box.
Print Job List
Psnl. BOX Ope. Folder List
Print a list of jobs
in the Common
Box.
(Enter a
password if one
has been set.)
Job List
Print Job List
62 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print
Print jobs in
Personal Boxes.
Delete
Delete jobs in
Personal Boxes.
Print a list of
jobs in Personal
Boxes.
Control Panel
Submenu Display
Press the Information button to display this information, one after another: the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and remaining ink levels, paper information, and printer information.
Each time you press the Information button, the following submenus are displayed.
Note
• Press any button other than the Information button to restore the previous mode.
• After you display a submenu, the printer will revert to the previous mode in about ve seconds if no print
job is received or if you do not operate the printer.
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and ink levels
The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is shown on the top level of the Display Screen.
The remaining level of each ink is shown on the bottom level of the Display Screen. Ink levels shown on the
Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the color labels on the bottom of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
Remaining ink is indicated as follows.
Information of the loaded paper
Here, the paper size, type, and related printer settings are displayed.
Printer information
Displays the rmware version, serial number, IP address, and hard disk capacity.
Printer Parts 63
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Status Print
You can print a Status Print report indicating the current status of the printer.
With Status Print, information is printed regarding the printer rmware version, various settings, and the
utilization level of consumables.
Printing Status Print Reports
1.
Load paper.
If using sheets, load paper A4/Letter-sized. You will need at least four sheets.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Checking the information in the Status Print report
The following information is included in the Status Print report.
Canon imagePROGRAF iPFxxxx Status Print
Printer model
Firm
Firmware Version
Boot
Boot ROM Version
MIT(DBF)
MIT Database Format Version
MIT(DB)
MIT Database Version
S/N
Printer serial number
MC
Maintenance Cartridge capacity (%)
Y, PC, C, PGY, GY, BK, PM, M, MBk, Ink levels.
R, G, and B
The remaining ink is displayed in a ve-level scale.
64 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Takeup-Reel
Status of the Media Take-up Unit
Media Menu
Information on the loaded paper.
Roll Media Type
Check Remain. Roll
Cut Sheet Type
Adjust Printer
Current printer settings.
Head Adjust
Printhead adjustment value.
Auto Print
A1-F2
Feed Priority
Settings related to paper feeding.
Adjust Length
Calibration
The color calibration setting value.
Execution Log
Date:
Media:
Use Adj. Value:
The calibration log.
Indicates the date calibration was performed and the type of paper
used.
This value indicates whether the results of color calibration are used
or not.
Printer Parts 65
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Interface Setup
Current network settings.
EOP Timer
Sets the elapsed time between receiving last data and
canceling printing.
TCP/IP
Settings related to TCP/IP .
IP Mode
Protocol
DHCP
BOOTP
RARP
IP Setting
IP Setting values.
IP Address
Subnet
Mask
Default
G/W
NetWare
NetWare settings.
NetWare
Frame Type
Print Service
AppleTalk
Values that specify whether AppleTalk is active or not.
Ethernet Driver
Ethernet Driver settings.
Auto Detect
Comm.Mode
Ethernet Type
Spanning Tree
MAC Address
66 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
System Setup
Warning
Current warning and error settings.
Buzzer
Detect Mismatch
Skip Take-Up Err
Keep Media Size
Current paper-related settings.
Sheet Selection 1
Sheet Selection 2
Nozzle Check
Nozzle-check settings.
Sleep Timer
General printer settings.
Length Unit
Time Zone
Date Format
Language
Contrast Adj.
Information
System information and an error log.
RAM
Error Log
HDD Capacity
Printer Parts 67
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
Network (RemoteUI)
Current network settings used by RemoteUI.
TCP/IP
Frame Type
Use BOOTP
Use DHCP
Use RARP
Enable DNS Dynamic
Update
Use Zeroconf Function
IP Address*
Subnet Mask*
Gateway Address*
LPD Printing
IPP Printing
IPP Printer URI
RAW Printing
Raw Port Number
Raw Mode Bi-direction
FTP Printing
Primary DNS Server
Address*
Secondary DNS Server
Address*
DNS Host Name*
DNS Domain Name*
SMTP Server Address*
Multicast DNS Service
Name
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
68 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
NetWare
Current NetWare settings.
Frame Type
IPX External Network
Number*
Node Number*
Print Service
*: Depending on the NetWare print service settings, information on one of the following four items is printed.
Bindery PServer
File Server
Name*
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > Bindery PServer is
selected.
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
Polling Interval
RPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > RPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
NDS PServer
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NDS PServer is selected.
Tree Name*
Context name*
Print Server
Name*
Print Server
Password*
NPrinter
Values set when NetWare > Print Service > NPrinter is selected.
Print Server
Name*
Printer Number*
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
Printer Parts 69
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Control Panel
AppleTalk
Current AppleTalk settings.
Phase Type
Name*
Network Number*
Zone*
*: Blank if the status has been saved by using Status Monitor.
HEAD LOT NUMBER
Printhead lot number.
LOT R,L
PARTS STATUS
Utilization status of replacement parts that require servicing.
COUNTER A-V
COUNTER
Utilization status of the cutter, media, and other items (indicating how
much they have been used).
CUTTER
MEDIA
MEDIA1-7
NAME
TTL
ROLL
CUTSHEET
AFTER INSTALLATION
70 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Hard Disk
Printer Hard Disk Operations
Printer hard disk operations are available through the Control Panel, printer driver, imagePROGRAF Print
Plug-in, RemoteUI, imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
The hard disk operations available through each interface are as follows.
imagePROGRAF
Printer Driver or
Status
Monitor or
Control
imagePROGRAF
Operation
RemoteUI
imagePROGRAF
Panel
Print Plug-in
Printmonitor
Saving print jobs Print
Yes
No
No
No
Print (auto delete)
Yes
No
No
No
Save in mail box
Yes
No
No
No
Save data before
printing(*1)
Yes
No
No
No
Operations with
saved jobs
Print saved jobs
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete saved jobs
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Job queue
management
Display job queue
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Delete
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Priority
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Move saved jobs
No
Yes
Yes
No
Modify saved jobs
No
Yes
Yes
No
Modify mail boxes
No
Yes
Yes
No
Print a list of saved No
jobs
No
No
Yes
Display a list of
saved jobs
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Display free hard
disk space
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Initialize hard disk
No
No
No
Yes
Recover after
errors
No
No
No
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Mail box
management
Other
operations
Display error messages
*1: This option is available with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print jobs are saved
and then printed.
Printer Parts 71
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Saved Print Jobs
Saving print jobs refers to the process of sending print jobs from a computer and storing them on the printer’s
hard disk. By saving print jobs, you can print them repeatedly as needed without sending them from a
computer again.
Saving print jobs enables you to do the following things.
• Save the time spent using a computer
When you send a print job to the printer, you can either print it and save it on the printer at the same time
or simply save it on the printer without printing it yet. Saved print jobs can be printed in the required
quantity later without the need to use a computer again.
• Simplify reprinting, if any errors occur
If errors occur in the middle of printing (as when paper runs out), you can resume printing after clearing
the error without resending the print job from a computer.
• Streamline printing work
Without using a computer, you can select print jobs and print in the desired quantity. You can also
select multiple print jobs to print during the same period. This enables unattended operation at night,
for example.
Format of saved print jobs
When saving print jobs on the printer’s hard disk, choose the format in the printer driver or on the
imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in screen. Choose from three formats for saving print jobs: Print, Print (auto
delete), and Save in mail box. You can also choose Save data before printing, as desired.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
72 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Storage destination
The storage area on the printer’s hard disk is divided into a temporary storage area and a permanent storage
area. Print jobs in the “job queue” or “Common Box” are saved in the temporary storage area. Jobs in
“Personal Boxes” are saved in the permanent storage area.
• Job queue
Current print jobs are temporarily saved in the job queue, a storage space where jobs are saved in the
order they will be printed.(*1)
Up to ten jobs can be stored in the queue. Subsequent jobs are treated as "standby" jobs, to be
processed when possible.
*1: Jobs that are being saved, received, printed, or deleted, or jobs that have been interrupted or
are waiting to print
• Common Box
If you have specied Print as the format, jobs sent from the computer are saved in the Common Box.
There is one Common Box, with the Common Box number “00”. A password cannot be set for the
Common Box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved here, but they will be deleted one after another starting with the
oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 101 jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined
• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto
delete) are received
• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format
Save in mail box are received
• Personal Boxes
You can store jobs in Personal Boxes in either of the following ways.
• By moving a job stored in the Common Box into a Personal Box
• By selecting Save in mail box as the format
There are nine Personal Boxes, with Personal Boxes numbered “01” to “09”. You can specify a name
and password for each Personal Box.
Up to 100 print jobs can be saved in all Personal Boxes combined.
Printer Parts 73
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Saving Print Jobs
You can use the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in to save print jobs on the printer’s hard disk.
Using the printer driver (Windows)
1.
Access the Page Setup sheet.
2.
Click Output Method to display the Output Method dialog box.
74 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
3.
In Output Method, choose the format for saved print jobs.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed. (This is the default format.)
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
If you choose Save in mail box, also specify the destination Personal Box in the Mail box list.
Note
• Click Acquire Mail Box Name to display Personal Box names in the Mail box list, as acquired
from the printer.
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
4.
In Name of data to be saved, specify how to name saved print jobs.
• To use the le name, choose Use le name.
• Otherwise choose Enter name and enter a name in Name.
5.
Click OK to close the Output Method dialog box.
Printer Parts 75
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using the printer driver (Mac OS X)
1.
Access the Additional Settings pane.
2.
In Send job to, choose the format for saved print jobs.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
76 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
The Destination dialog box is displayed if you select Save in mail box. Here, specify the name
and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.
1. In Document title, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.
2. Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.
3. Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.
Note
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
Printer Parts 77
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using the printer driver (Mac OS 9)
1.
Access the Additional Settings pane.
2.
In Send job to, choose the format for saved print jobs.
• Print
Save print jobs automatically at the same time they are printed.
• Print (auto delete)
Save print jobs temporarily at the same time they are printed and delete them after printing.
78 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
• Save in mail box
Save print jobs on the printer without printing them.
The Destination dialog box is displayed if you have selected Save in mail box. Here, specify the
name and Personal Box number for saved print jobs.
1. In Document, enter a name to identify saved print jobs.
2. Select the Personal Box number in the Mail box list.
3. Click OK to close the Destination dialog box.
Note
• Save data before printing
This option is available in combination with Print, Print (auto delete), and Save in mail box. Print
jobs are saved on the hard disk and then printed.
Using imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in
For details, refer to the topic for the Set Conguration button on the Main sheet in the Print Plug-In Guide.
There is a Windows and Macintosh version of the Print Plug-In Guide. You can access them from the top
page of this user manual.
Printer Parts 79
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Checking a List of Saved Jobs
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs
You can display saved print jobs in the Common Box and each Personal Box.
You can view a list of stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
(Using the Control Panel )
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Display a list of saved print jobs.
• To display jobs saved in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.
• To display jobs saved in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ button to select Job List.
Note
• You can check a list of print jobs in the queue by choosing Job Management → Job Queue Ope.
80 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using RemoteUI )
Choose a mail box on the Stored Job page to display a list of jobs saved in that mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Printer Parts 81
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Jobs saved in the mail box are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
82 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Jobs saved in that mail box are displayed in the Documents dialog box.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Printer Parts 83
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Printing a List of Saved Jobs
You can print a list of saved print jobs in the Common Box and each Personal Box.
You can also print a print job list by using the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print a list of saved print jobs.
• To print a list of jobs saved in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
• To print a list of jobs saved in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
84 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Printing Saved Jobs
You can print jobs stored on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Print the saved job.
• Printing jobs in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.
6. Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.
7. Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
• Printing jobs in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to print, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print, and then press the ► button.
8. Conrm the paper to use for printing and press the OK button.
9. Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
Printer Parts 85
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
86 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Print.
3.
On the Print Saved Document page, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Printer Parts 87
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
88 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Print.
3.
In the Print dialog box, enter the quantity to print in Copies and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Printer Parts 89
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Resume Printing to display the Resume Printing
dialog box.
3.
Specify the number of copies and press the OK button.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
90 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Managing Saved Jobs
Moving saved jobs
Print jobs that you have saved in the Print format are saved in the Common Box, number “00”. However, jobs
in this mail box will be deleted one after another starting with the oldest job in the following situations.
• If there are more than 101 saved jobs in the Common Box and job queue combined
• If no more temporary storage space is available when jobs in the format Print or Print (auto delete)
are received
• If there is not enough space in the temporary or permanent storage area when jobs in the format
Save in mail box are received
You can move jobs to Personal Boxes “01” to “09” to prevent them from being deleted. (Up to 100 jobs can
be stored here.)
You can also move saved jobs from one Personal Box to another.
You can move stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Note
• Jobs saved in Personal Boxes cannot be moved to the Common Box.
(Using RemoteUI )
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Printer Parts 91
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the print job in the list and click Move.
92 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
3.
On the Move Document page, select the name or number of the destination Personal Box in
the Destination mail box list and click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Printer Parts 93
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Move.
3.
In the Move dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
94 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Move.
Printer Parts 95
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
3.
In the Move Document dialog box, select the destination Personal Box and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
96 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Displaying details of saved jobs
You can view details of stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Using RemoteUI )
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Printer Parts 97
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
The Details of the saved document page is displayed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
98 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Printer Parts 99
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
The Properties dialog box is displayed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
100 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Printer Parts 101
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Renaming saved jobs
You can rename stored print jobs as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Using RemoteUI )
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
102 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Details.
3.
On the Details of the saved document page, click Change Document.
Printer Parts 103
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
4.
On the Rename Saved Document page, enter the new job name in Document Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
104 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Printer Parts 105
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the saved job in the list and click Properties.
3.
In the Properties dialog box, enter the job name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
106 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
Printer Parts 107
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Settings.
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the new job name and click OK.
Documents cannot be renamed unless a password has been set. In this case, specify a
password. After renaming, you can cancel the password as needed.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
108 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Deleting Saved Jobs
You can delete saved jobs in the Common Box or Personal Boxes.
You can delete stored print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Delete the saved job.
• To delete saved jobs in the Common Box
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Com. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.
6. Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.
• To delete saved jobs in Personal Boxes
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Psnl. BOX Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the folder, and then press the ► button.
4. Enter a password if one has been set, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job List, and then press the ► button.
6. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the saved job to delete, and then press the ► button.
7. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the ► button.
8. Conrm the print job for deletion and press the OK button.
Printer Parts 109
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using RemoteUI
1.
On the Stored Job page, choose the mail box.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
110 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Printer Parts 111
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a mail box in the list and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
112 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, select the print job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Printer Parts 113
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click ► next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set.
2.
Select the saved job in the list and click Delete.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
114 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Modifying the Current Job (Deleting or Preempting Other
Jobs)
You can delete jobs that are currently being printed.
You can also select queued jobs and give them rst priority, to print them before other jobs.
Note
• You cannot preempt queued jobs with jobs that are currently being saved, printed, or deleted.
You can modify current print jobs as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Printer Parts 115
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Modify the job currently being printed.
• Deleting jobs currently being printed
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the print job to delete, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Delete, and then press the OK button.
• Changing the order of printing
1. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Management, and then press the ► button.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Job Queue Ope., and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the job to print rst, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Priority, and then press the OK button.
Using RemoteUI
On the Print Job page, select the job to modify and how to modify it. For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
116 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
On the Job sheet, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Printer Parts 117
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
On the Driver pane, select the job and the desired function. The following functions are available.
•
•
•
•
Preempting other jobs
Pausing printing
Resuming printing
Canceling print jobs
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
118 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Modifying Personal Boxes
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes
By factory default, no passwords are set for Personal Boxes. For greater security, you can set passwords for
each Personal Box. After you set a password, it will be required to modify the Personal Box settings, as well
as to display, print, delete, move, and modify jobs saved in the Personal Box.
Note
• A password cannot be set for the Common Box.
• Enter a four-digit number as the password, in the range 0001-9999.
• Even if you have set passwords, they are not required to access Personal Boxes in Administrator
Mode in RemoteUI.
You can set a password for a Personal Box as follows.
• Using RemoteUI
• Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
• Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
(Using RemoteUI )
1.
2.
On the Stored Job page, select the Personal Box for a password.
Click Edit.
Printer Parts 119
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set Password: Select the check box.
• Password: Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Conrm: Re-enter the password.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
120 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed Personal Box for a password and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the Personal Box.
Printer Parts 121
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set Password: Select this check box.
• Password: Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Conrmation Number: Re-enter the password.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
122 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job
and click Settings.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, specify the password and click OK.
• Set Password: Select this check box.
• Password: Enter the password. (This eld is limited to four digits in the range 0001-9999.)
• Conrmation Number: Re-enter the password.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Printer Parts 123
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Naming Personal Boxes
By factory default, Personal Boxes are unnamed. You can name them for easier management.
You can assign a name to a Personal Box as follows.
• RemoteUI
• imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
• imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Using RemoteUI )
1.
On the Stored Job page, select the Personal Box to identify.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the Personal Box.
124 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
Click Edit.
3.
In the Set/Register User’s Inbox dialog box, enter the Personal Box name in Inbox Name and
click OK.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Printer Parts 125
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk sheet, select a listed Personal Box to identify and click Open.
Note
• Enter a password if one has been set for the Personal Box.
126 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
2.
In the Documents dialog box, click Settings.
3.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the Personal Box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
Printer Parts 127
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
(Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor )
1.
On the Hard Disk pane, click “►” next to Inbox No./Name to list saved jobs. Select a saved job
and click Settings.
2.
In the Settings dialog box, enter the Personal Box name and click OK.
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
128 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space
You can check the space available on the printer’s hard disk as follows.
•
•
•
•
Using the Control Panel
Using RemoteUI
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
Using the Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select HDD Information, and then press the ► button.
Note
• You can also check the free hard disk space by pressing the Information button three times.
Using RemoteUI
To view the box list, select Stored Job in Job Management. On the Stored Job page, the free hard disk
space is shown in the upper-right corner when boxes are listed.
For details, refer to the RemoteUI help.
Printer Parts 129
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
The Hard Disk sheet shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Sheet in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
130 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
The Hard Disk pane shows the free hard disk space.
■Hard Disk Pane in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
Printer Parts 131
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Hard Disk
Erasing all data on the printer’s hard disk
You can erase all data on the printer’s hard disk from the Control Panel.
Note
• You cannot erase all data on the hard disk during print jobs.
• Conversely, print jobs cannot be processed during erasure of all hard disk data.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Erase HDD Data, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of deletion, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
132 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Optional accessories
Optional accessories
Roll Holder Set
A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper. If you want to prepare a few rolls with paper of
various types and widths for different purposes, it is convenient to have several sets ready. Sets are available
for 2- and 3-inch paper cores. (2-inch versions match the set included with the printer.)
• Roll Holder Set RH2-42 (for 2-inch paper cores)
• Roll Holder Set RH3-42 (for 3-inch paper cores)
Media Take-up Unit
This unit automatically winds up printed documents.
• Media Take-up Unit TU-06
Note
• For instructions on installing the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Media Take-up Unit Setup Guide.
• For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide.
• For Media Take-up Unit instructions, see “Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)”. (→P.230)
Printer Parts 133
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Optional accessories
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board
An optional interface board to add an IEEE 1394 (also called "FireWire") port.
• IEEE1394 Expansion Board EB-05
Note that EB-04 is incompatible.
For instructions on installing the IEEE 1394 expansion board, refer to the documentation provided with the
IEEE 1394 expansion board.
134 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Printer Specications
Specications
Important
• This information is subject to change as the printer is updated.
• The following values may vary depending on the operating environment.
Printer
Power supply
Power consumption
Operating noise
Operating environment
100-120 V AC (50/60 Hz), 220-240 V AC (50/60 Hz)
During operation
190 W max.
Sleep mode
100-120 V: 5 W max.
(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion
board is installed.)
220-240 V: 6 W max.
(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394 (FireWire) expansion
board is installed.)
Off
1 W max. (*1)
During operation
Approx. 50 dB (A) max. (6.6 bels or less)
Standby
Approx. 35 dB (A) max.
Temperature
15-30°C (59-86°F)
Humidity
10-80%, non-condensing
Dimensions (W × D × H) Printer and Stand
(including Roll Holder
and Output Stacker )
1,893 × 975× 1,144 mm (74.5 × 38.4 × 45.0 in)
Weight
Approx. 142 kg (313.1 lb)
Printer and Stand (not
including the Printhead
and Ink Tank )
Space for installation (W Printer only
× D × H)
2,293 × 1,675 × 1,500 mm (90.3 × 65.9 × 59.1 in)
Applicable standards
International Energy Star Program, Law on Promoting
Green Purchasing, GPN, RoHS, IT Eco Declaration,
WEEE, U.S. presidential directives, J-MOSS (Green
Mark)
*1: The printer uses a trace amount of power even when turned off. To stop all power consumption,
turn off the printer and unplug the power cord.
Printer Parts 135
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Printing performance
Print method
Bubblejet
Maximum resolution
2400 dpi horizontally (*1) × 1200
dpi vertically
Printhead
PF-03 ×2
Number of nozzles
2,560 per color
*1: Prints with a minimum 1/2400 inch dot pitch between ink droplets.
Interface
Expansion Board Slots
1
USB 2.0(*1)
Format
Internal port
Mode
Full-speed (12 Mbps), high-speed (480 Mbps), bulk transfer
Connector
Series B (4-pin)
Format
Internal port
Specication
IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T, IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX/Auto-Negotiation,
IEEE 802.3x Full Duplex
Protocols
IPX/SPX (Netware 4.2, 5.1, 6.0), SNMP, TCP/IP, AppleTalk
Format
Optional board (compatible with the expansion slot)
Specication
IEEE 1394-1995, conforms to P1394a Specication ver. 2.0, half
duplex, Data/Strb differential serial
Transfer speed
100/200/400 Mbps
Connector
Conforms to IEEE 1394-1995 (6-pin), no power supply
Ethernet(*2)
IEEE 1394
*1: Use in USB 2.0 High Speed mode requires the following environment:
•
•
•
•
Computer: USB 2.0 High-Speed-compatible
Operating system: Windows Server 2003/Windows XP/Windows 2000 or Mac OS X ver. 10.3.3 or later
USB 2.0 driver: Microsoft USB 2.0 driver (available from Windows Update or the Service Pack.)
USB cable: Certied USB 2.0 cable
136 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Ink
Ink Tank
MBK Ink Tank ( Matte Black Ink ,
or black ink for matte paper)
Pigment ink
PFI-302MBK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-702MBK (700 ml [23.7  oz])
BK Ink Tank ( Black Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-302BK (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-702BK (700 ml [23.7  oz])
C Ink Tank ( Cyan Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-301C (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701C (700 ml [23.7  oz])
M Ink Tank ( Magenta Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-301M (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701M (700 ml [23.7  oz])
Y Ink Tank ( Yellow Ink )
Pigment ink
PFI-301Y (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701Y (700 ml [23.7  oz])
PC Ink Tank (photo cyan ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-301PC (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701PC (700 ml [23.7  oz])
PM Ink Tank (photo magenta ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-301PM (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701PM (700 ml [23.7  oz])
R Ink Tank (red ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-301R (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701R (700 ml [23.7  oz])
G Ink Tank (green ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-301G (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701G (700 ml [23.7  oz])
B Ink Tank (blue ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-301B (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-701B (700 ml [23.7  oz])
GY Ink Tank (gray ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-302GY (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-702GY (700 ml [23.7  oz])
PGY Ink Tank (photo gray ink)
Pigment ink
PFI-302PGY (330 ml [11.2  oz]) or
PFI-702PGY (700 ml [23.7  oz])
Capacity
330 or 700 ml (11.2 or 23.7  oz) per
color (*1)
*1: The provided Starter Ink Tanks contain 330 ml (11.2  oz) each.
Printer Parts 137
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Paper (*1)
Paper width
Rolls
254-1,117.6 mm (10-44 in)
Sheets
203-1,117.6 mm (8-44 in)
Length of one page Rolls
Thickness
Media Size
Print area
203 (*2)-18,000 mm (8-708.7 in)
Sheets
203-1,600 mm (8-63 in)
Rolls
0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)
Sheets
0.07-0.8 mm (0.0028-0.031 in)
Roll width
44-in. Roll (1117.6mm), 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1 Roll
(1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll (914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm),
30-in. Roll (762.0mm), JIS B1/B2 Roll (728.0mm), 24-in.
Roll (609.6mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll
(515.0mm), 17-in. Roll (431.8mm), ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm),
16-in. Roll (406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
Sheets
ISO A0 , ISO A1 , ISO A2 , ISO A2+ , ISO A3 , ISO A3+ , ISO A4
, ISO B0 , ISO B1 , ISO B2 , ISO B3 , ISO B4 , JIS B0 , JIS B1
, JIS B2 , JIS B3 , JIS B4 , 34"x44" (ANSI E) , 28"x40" (ANSI
F) , 22"x34"(ANSI D) , 17"x22"(ANSI C) , 13"x19" (Super B) ,
11"x17" (Ledger) , Legal (8.5"x14") , Letter (8.5"x11") , 36"x48"
(ARCH E) , 30"x42" (ARCH E1) , 26"x38" (ARCH E2) , 27"x39"
(ARCH E3) , 24"x36" (ARCH D) , 18"x24" (ARCH C) , 12"x18"
(ARCH B) , 9"x12" (ARCH A) , DIN C0 , DIN C1 , DIN C2 , DIN
C3 , DIN C4 , 20"x24" , 18"x22" , 14"x17" , 12"x16" , 10"x12" ,
10"x15" , 8"x10" , US Photo 16"x20" , Poster 20"x30" , Poster
30"x40" , Poster 42"x60" , Poster 44"x62" , 13"x22" , Poster
300x900mm
Normal size
Printable area
• Rolls
5 mm (0.20 in) from each side
• Sheets
5 mm (0.20 in) from the top, 23 mm (0.91 in) from the bottom,
and 5 mm (0.20 in) from the left and right sides
For information on the recommended print area, see “Print Area”.
(→P.141)
Borderless printing Printable area (rolls)
(*3)
0 mm from the top, 0 from the bottom, and 0 mm from the left
and right sides
Supported width for borderless printing
42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll
(914.4mm), ISO A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm), 24-in. Roll (609.6mm),
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm), 16-in.
Roll (406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
*1: For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.169)
*2: When supplying paper, use a roll approximately 1,000 mm (1,093.6 yd) or longer.
*3: Printing may not be possible in some cases, depending on the type and size of paper.
138 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Hard Disk
Capacity on the hard disk to store image data
48 GB
Print job storage capacity
• Common mail box: 100 jobs
• Personal boxes: 100 jobs
Printer Parts 139
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printer Specications
Basic Environmental Performance
Printer
Power consumption
Resource efciency
Product safety
Sleep mode
100-120 V: 5 W max.
(10 W max. when an IEEE 1394
(FireWire) expansion board is
installed.)
220-240 V: 6 W max.
(11 W max. when an IEEE 1394
(FireWire) expansion board is
installed.)
Off
1 W max.
Weight
Printer and Stand : Approx. 142kg
(313 lb)
Dimensions (W × D × H)
Printer and Stand : 1,893 × 975 ×
1,144 mm (74.5 × 38.4 × 45.0 in)
Recycling
Recyclable plastic used for printer
body
Toxic substances
Structural components: No
prohibited brominated ame
retardants used (PBB, PBDE)
Body plastic: No heavy metals
(Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd) or halogenated
ame retardants used
Operating noise
During operation: Approx. 50 dB
(A) max. (6.6 bels or less)
Standby: Approx. 35 dB (A) max.
Packaging materials
Heavy metal content (Pb, Hg, Cr[Vl], Cd)
140 Printer Parts
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
None (none in packaging)
Printer Specications
Print Area
A margin required by the printer is added with respect to the size of paper loaded in the printer. Except in
borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to the paper size minus the space for this margin.
Note
•
•
•
•
Printable area: The area that can be printed.
There is no margin (that is, a margin of 0 mm) during borderless printing on rolls.
Guaranteed Print Area: We recommend printing within this area.
To print so that your original matches the print area exactly, use an oversized paper size that includes
the required margin. (→P.346)
Margins of Printable Area
Top Edge
Bottom Edge
Sides
Margins of Recommended Print Area
Top Edge
Bottom Edge
Sides
Sheets
5 mm (0.20 in)
23 mm (0.91
in)
5 mm (0.20 in)
20 mm (0.79
in)
Rolls
0/5 mm
(0/0.20 in)
0/5 mm
(0/0.20 in)
0/5 mm
(0/0.20 in)
20 mm (0.79
in)
23 mm (0.91
in)
5 mm (0.20 in)
5 mm (0.20 in) 5 mm (0.20 in)
Sheets
• Printable Area:
A margin of 5 mm (0.20 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
• Recommended print area:
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 23 mm (0.91 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Rolls
• Printable Area:
A margin of 5 mm (0.20 in) on all sides is required. During borderless printing, the margin on all sides
is 0 mm. For information on paper compatible with borderless printing, see the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.169)
• Recommended print area:
A margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) on top, 5 mm (0.20 in) on bottom, and 5 mm (0.20 in) on left and right
sides is required.
Printer Parts 141
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Basic Printing Workow
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Rolls
These are the basic steps for loading and printing on rolls.
Follow the steps below to switch to a new roll or a roll of a different type or width before printing.
Note
• If you are not using the optional Media Take-up Unit when printing long documents such as banners,
spread a clean cloth or paper on the oor. Use the Output Stacker to prevent the oor from soiling
printed documents after they are printed. (→P.221)
• If you prefer to wait for the ink to dry after printing and simply eject the document, you can deactivate
automatic cutting and cut the paper manually. (→P.193)
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
2.
Select a roll as the paper source. (→P.178)
142 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
3.
Set a roll on the Roll Holder. (→P.179)
4.
Load the roll in the printer. (→P.182)
5.
Select the paper type. (→P.188)
Basic Printing Workow 143
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
6.
Select the paper length. (→P.189)
7.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.156)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.158)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) (→P.160)
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message is displayed and the printing quality may be
affected, or printing may not be possible.
• Papr Size Mismatch (→P.769)
• Papr Type Mismatch (→P.768)
• Paper Mismatch (→P.768)
144 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
8.
Start printing.
• Printing from Windows (→P.151)
• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.152)
• Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.154)
Note
• You can skip steps 5 and 6 if a barcode has been printed on the roll paper and you have activated
automatic detection of the remaining roll. The paper type and amount of paper left are automatically
detected. The barcode will automatically be cut off after it has been read.
• You can skip step 6 if you have deactivated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper.
• If you have deactivated width detection, you will need to enter the roll width after choosing the paper
type in step 5. (→P.49)
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.169)
• When printing on rolls after printing on sheets, if the lit paper selection lamp does not switch from the
Cut Sheet lamp to the Roll Media lamp, press the Feeder Selection button.
Important
• After changing rolls, clean the Platen. (→P.720)
Basic Printing Workow 145
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Loading and Printing on Sheets
These are the basic steps for loading sheets and then printing.
Follow the steps below to load and print on sheets.
1.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
2.
Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Roll (→P.186)
• Sheet (→P.216)
146 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
3.
Complete settings in the printer driver for the type of paper and other details.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.156)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.158)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) (→P.160)
4.
Send the print job.
• Printing from Windows (→P.151)
• Printing from Mac OS X (→P.152)
• Printing from Mac OS 9 (→P.154)
Basic Printing Workow 147
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
5.
Load the sheet. (→P.212)
Note
• If you will load a sheet before sending a print job, after you load the sheet, the printer automatically
shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen. Follow these steps.
• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)
Start printing.
Note
• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you must
advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.150)
• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
148 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets
The printer supports both rolls and sheets. Take advantage of each type of paper for a wide range of printing
applications.
Rolls and sheets
• Media in spooled rolls is generally called Roll Media.
Rolls can be used to print large photos or create posters or banners that cannot be printed on regular
sheets.
• Sheets refers to individual sheets of paper in regular sizes.
Insert the sheet between the Platen and the Paper Retainer.
Paper size
• Page Size: The size of the image to be printed, as specied in the application.
• Paper size:
• In the case of sheets, paper size refers to the actual size of the paper loaded in the printer.
• In the case of rolls, paper size is an imagined size set as the printing area for a single page.
Printing options using rolls and sheets
Printing Method
Rolls
Large-Format Printing
Easily print vertical or horizontal banners from familiar applications such
as Microsoft Ofce applications. Print documents up to 18 m (19.7 yd)
long.
Borderless Printing
Print without a margin (border) around posters or photos.
Free Layout (Windows)
Print multiple documents from multiple applications (such as
word-processing programs, spreadsheet programs, and so on) next to
each other.
Free Layout (Macintosh)
Banner printing
Print pages of a multi-page document consecutively without blank space
between pages.
Basic Printing Workow 149
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing
After loading sheets, if you select a type of paper in the printer menu with width detection deactivated, you
will need to feed the paper a different way than usual. Specically, you must manually advance the paper to
the position of printing.
In this case, advance the paper as far into the paper feed slot as possible because it will be printed starting at
that position.
Manually advance paper as follows.
1.
When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼
to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.
If you select Width Detection ON, change the Media Detailed Settings information for that
paper and use the regular feeding method.
2.
Keeping the right edge of the sheet aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a)
on the right side of the printer, load the sheet so that the near edge is aligned with the groove (b)
at the far end of the platen.
3.
4.
Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.
After a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to
select the paper size, and then press the OK button.
Note
• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.
150 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing from Windows
Print from the application software menu.
Important
• The Windows printer driver can be used in the following versions of Windows:
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
2.
After conrming that the printer is selected in the dialog box, click Print or OK to start printing.
Note
• The appearance of the dialog box varies depending on the application software. In most cases, the
dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the range of
pages, number of copies, and so on.
Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Note
• If another printer is selected, select the printer you want to use under Select Printer or in the dialog
box displayed after clicking Printer.
Settings for many printing methods (including enlarged or reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on) are
displayed in the printer driver dialog box. There are two ways to access the printer driver dialog box, as follows:
• From the application software
(→P.539)
• From the operating system menu
(→P.206)
Basic Printing Workow 151
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing from Mac OS X
Print from the application menu after registering the printer.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
Registering the printer
Before printing, you must register the printer in Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ).
For instructions on registering the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”.
(→P.639)
Important
• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed among available printers if it is off or disconnected.
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk
protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk
protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.640)
Note
• When registering the printer, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, Canon FireWire(iPF) if
connected via IEEE 1394, or AppleTalk, Canon IP(iPF), or Bonjour if connected via a network.
• For Canon IP(iPF) connections, enter the printer’s IP address.
152 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing from the application software
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete settings for
various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless printing, and so on.
Basic Printing Workow 153
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing from Mac OS 9
After selecting the printer in Chooser from the Apple menu, print by using menus in the source application.
Important
• We recommend exiting unnecessary applications before printing. Running several applications while
printing may interrupt the transfer of print data and affect printing quality.
Selecting the printer
Before printing, you must conrm that the printer is selected in Chooser.
For instructions on selecting the printer, see “Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)”. (→P.639)
Important
• During this setup process, the printer will not be listed in Chooser if it is off or disconnected.
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer. You must enable the AppleTalk
protocol before using the printer in an AppleTalk network. For instructions on activating AppleTalk
protocol, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.640)
Note
• In Chooser, choose GARO Printer Driver.
• In Destination, choose USB if the printer is connected via USB, FireWire if connected via IEEE 1394,
or AppleTalk, IP Print, or IP Print (Auto) if connected via network.
• If the printer is connected via AppleTalk under AppleTalk, click Active in the lower-right corner of
the Chooser window.
• If the printer is connected via IP Print, click Registering IP Address under the Destination list to
register the printer’s IP address, and then click IP Print.
154 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Printing from the application software
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options for the range of pages, number of copies, and so
on. You can also specify enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, and a variety of other print
settings.
2.
Make sure the printer is selected in the Printer list.
3.
Click Print to start printing.
Basic Printing Workow 155
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
Important
• Always specify the same type and size of paper in the printer menu and printer driver.
If the type and size do not match, an error message will be displayed and printing is not possible.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
156 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
6.
7.
8.
In the A Page Size list, select the size of the original as specied in the application.
In the L Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Roll Paper in L Media Source, select the width of the loaded roll in M Roll
Paper Width.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
Basic Printing Workow 157
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
158 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
7.
8.
9.
10.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Cut Sheet or Manual in A Media Source, make sure the size as selected in
Page Setup is displayed in C Page Size. If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source,
make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
Basic Printing Workow 159
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9)
If you have replaced the paper, you must complete the following settings in the printer driver.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
160 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing procedure
7.
8.
9.
10.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Access the Finishing pane.
In the A Media Source list, select how paper is supplied.
If you have selected Roll Paper in A Media Source, make sure the width of the loaded roll is
displayed in B Roll Paper Width.
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
Note
• A variety of settings are available in the printer driver to suit different printing applications.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
Basic Printing Workow 161
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel print jobs or ink drying in progress when the
printer is online, ofine, or in Menu mode.
Printer operation varies depending on the status when you hold down the Stop button for a second or
more during printing.
• If you press the Stop button before printing starts
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more before printing cancels the print job and brings
the printer online.
When the roll is selected as the paper source, the printer goes online, and when sheet is selected,
the printer goes ofine.
• If you press the Stop button during printing
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more during printing stops printing immediately.
• If you press the Stop button when printing is paused
Holding down the Stop button for a second or more when printing is paused cancels the print job.
162 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows
You can cancel print jobs in the printer window.
1.
Click the printer icon in the taskbar to display the printer window.
Note
• You can also display this window by double-clicking the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or
Printers ) folder, accessible through the Windows start menu.
2.
Right-click the job to cancel and select Cancel.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the printer screen during the transmission of print data from the
computer. When the transmission is nished, the job is not displayed even during printing.
To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Do the following if no print jobs are shown in the printer window (because they have already been sent to
the printer).
1.
2.
Double-click the taskbar icon to access the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
On the Printer Status sheet, click Cancel Job.
Basic Printing Workow 163
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X
You can cancel print jobs in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
1.
2.
Click the printer icon in the Dock to display the printer window.
Click Stop Jobs to stop printing.
In this window, you can cancel jobs sent to the printer.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the printer’s screen during the transmission of print data from the
computer. When the transmission is nished, the job is not displayed even during printing.
3.
Click Utility to display imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
164 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
4.
Select the print job to cancel and click Cancel Job to remove the print job.
The job sent to the printer is canceled.
Note
• The print job is displayed on the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor window while the printer receives
the print data from the computer. It is not displayed before transmission of print data to the printer,
even if the computer has started the process of the data.
5.
Exit imagePROGRAF Printmonitor. In the printer window, click Start Jobs.
Important
• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart job processing, the next
job cannot be printed.
To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Basic Printing Workow 165
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9
How to cancel print jobs varies depending on whether you are printing in the foreground or background.
Canceling background print jobs
1.
Open the Garo Printer Extra folder, which was installed on the hard disk at the same time
as the printer driver.
2.
3.
Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor.
Choose Pause Printing in the File menu to stop print processing.
The job status changes from Sending to Send.
4.
Select the print job to cancel and click Cancel Job to remove the print job.
5.
Choose Resume Printing in the File menu.
Important
• Always follow these steps if you cancel print jobs. If you do not restart the print queue, the next
job cannot be printed.
To cancel print jobs from the Control Panel, follow these steps.
1.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
166 Basic Printing Workow
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Canceling print jobs
Canceling foreground print jobs
1.
When the progress indicator is displayed, hold down the Command key and press the period
(.) key to cancel print jobs.
2.
If the Display Screen of the Control Panel still indicates that the job is in progress and the Data
lamp continues ashing, hold down the Stop button for a second or more to stop printing.
Basic Printing Workow 167
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Handling Paper
Paper
Paper
The printer supports the following paper.
Types of paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)
Paper size
Rolls
Paper width
44-in. Roll (1117.6mm), 42-in. Roll (1066.8mm), JIS
B0/B1 Roll (1030.0mm), 36-in. Roll (914.4mm), ISO
A0/A1 Roll (841.0mm), 30-in. Roll (762.0mm), JIS B1/B2
Roll (728.0mm), 24-in. Roll (609.6mm), ISO A1/A2 Roll
(594.0mm) , JIS B2/B3 Roll (515.0mm), 17-in. Roll
(431.8mm), ISO A2/A3 Roll (420.0mm), 16-in. Roll
(406.4mm), 14-in. Roll (355.6mm), ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm), 10-in. Roll (254.0mm)
Outer diameter
Up to 150 mm (5.9 in)
Inner diameter of paper core
2 or 3 inches
Printing surface
Top (outside)
Sheets
ISO A0 , ISO A1 , ISO A2 , ISO A2+ , ISO A3 , ISO A3+ ,
ISO A4 , ISO B0 , ISO B1 , ISO B2 , ISO B3 , ISO B4 , JIS
B0 , JIS B1 , JIS B2 , JIS B3 , JIS B4 , ANSI E , ANSI F ,
ANSI D , ANSI C , ANSI B , ANSI B Super , ANSI Letter ,
ANSI Legal , ARCH E , ARCH E1 , ARCH E2 , ARCH E3 ,
ARCH D , ARCH C , ARCH B , ARCH A , DIN C0 , DIN C1
, DIN C2 , DIN C3 , DIN C4 , 20"x24" , 18"x22" , 14"x17" ,
12"x16" , 10"x12" , 10"x15" , 8"x10" , US Photo 16"x20"
, Poster 20"x30" , Poster 30"x40" , Poster 42"x60" ,
Poster 44"x62" , 13"x22" , Poster 300x900mm
Note
• Paper quality varies among manufacturers. For advice before buying paper, contact the Canon dealer
where you purchased the printer.
168 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Types of Paper
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide . This guide
identies supported plain paper, coated paper, photo paper (such as glossy photo paper), proong paper,
CAD paper, and other types of paper. The Paper Reference Guide identies types and specications of
paper, describes printer driver settings, gives tips on handling paper, and identies paper you can use
with the Media Take-up Unit (optional).
You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide , on the printer Control Panel, and in the
printer driver by downloading the latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF
website.
Note
• The media types with "†" marked in the product name are those specied as genuine Canon media.
For other media, please contact the respective media manufacturer after reading the instruction
manuals supplied with the media.
Handling Paper 169
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Viewing the Paper Reference Guide
You can access the Paper Reference Guide as follows. Follow the steps for your particular operating system.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer
model.)
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Paper Reference Guide.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
170 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Paper Reference Guide.
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
Handling Paper 171
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
• Mac OS 9
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Paper Reference Guide icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents
the printer model.)
The Paper Reference Guide is displayed.
172 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Updating paper information
You can update paper information in the Paper Reference Guide and on the printer by downloading the
latest version of the Media Conguration Tool from the imagePROGRAF website. For information about
the Media Conguration Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration
Tool Guide (Macintosh).
Follow these steps to access the imagePROGRAF website.
Important
• When you update paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool, the paper type setting on the
Control Panel, in the printer driver, and in related software is updated.
• Windows
1. Double-click the iPFxxxx Support icon on the desktop. (Here, iPFxxxx represents the printer
model.)
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Stay Informed.
The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Handling Paper 173
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
• Mac OS X
1. Click the iPF Support icon in the Dock.
The online support window is displayed.
2. Select Stay Informed.
The default browser is started, and the imagePROGRAF webpage is displayed.
Note
• In Windows, you can also access the imagePROGRAF webpage by clicking the start menu, selecting
Programs > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool (here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) > iPFxxxx
Media Conguration Tool to start the Media Conguration Tool, and clicking Extra Information.
• On a Macintosh computer, you can also access the imagePROGRAF website from the Finder by
selecting Applications (in Mac OS X or OS 9) > Canon Utilities > iPFxxxx Media Conguration Tool
(here, iPFxxxx represents the printer model) ) > MCTxxxx to start the Media Conguration Tool and
then clicking Extra Information.
174 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Paper Sizes
Rolls
Rolls that meet the following conditions are supported.
• Outer diameter: up to 150 mm (6.0 in)
• Inner diameter of paper core: 2 or 3 inches
• Printing side out
1,118 mm (44 in)
Roll Paper Width Settings
in Printer Driver
60-in. Roll (1524mm)
No
1,067 mm (42 in)
44-in. Roll (1188mm)
Yes
1,030 mm (41 in)
JIS B0/B1 Roll (1030mm)
Yes
914 mm (36 in)
36-in. Roll (914mm)
Yes
841 mm (33 in)
ISO A0/A1 Roll (841mm)
Yes
762 mm (30 in)
30-in. Roll (762mm)
No
728 mm (29 in)
JIS B1/B2 Roll (728mm)
No
610 mm (24 in)
24-in. Roll (610mm)
Yes
594 mm (23 in)
ISO A1/A2 Roll (594mm)
Yes
515 mm (20 in)
JIS B2/B3 Roll (515mm)
Yes
432 mm (17 in)
17-in. Roll (432mm)
No
420 mm (16.5 in)
ISO A2/A3 Roll (420mm)
No
406 mm (16 in)
16-in. Roll (407mm)
Yes
356 mm (14 in)
14-in. Roll (356mm)
Yes
297 mm (12 in)
ISO A3/A4 Roll (297mm)
No
254 mm (10 in)
10-in. Roll (254mm)
Yes
Custom Media Width
254 mm (10 in) - 1,118 mm (44 in)
Roll width
Borderless Printing (*1)
*1: For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.169)
Handling Paper 175
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Sheets
Sheets of the following sizes are supported.
Paper size
Dimensions
ISO A0
841 × 1,189 mm (33 × 47 in)
ISO A1
594 × 841 mm (23 × 33 in)
ISO A2
420 × 594 mm (16.5 × 23 in)
ISO A2+
432 × 610 mm (17 × 24 in)
ISO A3
297 × 420 mm (12 × 17 in)
ISO A3+
329 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)
ISO A4
210 × 297 mm (8 × 12 in)
ISO B0
1,000 × 1,414 mm (39.5 × 56 in)
ISO B1
707 × 1,000 mm (28 × 39.5 in)
ISO B2
500 × 707 mm (20 × 28 in)
ISO B3
353 × 500 mm (14 × 20 in)
ISO B4
250 × 353 mm (10 × 14 in)
JIS B0
1,030 × 1,456 mm (40.5 × 57 in)
JIS B1
728 × 1,030 mm (29 × 40.5 in)
JIS B2
515 × 728 mm (20 × 29 in)
JIS B3
364 × 515 mm (14 × 20 in)
JIS B4
257 × 364 mm (10 × 14 in)
34"x44" (ANSI E)
864 × 1,118 mm (34 × 44 in)
28"x40" (ANSI F)
711 × 1,016 mm (28 × 40 in)
22"x34"(ANSI D)
559 × 864 mm (22 × 34 in)
17"x22"(ANSI C)
432 × 559 mm (17 × 22 in)
11"x17" (Ledger)
279 × 432 mm (11 × 17 in)
13"x19" (Super B)
330 × 483 mm (13 × 19 in)
Letter (8.5"x11")
216 × 279 mm (8.5 × 11 in)
Legal (8.5"x14")
216 × 356 mm (8.5 × 14 in)
36"x48" (ARCH E)
914 × 1,219 mm (36 × 48 in)
30"x42" (ARCH E1)
762 × 1,062 mm (30 × 42 in)
26"x38" (ARCH E2)
660 × 965 mm (26 × 38 in)
27"x39" (ARCH E3)
686 × 991 mm (27 × 39 in)
24"x36" (ARCH D)
610 × 914 mm (24 × 36 in)
18"x24" (ARCH C)
457 × 610 mm (18 × 24 in)
12"x18" (ARCH B)
305 × 457 mm (12 × 18 in)
9"x12" (ARCH A)
229 × 305 mm (9 × 12 in)
DIN C0
917 × 1,296 mm (36 ×51 in)
176 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Paper
Paper size
Dimensions
DIN C1
648 × 917 mm (26 ×36 in)
DIN C2
458 × 648 mm (18 × 26 in)
DIN C3
324 × 458 mm (13 × 18 in)
DIN C4
229 × 324 mm (9 × 13 in)
20"x24"
508 × 610 mm (20 × 24 in)
18"x22"
457 × 559 mm (18 × 22 in)
14"x17"
355 × 432 mm (14 × 17 in)
12"x16"
304 × 406 mm (12 × 16 in)
10"x12"
254 × 305 mm (10 × 12 in)
10"x15"
254 × 381 mm (10 × 15 in)
8"x10"
203 × 254 mm (8 × 10 in)
US Photo 16"x20"
406 × 508 mm (16 × 20 in)
Poster 20"x30"
508 × 762 mm (20 × 30 in)
Poster 30"x40"
762 × 1,016 mm (30 × 40 in)
Poster 42"x60"
1,067 × 1,524 mm (42 × 60 in)
Poster 44"x62"
1,118 × 1,575 mm (44 × 62 in)
13"x22"
329 × 558 mm (13 ×22 in)
Poster 300x900mm
300 × 900 mm (12 × 35 in)
Custom Media Size
203 × 203 mm (8 × 8 in) - 1,118 × 1,600 mm (44 × 63 in)
Note
• In the printer driver, paper sizes are categorized into groups based on the “size system” such as ISO
A or ANSI.
In Windows and Mac OS 9, some size systems are not available by default. Follow the steps below to
make them available.
Windows:
1. Display the printer driver dialog box.
2. Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
3. Click Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.
4. Select the Display Series check box.
Mac OS 9:
1. In Chooser, choose GARO Printer Driver.
2. Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the dialog box for page settings.
3. Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.
4. Select the Display Series check box.
• For details on non-standard paper sizes, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes”. (→P.396)
• Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
Handling Paper 177
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Handling rolls
Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source
You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.
Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media
lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Roll Media lamp (a).
Note
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• If the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.764)
• If the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing.
• If a printer menu operation is in progress
Select the paper source after the menu operation.
• When in the process of loading paper
Finish loading the paper before selecting the paper source.
• When in the process of replacing Ink Tanks
Finish replacing the Ink Tanks before selecting the paper source.
• If the Top Cover is open
Close the Top Cover before selecting the paper source.
After you select the roll as the paper source, a message is displayed instructing you to load the roll. At this
point, load the roll. (→P.182)
Note
• If any paper is loaded that will not be used, remove it before loading the roll.
(→P.186)
(→P.216)
178 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder
Note
• Printed rolls will not work correctly. Cut away the printed portion before loading the roll.
• For details on supported sizes and types of rolls, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper Reference
Guide. (→P.169)
• Cut the edge of the roll paper if it is uneven, dirty, or has tape residue.
Uneven, dirty, or sticky edges may cause feeding problems and affect the printing quality.
Be careful not to cut through any barcodes printed on the roll.
• Wind up the roll so that the edge is even across the roll.
• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load
the paper.
1.
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
Handling Paper 179
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
2.
With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the roll in the Roll Holder from the
left. Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange (a) of the Roll Holder.
Important
• Insert the roll rmly so that there is no gap between the roll and the ange of the Roll Holder. If
there is a gap, it may cause feeding problems.
• Set the roll on a table or other at surface so that it does not roll or fall. Rolls are heavy, and dropping
a roll may cause injury.
• When setting a roll, be careful to avoid hitting the roll holder ange hard with the roll. This may
damage the Roll Holder.
3.
Insert the Holder Stopper from the left in the Roll Holder as shown. Holding it at the position
shown (b), push it rmly in until the ange (a) of the Holder Stopper touches the roll. Lock the
Holder Stopper lever (c) by pushing it down toward the shaft side.
180 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder
1.
Lift the Holder Stopper lever (a) from the shaft side to unlock it. Holding the Holder Stopper at
the position indicated (b), remove it from the Roll Holder.
2.
Remove the roll from the Roll Holder.
Important
• After removal, store the roll in the original bag or box, away from high temperature, humidity, and
direct sunlight. If paper is not stored properly, the printing surface may become scratched, which
may affect the printing quality when you use it again.
Handling Paper 181
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Loading the Roll in the Printer
Note
• Remove any loaded paper that will not be used.
• Roll (→P.186)
• Sheet (→P.216)
• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.720)
1.
Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.
2.
With the edge of the roll paper facing forward as shown, insert the Roll Holder shaft (a) into the
guide grooves (b) of the Roll Holder Slot on both sides.
Caution
• Be careful not to drop a roll and hurt yourself when loading the roll.
• Be careful not to put your ngers between the guide grooves (b) and the Roll Holder shaft (a) when
loading roll. Otherwise, you may hurt yourself.
182 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
3.
Pull out the roll paper evenly on both ends, insert the roll paper in the Paper Feed Slot (a), and
advance the roll paper until the roll paper touches the Paper Retainer.
After the paper reaches the Paper Retainer, it is automatically advanced over the Platen.
Important
• Be careful not to soil the printing surface of roll paper as you insert it in the slot. This may affect the
printing quality.
• If the paper is wrinkled or warped, straighten it out before loading it.
• When loading paper that curls easily, lift the Release Lever to manually pull out the roll paper over
the Platen.
• Load the roll so that there is no gap between the right edge of the paper and the Roll Holder.
4.
Lower the Ejection Guide.
Handling Paper 183
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
5.
While holding the edge of the roll paper, lift the Release Lever.
6.
Hold the roll edge as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the Ejection Guide (a) using the
both hands. Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b) so that the
paper side is parallel to the line and lower the Release Lever.
Important
• Be sure to follow steps 5 and 6. If paper cannot be advanced straight or if it wrinkles, it may jam or
rub against the Printhead.
• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the
paper from being advanced straight.
Note
• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever
is open. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the
strength. Set vacuum stronger by pressing the ▲ button or weaker with the ▼ button. Three
settings are available.
184 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
7.
Close the Top Cover.
After you load a roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display
Screen.
At this point, specify the paper type. (→P.188)
Handling Paper 185
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Removing the Roll from the Printer
Caution
• If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, always follow the steps below to
remove rolls. You will be unable to manage the amount of roll paper left if you move the Release Lever
and remove the roll before the barcode is printed.
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
A conrmation message is displayed regarding removal of the roll.
2.
Press the OK button.
The roll can now be removed.
Note
• If you need to cut the roll, execute Paper Cutting on the Control Panel. (→P.193)
• If you have selected Media Menu > Chk Remain.Roll > On in the printer menu and the printed
document has been ejected, a barcode and brief text message are printed on the leading edge of
rolls.
If the document is not cut but kept in the printer, only the text message is printed. In this case,
cut the roll with scissors and remove the sheet.
3.
Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.
186 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
4.
Using both hands, rotate the Roll Holder in the direction of the arrow to rewind the roll.
5.
Remove the Roll Holder from the Roll Holder Slot.
6.
Lower the Ejection Guide and close the Top Cover.
Important
• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. Clean the Platen
after borderless printing or printing on small paper.
• Setting CarriageScanWdth to Fixed on the Control Panel may reduce soiling on the underside of
the paper. However, this requires more time for printing.
Handling Paper 187
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Important
• For best printing results, the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper. Be sure to select
the type of paper to use correctly before printing.
• Because the printer ne-tunes the feed amount for each type of paper, the margins and the size of
printed images may vary depending on the type of paper used. If margins and the size of images are not
as you expected, adjust the paper feed amount and Printhead height.
(→P.655)
(→P.654)
Note
• After you load the roll, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on the
Display Screen, unless a barcode has been printed on the roll or you have activated automatic detection
of the remaining roll paper. Select the type of paper, and then press the OK button.
If no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic detection of the remaining
roll paper, specify the roll length after the paper type. (→P.189)
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Media Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on types of paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169) By factory default, Plain
Paper is selected.
• If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to the previously selected paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
188 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)
When changing the length of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the length as follows.
Note
• When you specify the roll length in the printer menu, Chk Remain.Roll must be set to On. If it is
Off, the Roll Length Set menu is not shown.
• After you specify the roll type, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the roll length
on the Display Screen if no barcode has been printed on the roll and you have activated automatic
detection of the remaining roll paper. Select the roll length, and then press the OK button. The printer
will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Roll Length Set, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the length of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Specify the roll length as follows.
1. Press ◄ or ► to move the cursor (_) to each eld for entering numbers.
2. Press the ▲ or ▼ button to enter the value.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 to nish entering the value, and then press the OK button.
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 189
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Feeding Roll Paper Manually
You can bring the printer ofine by pressing the Online button.
When the printer is ofine and roll paper is selected as the paper source, you can advance or retract the
roll by pressing ▲ or ▼.
Press ▲ to retract the roll manually.
Press ▼ to advance the roll manually.
If you hold down the ▲ or ▼ button for less than a second, the roll paper will move about 1 mm (0.039 in).
If you hold down ▲ or ▼ for more than a second, the paper will move until you release the button. Release
the button when the Display Screen indicates End of paper feed. Cannot feed paper more.
190 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper
If you have activated automatic detection of the remaining roll paper, when the roll is ejected, a barcode with text is
printed on the roll paper that identies the type of paper and amount left. If this function is activated and barcodes
are printed on the roll paper, the type of paper and amount left are automatically detected when you load a
roll. The barcode will be cut off after it has been read.
Note
• Only the text message is printed if the document is not cut but kept in the printer, or if you are printing on
clear lm.
Important
• If the barcode on the roll is not detected, enter the type and length of paper on the Control Panel.
Follow these steps to activate detection of the remaining roll paper.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Chk Remain.Roll, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
Handling Paper 191
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper Automatically
If the leading edge of a roll is crooked or warped, it may cause an error message or printing problems. In this
case, set Trim Edge First to Automatic or On on the Control Panel to have the printer cut the leading edge to
make the edge straight after you load a roll.
Trim Edge First offers the following options.
• Automatic
If the left and right side of the leading edge of the roll ((a) and (b)) are uneven by 40 mm (1.6 in) or
more when you load the roll, the edge is cut an amount relative to the slant to ensure a straight edge,
and scraps are removed. The edge is not cut if the unevenness is less than 40 mm. However, paper
may sometimes be cut, depending on the state of the leading edge.
• Off
The edge is not cut and scraps are not removed. This setting is Off for most types of paper, by default.
For more information, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• On
The leading edge is cut off when you load a roll, and scraps are removed. The amount of paper cut
off from the leading edge varies depending on the paper type. For more information, see the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
Note
• If you print on paper that has an irregular width, set Skew Check Lv. to Loose for a higher skew
detection threshold or to Off to disable skew detection. However, if paper is loaded askew when
detection is Off, note that paper jams or Platen soiling may occur.
Follow these steps to change the Trim Edge First setting.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Trim Edge First, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired setting option, and then press the OK button.
This setting takes effect the next time you load a roll.
192 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls
How a roll is cut after ejection varies depending on the printer settings.
Cutting Method
Automatic
The roll is automatically cut by the Cutter
Unit following printer driver settings.
Eject (→P.194)
Choose this setting if you prefer not to
have documents dropped immediately after
printing, as when waiting for ink to dry.
To cut the roll using the Cutter Unit , hold
down the Stop button for a second or more.
Menu Settings
Cutting Mode
Automatic
Eject
Manual (→P.195) Choose this setting when using media that
cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit .
Cut the roll using scissors.
Manual
Paper Cutting
(→P.196)
Yes
Select this option to cut paper at the current Paper Cutting
position.
The roll is cut using the Cutter Unit .
Cut rolls manually in the following cases:
Handling Paper 193
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)
Important
• When cutting wide printed documents after ejection, have two people support the documents. If the
paper drops, printed documents may be damaged.
• Do not lift the paper when holding printed documents before cutting. If the paper rises, it may affect the
printing quality.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Eject, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
7.
As you support the printed document to prevent it from dropping, hold down the Stop button
for at least a second to cut the roll.
194 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut using the Cutter Unit )
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cutting Mode, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual, and then press the OK button.
Start printing.
The printer stops advancing the paper after printing.
7.
Press the Online button.
Roll paper is fed to the specied cut position and then automatically stopped.
8.
Cut the roll paper manually with scissors or the like.
9.
Press the Online button.
The roll is rewound, and rewinding stops automatically.
Handling Paper 195
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your specied position)
1.
After pressing the Online button to bring the printer ofine, press ▲ or ▼ to advance the roll
paper to the position for cutting.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the roll paper is cut, it is rewound automatically.
Caution
• If paper would be short when cut at a particular position, the roll may automatically be advanced in
some cases before cutting.
196 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls
The printer is equipped with a function to reduce cutting dust for media such as Backlit Film that are more likely to
generate debris when cut. This may improve printing quality and help prevent Printhead damage. You can set up
this function to be activated for some types of paper.
When this function is activated, black lines are printed at the leading and trailing edges of documents.
Important
• Do not activate this function for paper that wrinkles easily, such as Plain Paper or thin paper. This may
impair cutting and cause paper jams.
• Borderless printing is not available when this function is activated. Deactivate this function before
borderless printing.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select CutDustReduct., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
The function to reduce cutting dust is now activated.
Handling Paper 197
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls
When you are using paper that takes longer for ink to adhere, if the Cutter touches printed surfaces that are still
wet, it may damage the paper or cause rough cut edges. Also, ink may be transferred onto the paper surface during
ejection, soiling it. You can prevent problems by adjusting the drying time after printing before the paper is cut.
Windows
1.
Display the printer driver dialog box.
(→P.206)
2.
Select the Main sheet and click C Advanced Settings in A Media Type.
3.
In the Media Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D
Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.208)
198 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Mac OS X
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
In the Media Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D
Select the Main pane and click C Settings in A Media Type.
Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.209)
Handling Paper 199
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Mac OS 9
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
In the Media Detailed Settings dialog box displayed next, select C Between Pages and D
Select the Main pane and click D Settings in A Media Type.
Between Scans in B Drying Time, and then click OK.
(→P.210)
Note
• By factory default, Drying Time is deactivated ( Off ) for all paper types.
• To have the printer wait for ink to dry immediately after printing without releasing paper, set Cutting
Mode to Eject in the printer menu.
(→P.193)
200 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.19)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Handling Paper 201
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Important
• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation
to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have
pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
202 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
5.
Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or
cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
6.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
Handling Paper 203
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
7.
Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the
Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b),
keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.
Important
• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the
paper from being advanced straight.
• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.
8.
Close the Top Cover.
9.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.
Note
• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2. Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.
3. Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu to cut the edge.
(→P.193)
204 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Roll Holder Set
A set of parts comprising the Roll Holder and Holder Stopper. If you want to prepare a few rolls with paper of
various types and widths for different purposes, it is convenient to have several sets ready. Sets are available
for 2- and 3-inch paper cores. (2-inch versions match the set included with the printer.)
• Roll Holder Set RH2-42 (for 2-inch paper cores)
• Roll Holder Set RH3-42 (for 3-inch paper cores)
Handling Paper 205
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)
1.
2.
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
3.
Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the
Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.
name of this printer.
206 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.539)
Handling Paper 207
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
208 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .
I Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
J Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
Handling Paper 209
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling rolls
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper
is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
210 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source
You can switch the paper source between the roll and the sheet by pressing the Feeder Selection button.
Each time you press this button, the paper source switches between the roll (indicated by the Roll Media
lamp ) and the sheet (indicated by the Cut Sheet lamp ).
1.
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the Cut Sheet lamp (a).
Caution
• Paper jams may occur if you load paper other than the paper specied in the paper settings for
the media source. If you insert the edge of a roll in the Paper Feed Slot after you have selected
sheets as the type of paper in the media source on the Control Panel and specied the type and
size of paper, the printer will prepare to print on the roll. If you print under these conditions, an error
will occur when the roll is ejected. (→P.774)
Note
• You cannot switch the paper source in the following situations:
• If the Message lamp is ashing
Check the message on the Display Screen and take action as necessary. (→P.764)
• If the Data lamp is ashing
Select the paper source after printing.
• If a printer menu operation is in progress
Select the paper source after the menu operation.
2.
Remove any loaded paper that will not be used. (→P.216)
Note
• If a roll is loaded, the roll paper is automatically ejected.
After you select the sheet as the paper source, a message is displayed instructing you to load the sheet.
At this point, load the sheet. (→P.212)
Handling Paper 211
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Loading the Sheet in the Printer
Note
• For details on supported types and sizes of the paper, see Paper Sizes (→P.175) or the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• Loading a sheet while a roll remains loaded may cause paper jams. We recommend removing the
roll if you will load a sheet. (→P.186)
To prevent the roll from unwinding if you leave it loaded, wrap a sheet of paper around the roll and
tape it to fasten it.
• If the Platen is dirty, clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.720)
• After pressing the Load/Eject button, you can refer to instructions on the Display Screen as you load
the paper.
1.
If you send a print job from a computer beforehand, the type and size of paper are shown on the
Display Screen. Lift the Release Lever and open the Top Cover.
212 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
2.
With a sheet lengthwise and printing-side up, insert it between the Platen (a) and the Paper
Retainer (b). Align the edges of the sheet as follows.
1. Align the sheet with the Paper Alignment Line (c) at right.
2. Align the inserted edge of the sheet with the leading edge of the Paper Alignment Line (d), as shown.
When inserted, sheets are automatically held by suction against the Platen.
Important
• Load a sheet so that it is parallel to the Paper Alignment Line at right (c). Loading paper askew will
cause an error.
• Warped paper may rub against the Printhead. Straighten paper if it is warped before loading it.
Handling Paper 213
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Note
• You can adjust the strength of vacuum holding paper against the Platen when the Release Lever
is up. If it is difcult to load paper, press the ▲ or ▼ button on the Control Panel to adjust the
strength. Increase the vacuum by pressing the ▲ button or decrease it with the ▼ button. Three
levels are available.
However, even if you increase the vacuum, it may not be sufcient to hold some types of paper
against the Platen well. In this case, use your hand to load the paper.
• A sheet is held in place by vacuuming through holes on the Platen. Although the vacuuming may
produce a noise when paper is loaded in some positions, it does not indicate a problem. If the noise
is distracting, try moving the paper over slightly to the left or right (up to 1 mm [0.039 in]) while
keeping it parallel to the Paper Alignment Line.
• The vacuum remains on for about 30 seconds during loading. If you cannot nish loading a sheet
during this time, pull the sheet away and reinsert it to start the vacuum suction again.
3.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
The printer now starts feeding the paper.
After the paper is advanced, the printer automatically goes online and starts printing.
If no print job has been received from the computer beforehand, the printer automatically shows
a menu for selection of the paper type on the Display Screen.
In this case, select the type of paper. (→P.215)
Note
• When using the Output Stacker, if you will print on large, stiff sheets, we recommend adjusting the
Output Stacker into the lowest position to prevent printed sheets from being bent (→P.221)
214 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)
When changing the type of paper after the paper has been advanced, specify the type of paper as follows.
Note
• After you load the sheet, the printer automatically shows a menu for selection of the paper type on
the Display Screen. In this case, select the paper type, and then press the OK button. The printer
will automatically go online.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Cut Sheet Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper loaded in the printer, and then press the OK button.
Note
• For details on paper types, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169) Plain Paper is selected by
factory default.
If you move the Release Lever, the setting automatically reverts to Plain Paper.
• Be sure to select the correct paper type. If this setting does not match the loaded paper, it may
cause feed errors and affect the printing quality.
• If you select a type of paper for which Media Width Detection is deactivated ( Off is selected), you
must advance the paper manually to the position for printing. (→P.150)
5.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
Handling Paper 215
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Removing the Sheet
1.
Press the Load/Eject button.
Note
• Paper cannot be ejected by using the Load/Eject button when print jobs are in progress or during
the ink drying period. Before ejecting paper, press the Stop button to cancel printing, print job
processing, or ink drying.
2.
Press the OK button to eject the paper.
The paper is ejected from the front of the printer.
3.
Open the Top Cover, lift the Release Lever, and remove the paper.
4.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
216 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.19)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
Handling Paper 217
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
5.
If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.
6.
If the paper is not visible, lift the Ejection Guide, remove the Roll Holder, and remove the
jammed paper from below.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer, and
lower the Ejection Guide.
218 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
7.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
8.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
9.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
Handling Paper 219
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Handling sheets for paper feed slots
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for Printing
After loading sheets, if you select a type of paper in the printer menu with width detection deactivated, you
will need to feed the paper a different way than usual. Specically, you must manually advance the paper to
the position of printing.
In this case, advance the paper as far into the paper feed slot as possible because it will be printed starting at
that position.
Manually advance paper as follows.
1.
When Width Detection OFF. OK to continue? is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼
to select Leave OFF and then press the OK button.
If you select Width Detection ON, change the Media Detailed Settings information for that
paper and use the regular feeding method.
2.
Keeping the right edge of the sheet aligned with the extended line of the paper alignment line (a)
on the right side of the printer, load the sheet so that the near edge is aligned with the groove (b)
at the far end of the platen.
3.
4.
Check the position of the loaded paper and press the OK button.
After a menu for selection of the paper size is shown on the Display Screen, press ▲ or ▼ to
select the paper size, and then press the OK button.
Note
• If a print job received requires paper larger than the selected paper, it may soil the Platen.
220 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker
The Output Stacker can be installed at four positions, as shown.
• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker
Use position (1).
• When the Output Stacker is not used
Use position (2).
• When the Media Take-up Unit is used, or when the Output Stacker is stored for long periods
Lower it to position (3) for storage. (→P.226)
When using the Output Stacker again after storage, reattach the Basket Rod on the front of the Output
Stacker to the tips of the left and right Basket Arms and pull the side rods out completely.
• When printing on large, stiff sheets
Use position (3).
Set it to position (4) for large-format printing or when printing on delicate paper. (→P.223)
Important
• When storing printed documents on the Output Stacker, always use it in position (1). If you do not, printed
documents may not be dropped into the Output Stacker, and the printed surface may become soiled.
• The Output Stacker can hold one sheet. When printing multiple pages, remove each sheet after it
is printed.
• Before using the Output Stacker, remove the Rewind Spool. If you do not, it may prevent printed
documents from being held correctly, and it they may be scratched.
• The Output Stacker can hold printed documents from rolls that are 62 inches (1,575 mm) long. When
printing longer documents, eject them in front of the printer or use the optional Media Take-up Unit.
Handling Paper 221
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
The Output Stacker locks into position if you lift it to position (1) or (2). To lower the Output Stacker, lift the
front Basket Rod lightly to release the lock, and then lower the stacker.
222 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
Using the Output Stacker in the position for ejection in the front of
the printer
You can also set the Output Stacker to the following position for large-format printing or when printing on
delicate paper.
Note
• Always choose Cutting Mode > Eject when the Output Stacker is in the position for ejection in the front
of the printer. If you choose Automatic, printed documents may be damaged. (→P.193)
• During ejection in the front of the printer, be especially careful when using delicate paper or paper
that curls easily.
• With some types of paper, the leading edge may curl or bend during ejection. In this case, straighten out
the paper. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper is curled or bent.
• Some types of paper may get caught between the Ejection Guide and Output Stacker during ejection.
In this case, free the paper from where it is caught. Printed documents may be damaged if the paper
gets caught.
1.
Lift the Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front, and push it all
the way back.
Handling Paper 223
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
2.
Remove the Output Stacker from the printer.
Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Arms, and remove the back Basket
Rod and the black cord from the Rod Holder.
3.
Store the left and right Basket Arms. Next, remove the Rod Holder Adapter, leaving the Rod
Holder attached, and put it in front of the printer.
224 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
4.
Pull out the Basket Hooks from the left and right side of the Ejection Guide.
5.
Attach the Basket Rod to the Basket Hooks so that the white tag of the Basket Cloth is on
the left side.
6.
Form the Basket Cloth into a sloping shape to make it taut, and attach the middle Basket Rod to
the Rod Holder.
Handling Paper 225
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
Stowing the Output Stacker
Stow the Output Stacker if you will use the Media Take-up Unit or if you will not use the Output Stacker
for an extended period.
1.
When the Output Stacker is in the position used when storing printed documents (a), lift the front
Basket Rod gently to release the lock, lower the stacker toward the front (b), and push it all
the way back.
2.
Remove the front Basket Rod from the left and right Basket Arms. Roll up the Basket Cloth and
put it at the back of the Bottom Stand Stay.
Important
• When using the optional Media Take-up Unit, position the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do
not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor (indicated by the dashed line).
226 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Output Stacker
3.
Push in the left and right Basket Arms toward the back all the way, until they stop.
Handling Paper 227
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Media take-up unit
Media Take-up Unit
This unit automatically winds up printed documents.
• Media Take-up Unit TU-06
Note
• For instructions on installing the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Media Take-up Unit Setup Guide.
• For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide.
• For Media Take-up Unit instructions, see “Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)”. (→P.230)
228 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Media Take-up Unit (Optional)
Use the optional Media Take-up Unit to have documents that are printed on rolls rewound automatically after
printing. This is convenient for large-format printing, or when printing large-volume jobs continuously.
Note
• For instructions on installing the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Media Take-up Unit Setup Guide.
• For information on the types of paper compatible with the Media Take-up Unit, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• For Media Take-up Unit instructions, see “Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)”. (→P.230)
Handling Paper 229
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
Enable the Media Take-up Reel function. (→P.231)
Load the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.232)
Turn the Media Take-up Unit on.
Print on the roll.
Turn the Media Take-up Unit off.
Remove the printed document from the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.239)
Disable the Media Take-up Unit function. (→P.231)
Important
• The Media Take-up Unit cannot be used with sheets.
• If you have attached the Output Stacker, always stow it before using the Media Take-up Unit. (→P.226)
Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.
• Do not put anything near the Media Take-up Sensor that might interfere with it. This may impair
operation.
• Rolls are not cut automatically when the Media Take-up Unit is used, regardless of the Cutting Mode
setting in the printer menu or the Automatic Cutting setting in the printer driver.
• Color tones after printing may change during the ink drying period for some types of paper. Allow
ample drying time before the nal check of color tones, and do not remove printed documents from the
Media Take-up Unit too soon.
• In humid environments, documents with heavy ink coverage printed on thin Coated Paper may not be
retracted evenly by the Media Take-up Unit. In this case, take steps to control humidity in the operating
environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so that printed documents are handled after the
ink has fully dried.
• In humid environments, documents printed on Fabric Banner and Synthetic Paper may not be retracted
evenly by the Media Take-up Unit. In this case, take steps to control humidity in the operating
environment or adjust the Roll DryingTime setting so that printed documents are handled after the
ink has fully dried.
230 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Enabling the Take-Up Reel Function
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Select Take-up Reel → Enable and press the OK button.
Disabling the Take-Up Reel Function
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
Select Take-up Reel → Disable and press the OK button.
Handling Paper 231
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit
1.
When using the Output Stacker, stow the Output Stacker before this procedure. (→P.226)
Important
• Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up Sensor.
• Do not put anything in front of the Media Take-up Sensor that might interfere with it. This may
impair operation.
2.
Unlock the ange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever (a) from the shaft
side. Remove the ange.
3.
When rewinding rolls with 3-inch paper cores, insert the 3-inch Adapter on the anges at both
ends.
4.
Insert the paper core, which serves as the spindle for rewinding a roll, on the Rewind Spool.
Important
• On the Rewind Spool, always use a paper core that is the same size as the roll to be rewound.
232 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
5.
Push the anges in rmly until the paper core is secured in place and push down the lever
(a) toward the shaft.
Important
• After pushing in the anges rmly, make sure the paper core is secure and does not move around.
Move the paper core left and right. If there is a gap between the anges and paper core, repeat
steps 2-4.
6.
Load the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit so that the gear of the Rewind Spool (a)
meshes with the gear of the Right Media Take-up Unit (b).
Important
• If you attempt to load the Rewind Spool with the left and right ends inverted by mistake, the Media
Take-up Unit cannot be turned on.
• If the gear of the Rewind Spool (a) does not mesh with the gear of the Right Media Take-up Unit (b),
the Media Take-up Unit cannot be turned on.
7.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Handling Paper 233
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Media Menu, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The roll is now advanced to the Media Take-up Unit.
10.
Hold the roll paper by the middle of the leading edge and align the right edge with the right edge
of the paper core of the Rewind Spool. With the left and right edges of the roll paper evenly taut,
tape the middle to the paper core to fasten it.
11.
Making sure the roll paper is not slack, tape the left and right side of the leading edge to the
paper core.
Note
• When rewinding heavyweight paper, use strong adhesive tape to fasten it.
234 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
12.
Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine, and then press ▼ to loosen the tension
of the roll.
13.
On the Right Media Take-up Unit, pull the Rewind Mode Switch forward to turn it on. Press
▼ to rewind the roll so that it is nearly taut.
Important
• Rewind the paper so that the paper core makes at least two revolutions. If the paper is not rewound
two full revolutions, repeat steps 11 and 12.
• Do not manually force the Rewind Spool or paper core to rotate them. This may damage them. To
rewind or unwind rolls, press ▲ or ▼ on the Media Take-up Unit.
Handling Paper 235
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
14.
You can unwind rolls by holding down ▼ on the Control Panel.
15.
Use a combination of Weight Roll, Weight Joint, and Weight Flange that matches the roll type
and width.
The following list identies Weight Roll and Weight Flange you can use. Color Label is applied
to each Weight Roll.
Weight Roll
Weight Roll to Use
Roll Width
B2 Width: 515.0 mm (20.3 in)
“D”
B1 Width: 728.0 mm (28.7 in)
“A”+“E”
B0 Width: 1,030.0 mm (40.6 in)
“A”+“G”
A1 Width: 594.0 mm (23.4 in)
“E”
A0 Width: 841.0 mm (33.1 in)
“B”+“E”
431.8 mm (17 in)
“C”
609.6 mm (24 in)
“E”
762.0 mm (30 in)
“B”+“D”
914.4 mm (36 in)
“G”
1,066.8 mm (42 in)
“C”+“E”
1,117.6 mm (44 in)
“D”+“E”
236 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Weight Flange
Roll Type
Weight Flange to Use
Glossy Photo Paper , Semi-Glossy Photo Paper ,
Weight Flange 1 (*1)
Heavyweight Glossy Photo Paper , Heavyweight
SemiGlossy Photo Paper , Fine Art Photo Paper
, Fine Art Heavyweight Photo Paper , Fine Art
Textured Paper , Canvas Matte , Fine Art Block
Print , Fine Art Watercolor , Proong paper ,
Coated Paper , Heavyweight Coated Paper , Extra
Heavyweight Coated Paper , Colored Coated
Paper , Synthetic Paper , Adhesive Synthetic Paper
, Backprint Film , Backlit Film , Flame-Resistant
Cloth , Fabric Banner , Thin Fabric Banner
Premium Matte Paper
Weight Flange 2
*1: If you cannot retract stiff paper well using Weight Flange 1 or if the diameter of the retracted paper
is wider than the Rewind Spool, use Weight Flange 2. When using Weight Flange 2, adjust the
paper feed amount by executing Auto Band Adj. (→P.655)
Note
• Do not use combinations other than those identied here.
• Insert the Weight Flange and Weight Joint rmly on the Weight Roll.
• Use identical Weight Flanges on the left and right ends. Insert matching Weight Flanges (1 or
2) on both ends of the Weight Roll.
• Keep unused Weight Roll, Weight Joint, and Weight Flange handy by putting them in the box and
putting the box under the Stand.
16.
Set the Weight Roll gently on top of the slack in the roll paper.
Important
• Always set the Weight Roll on the paper. Failure to do this may cause rewinding problems.
• When setting the Weight Roll on the paper, avoid touching the paper core and causing the wound roll
to become out of alignment on the left and right end.
Handling Paper 237
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
17.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
The Media Take-up Unit is now ready for use. Printed rolls can now be rewound automatically.
Note
• When the Media Take-up Unit is in use, an icon indicating the take-up mode is shown on the
Display Screen.
238 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
Removing Printed Documents from the Media Take-up
Unit (Optional)
1.
Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2.
Hold down the ▼ button to advance the roll a little.
To protect the paper that has been rewound, advance it an amount longer than the outer
circumference.
3.
Remove the Weight Roll from the roll paper.
4.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Handling Paper 239
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Cutting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes. As you hold the trailing edge of the printed document, press the
OK button.
The roll is now cut.
Important
• Always hold the trailing edge of printed documents when cutting rolls. If you do not hold the
documents, they may fall on the oor and the printed surface may become soiled.
7.
Hold the trailing edge of the printed document and press the ▼ button on the Media Take-up Unit
to rewind the printed documents.
Apply adhesive tape to the rewound paper to hold it in place, if necessary.
Important
• Be careful not to scratch the printed surface.
8.
Turn off the Media Take-up Unit by pushing in the Rewind Mode Switch.
240 Handling Paper
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Media take-up unit
9.
Remove the Rewind Spool from the Media Take-up Unit.
Important
• Always turn off the Media Take-up Unit before removing the Rewind Spool. The Media Take-up Unit
may be damaged if you do not turn it off rst.
• Remove the Rewind Spool, pulling off both ends from the Media Take-up Unit at once.
10.
Unlock the ange on the left side of the Rewind Spool by lifting the lever (a) from the shaft
side. Remove the ange.
11.
Remove the entire paper core with the rewound printed documents from the Rewind Spool.
Note
• You can leave the Rewind Spool on the Media Take-up Unit even when it is not used for rewinding
rolls.
Handling Paper 241
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Enhanced Printing Options
Print quality and color settings
Choosing a Paper for Printing
Choosing the right paper for your particular printing application will give you the best printing results.
Media type
The printer and printer driver offer print settings optimized for various paper characteristics.
Note
• For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you change
paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. For information about the Media Conguration
Tool, see the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
• An error message is displayed on the printer Control Panel if the paper type as specied in the printer
driver does not match the type specied on the printer. Although you can print under these conditions,
the printing results may not be suitable.
If the paper type is not listed for selection
If the type of paper loaded cannot be selected, try specifying glossy paper or proong paper as a special
paper (Special 1 to Special 5, in this order). BK ( Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Try specifying other
types of paper as Special 6 to Special 10. MBK ( Matte Black Ink ) is used as the black ink. Note that higher
numbers in this setting enable more vivid colors but may also cause colors to run together.
For instructions on specifying the paper type before printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.188)
• Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)
242 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing
You can specify detailed print settings as desired for the quality level, colors, and other criteria.
Advanced Settings
For printing results that appear just as expected for your original, you can specify which graphic elements and
colors to prioritize for printing.
Note
• Easy Settings are also available, providing convenient presets. To use the presets, simply choose
the printing application.
For details on Easy Settings, refer to the following topics.
•
•
•
•
•
Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)
Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Print Priority (*1)
Description
Image
A setting for posters or other documents made up mainly of photos or images, or for
emphasizing photos or images in printed documents.
Line Drawing/Text
Choose this setting for CAD drawings made up mainly of intricate lines, or wall
newspapers and other notices with a large amount of text. Suitable for emphasizing
detailed text in printed documents.
However, the quality may not be sufcient when printing photos or images that
require a lot of color coverage. In this case, choose “Image” instead.
Ofce Document
Choose this setting for better legibility of documents combining text and graphics,
such as documents and presentation material created with typical ofce applications.
*1: Options suitable for the selected paper type are listed under Print Priority.
Enhanced Printing Options 243
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Print Quality
Choose the print quality.
The printing mode is determined by a combination of the print quality and resolution.
Print Quality (*1)
Description
Print Priority
Highest
A setting for printing at the highest resolution when quality is
most important. Printing takes longer and consumes more
ink than in other modes, but this mode offers superior printing
quality.
Image
High
Choose this setting to print at high resolution when quality is
most important.
Printing takes longer and consumes more ink than in
“Standard” or “Draft” modes, but this mode offers exceptional
printing quality.
Image
Line Drawing/Text
Standard
Choose this setting to print at standard resolution when quality Image
and speed are both important.
Line Drawing/Text
Printing takes less time than in “Highest” or “High” mode.
Ofce Document
Draft
Choose this setting to print faster.
Image
Printing in draft mode can help you work more efciently when Line Drawing/Text
checking layouts.
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Print Quality.
244 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Color Settings
Setting Item
Options
Description
Color Mode (*1)
Color
Monochrome (Photo)
Monochrome
Choose whether to print in color or
monochrome.
(→P.254)
Color Adjustment (Images)
Cyan
Magenta
Yellow
Brightness
Contrast
Saturation
Gray Tone Adjustment
You can adjust the levels of cyan,
magenta, and yellow as well as the
brightness, contrast, saturation,
and gray tone separately for
images, graphics, and text
documents.
If you choose Monochrome in
Color Mode only Brightness and
Contrast can be adjusted.
Gray Adjustment
Color Balance
Brightness
Contrast
Highlight
Shadow
Choose the gray tone color balance
( Cool Black or Warm Black )
and adjust levels of brightness,
contrast, highlight, and shadow as
desired.
These levels can be adjusted when
Monochrome (Photo) is selected
in Color Mode .
Color-Matching Modes
Driver Matching Mode
ICC Matching Mode
Off
Choose the color-matching mode.
Other color-matching modes may
be provided by the computer
operating system, such as ICM
and ColorSync.
Color-Matching Method (*2)
Auto
Perceptual
Perceptual (People, Dark Areas)
Saturation
Colorimetric
Others
Choose the color-matching
method. The available options
vary depending on your selection
in “Color-Matching Mode.”
Color Space (*3)
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Choose a standard color space
( sRGB ) or an expanded color
space ( Adobe RGB ).
Color Adjustment (Graphics)
Color Adjustment (Text)
*1: Options suitable for the selected Print Priority are listed under Color Mode.
*2: The order of options displayed varies depending on the operating system.
*3: Adobe RGB is not available if an incompatible combination of the paper type and print quality is
selected.
Enhanced Printing Options 245
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Enhancing Printing Quality
Setting Item
Description
Thicken Fine Lines (*1)
Choose this option to make ne lines clearer in CAD
drawings or similar documents.
Unidirectional Printing
Choosing unidirectional printing can improve printing
results if lines are printed crooked or images are
uneven. However, it takes more time than regular
printing.
High-Precision Printing
Enables printing at the highest level of quality.
However, this requires more time than usual for
printing.
*1: Displayed in Windows and Mac OS 9.
Note
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
• For instructions on specifying the print quality and color settings before printing, refer to the following
topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Windows) (→P.259)
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS X) (→P.261)
• Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions (Mac OS 9) (→P.264)
246 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X)
Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for photos and images
Print Target
Description
Highest Quality
Setting optimized for printing at the highest level
of quality.
Draft
Setting optimized for high-speed draft printing.
Photo (Photo Studio)
For printing with an effect similar to that produced
by photo studios. In subdued, dark photos,
images of people and dark scenes are printed
attractively.
Photo (Standard)
Setting optimized for printing photographic
images from digital cameras.
Photo (Adobe RGB)
Setting optimized for printing in colors matching
those of images created using the Adobe RGB
color space.
Photo (Monochrome)
Setting optimized for printing monochrome
photos in the neutral black image tone of
conventional lm photographs.
Poster (Photos)
Suitable for printing posters composed mainly of
photographs.
Enhanced Printing Options 247
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Print Target
Description
Poster (Text, Illustrations)
Setting optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching
store posters combining images and text.
Scanned Image
Setting optimized for printing scanned images
with accurate color reproduction to match the
original images.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.243)
• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.297)
• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.299)
248 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)
Printing is easy when you simply choose the print target.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for photos and images
Print Target
Description
Highest Quality
Settings optimized for printing at the highest
level of quality.
Photos (High Image Quality)
Setting optimized for printing photographic
images at a higher level of quality.
Photo (from digital camera)
Settings optimized for printing photographic
images from digital cameras.
Photo (Monochrome)
Setting optimized for printing monochrome
photos in the neutral black image tone of
conventional lm photographs.
Adobe RGB Images
Settings optimized for printing in colors matching
those of images created using the Adobe RGB
color space.
Poster (Graphic Image)
Settings optimized for printing posters mainly
composed of photos and images.
POP Ad
Settings optimized for printing vivid, eye-catching
store posters combining images and text.
Enhanced Printing Options 249
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Print Target
Description
Scanned Image
Settings optimized for printing scanned images
with accurate color reproduction to match the
original images.
Draft
Settings optimized for high-speed draft printing.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.243)
• For instructions on printing photos and images, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)
250 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X)
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print Target
Description
Poster (Notice Announcement)
Settings optimized for printing announcements
such as wall newspapers and other notices with
a large amount of text.
3D CAD, GIS
Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings,
perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS
maps.
CAD (Line Drawing)
Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD
drawings clearly.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.243)
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.284)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.286)
Enhanced Printing Options 251
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for line drawings and text
Print Target
Description
Poster (Notice Announcement)
Settings optimized for printing announcements
such as wall newspapers and other notices with
a large amount of text.
3D-CAD/GIS
Settings optimized for printing 3D CAD drawings,
perspective drawings, and maps, including GIS
maps.
CAD (Line Drawing)
Settings optimized to print intricate lines in CAD
drawings clearly.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.243)
For instructions on printing line drawings and text, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)
252 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Ofce Documents
Printing is easy when you simply choose the type of original to print.
Easy Settings
Simply choose the printing application in the list for optimal printing results.
Print Target
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Print targets for ofce documents
Print Target
Ofce Document
Description
Settings optimized for clear printing of ofce
documents such as handouts.
Note
• You can check the settings values for each print target by clicking View Settings.
• You can also ne-tune these values as needed. (Advanced Settings)
For details on Advanced Settings, see “Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors
for Printing”. (→P.243)
For instructions on printing ofce documents, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Ofce Documents (Windows) (→P.291)
• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X) (→P.293)
• Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9) (→P.295)
Enhanced Printing Options 253
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver
Color settings specied in the application for your documents are essentially given priority over other settings
for each print job, but further color adjustment is possible in the printer driver.
Color Mode
Choose how the printer driver processes color, as desired.
The available options vary depending on the color mode.
Description
Color Mode
Color
Color Adjustment
Print in color.
You can adjust the color balance and
color-matching method.
Monochrome (Photo) Grayscale printing optimized for
monochrome photos.
You can adjust the color balance in ways
tailored to monochrome photos.
Monochrome
You can adjust the color balance.
Print in grayscale.
Color Adjustment
You can adjust colors separately for images, graphics, and text documents.
Adjustment Item
Cyan
Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan
, Magenta , and Yellow .
Yellow
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping
the darkest and lightest portions intact.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions
relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
Gray Tone Adjustment (Gray Tone)
Adjust the grayscale, in a range from cool, blue tones
to warm, red tones.
254 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Matching
You can choose the color-matching mode and method.
By adjusting the color-matching mode and method, you can make printed colors match the colors of
on-screen images more closely.
Matching Mode
Description
Notes
Driver Matching
Mode
Color adjustment based on the original
color prole of the printer driver
This is the default color-matching method.
Normally, use Driver Matching Mode .
ICC Matching
Mode
Color adjustment based on ICC color
proles (an international standard) using
the printer driver
You can select the printer prole in the
Printer Prole Settings list.
Driver ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the standard
Windows ICM function. The printer driver
adjusts the colors.
Available when using Windows 2000,
Windows XP, or Windows Server
2003/Windows Vista
Host ICM Mode
Color adjustment based on the standard
Windows ICM function. Windows adjusts
the colors.
ColorSync
Color adjustment based on the standard
Mac OS ColorSync function. Mac OS
adjusts the colors.
Available when using the Mac OS
Off (No Correction)
No color-matching
Choose this option for color-matching by
the software application or with your own
color prole, when you want to disable
color-matching by the printer driver.
Enhanced Printing Options 255
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Matching Method
Description
Auto
Color-matching optimized for images,
graphics, or text
Perceptual
Color-matching optimized for photos.
Print images with smooth gradations and
colors closer to those as displayed on the
screen.
Perceptual
(People, Dark
Areas)
Color matching optimized for printing
skin tone and dark areas attractively
in subdued, dark photos. For printing
indoor shots of people or evening scenes
attractively.
Colorimetric
Color-matching with adjustment to remove
color from white area. Without white
adjustment, colors are added to white
area.
Colorimetric (No
Wht-pnt Corr)
Color-matching without white adjustment
to reect the prole of original data.
Without white adjustment, colors are
added to white area.
Saturation
Color-matching optimized for graphics.
This option emphasizes color saturation.
Notes
The available options and their display
order varies depending on your selection
in Color-Matching Mode, as well as the
operating system.
Gray Adjustment
The following settings can be adjusted if “Monochrome (Photo)” is selected in Color Mode.
Gray Adjustment
Description
Items
Color Balance
Enables you to adjust the gray tone to suit the images of monochrome photos.
Choose cool black (tinged with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged with
red), and so on.
Select the color tone in the color region or from the list.
Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while keeping the darkest and lightest
portions intact.
Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard gradation, increase the contrast.
Highlight
Adjust levels of image highlight areas.
Shadow
Adjust levels of image shadow areas.
Note
• Be sure to calibrate your monitor colors correctly if you adjust the colors for printing. If monitor colors
are not calibrated correctly, you may not obtain the desired printing results. For instructions on monitor
calibration, refer to the documentation for your monitor and operating system.
For instructions on color adjustment, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows) (→P.267)
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X) (→P.270)
• Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.273)
256 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment
You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.
There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in
the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:
• By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.669)
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the Eye-One spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also
be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported Eye-One devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure
Tool.
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.673)
Enhanced Printing Options 257
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos in Monochrome
The following settings are available for monochrome printing.
Main
Easy
Settings
Print Photo
A mode optimized for printing monochrome images with
Target (Monochrome) maximum expressiveness through simple operations.
Choosing Photo (Monochrome) in Easy Settings applies
image processing to keep color ink use to an absolute
minimum, suppressing color shift and achieving consistent
gray balance.
• Photo (Monochrome) is not available for all types of
paper.
• Printing that matches the pure neutral black of conventional
photos (silver-halide prints) is possible.
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows) (→P.305)
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.307)
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.310)
Advanced Color
Settings
Mode
Monochrome
(Photo)
A mode for printing monochrome images with maximum
expressiveness by specifying detailed settings. In these
settings, you can specify to apply image processing to keep
color ink use to an absolute minimum, suppress color shift,
and achieve consistent gray balance. You can also ne-tune
the color balance by selecting “Warm Black,” “Cool Black”,
and so on.
• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color
Adjustment sheet.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of
paper.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Windows) (→P.276)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS X) (→P.278)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS 9) (→P.281)
Monochrome
Deactivates color printing so that images are printed in
monochrome, with continuous-tone color data printed using
gray midtones. Use this mode to print ofce documents or
graphics in monochrome, or if the paper is not compatible with
the Monochrome (Photo) setting.
• Even more detailed adjustment is possible on the Color
Adjustment sheet.
• If the paper is not compatible with the Monochrome
(Photo) setting, choose Monochrome .
• Because color ink is used to produce gray continuous-tone
images, the gray may appear to have a tinge of color.
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Windows) (→P.276)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS X) (→P.278)
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS 9) (→P.281)
258 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to print CAD drawings in monochrome.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Enhanced Printing Options 259
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
6.
7.
Click Line Drawing/Text in the E Print Priority list.
Click Standard (600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
8.
9.
Click Monochrome in the G Color Mode list.
To adjust the brightness and contrast, click H Color Settings.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.
(→P.254)
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Media Source, and so on.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
260 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to print CAD drawings in monochrome.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 261
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
8.
9.
10.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Line Drawing in the E Print Priority list.
Click Standard(600dpi) in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11.
12.
Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.
To adjust the brightness and contrast, click I Set.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.
(→P.254)
262 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 263
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Choosing the Document Type and Printing Conditions
(Mac OS 9)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to print CAD drawings in monochrome.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application menu, choose Print.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
264 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
8.
9.
10.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Click E Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Line Drawing in the F Print Priority list.
Click Standard(600dpi) in the G Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the G Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11.
12.
Click Monochrome in the H Color Mode list.
To adjust brightness and contrast, click I Set.
Note
• For instructions on adjusting brightness and contrast, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”.
(→P.254)
Enhanced Printing Options 265
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
13.
Access the Finishing pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the selection in A Media Source.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
266 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Enhanced Printing Options 267
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
On the Color Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
C Cyan
D Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,
Magenta , and Yellow .
E Yellow
9.
F Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
H Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
I Gray Tone Adjustment
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
268 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Media Source, and so on.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 269
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
270 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 271
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
C Cyan
D Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,
Magenta , and Yellow .
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
H Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
I Gray Tone
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
272 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how
to ne-tune the color tone of photos before printing.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Enhanced Printing Options 273
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
8.
9.
10.
Click E Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settingsdialog box.
274 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
On the Color Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Adjustment Item
C Cyan
D Magenta
Description
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of Cyan ,
Magenta , and Yellow .
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the brightness of printed images while
keeping the darkest and lightest portions intact.
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest
portions relative to each other.
For soft gradation, decrease the contrast. For hard
gradation, increase the contrast.
H Saturation
Adjust the level of color saturation, in a range from
subdued to vivid.
I Gray Tone
Adjust the gray tone to suit the images of
monochrome photos. Choose cool black (tinged
with blue), pure black (neutral), warm black (tinged
with red), and so on. Select the color tone in the
color region or from the list.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
14.
15.
Conrm the selection in A Media Source.
Access the Finishing pane.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 275
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Windows)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
Click Monochrome (Photo) in the G Color Mode list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Note
• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.
276 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
8.
9.
10.
On the Gray Adjustment sheet, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
11.
12.
Conrm the settings of A Page Size, L Media Source, and so on.
Close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 277
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS X)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
278 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
8.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9.
Click Monochrome (Photo) in the H Color Mode list.
Note
• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.
10.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
11.
12.
On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Enhanced Printing Options 279
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
15.
Conrm the settings of A Media Source and C Page Size.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
280 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing Photos
(Mac OS 9)
You can specify your own print settings instead of using the Print Target presets. This topic describes how to
ne-tune monochrome settings before printing.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Enhanced Printing Options 281
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
8.
Click E Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
9.
Click Monochrome (Photo) in the H Color Mode list.
Note
• Monochrome (Photo) may not be available for all types of paper.
10.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
11.
On the Gray Adjustment pane, adjust the color tones, brightness, and so on as desired.
282 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
12.
Access the Finishing pane.
13.
14.
Conrm the selection in A Media Source.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 283
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
284 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this
case, click ISO A3.
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 285
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
286 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 287
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
288 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the F Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.
Enhanced Printing Options 289
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
290 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Ofce Documents (Windows)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing software or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Enhanced Printing Options 291
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setupsheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Select sheets in the L Media Source list.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
10.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Caution
• Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may not be available.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
292 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set.
Enhanced Printing Options 293
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Sheets in the A Media Source list.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
294 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Ofce Documents (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Ofce document created using word-processing or spreadsheet programs
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Ofce Document in the F Print Target
list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.
Enhanced Printing Options 295
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
12.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
296 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type, choose the type of paper used for printing, such as Glossy Paper, Coated
Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
5.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo
Studio) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images (Windows, Mac OS X)”. (→P.247)
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
Enhanced Printing Options 297
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
298 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper Type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper Width: 10 inches (254 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 299
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
8.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Standard) or Photo (Photo
Studio) in the E Print Target list.
Note
• For information on settings optimized for printing photos and images, see “Printing Photos and
Images (Windows, Mac OS X)”. (→P.247)
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
300 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 301
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print photos based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
302 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
In the C Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
8.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (from digital camera) in the
F Print Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.
9.
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 303
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
304 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)
This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Original: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
Enhanced Printing Options 305
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
5.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print
Target list.
Caution
• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in.
Roll (254.0mm), and then click OK.
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
306 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Original: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 307
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
In the A Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
8.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the E Print
Target list.
Caution
• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
308 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer
Information on the Main pane to update the printer information.
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 309
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print photos in monochrome based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Original: Photo image from a digital camera
Page size: 10×12 inches
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
310 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
In the C Media Type setting, choose the type of paper for printing, such as Glossy Paper,
Coated Paper, and so on. Make sure the paper you select is loaded in the printer.
Note
• The paper type setting in the printer driver and related software (as well as on the Control Panel ) is
updated when you install the Media Conguration Tool from the User Software CD-ROM or if you
change paper information by using the Media Conguration Tool. (See the Media Conguration Tool
Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).)
8.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Photo (Monochrome) in the F Print
Target list.
Caution
• Photo (Monochrome) may not be available for all types of paper.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.
9.
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 311
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print quality and color settings
11.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the
Main pane to update the printer information.
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
312 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Media Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the paper size, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.338)
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.340)
• Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.343)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 313
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Fit Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width, as desired.
For instructions on resizing originals to match the roll paper width, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows) (→P.330)
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X) (→P.332)
• Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9) (→P.335)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
314 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
You can freely adjust the size of originals by enlarging or reducing them as desired.
Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Enlarge or reduce the original in the printer driver, as desired.
Scaling
Enlarge or reduce originals by a particular amount, as desired.
For instructions on entering a scaling value to resize originals, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows) (→P.321)
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS X) (→P.323)
• Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS 9) (→P.326)
Note
• For better printing results when enlarging photos from a digital camera in TIFF or JPEG format, use
an image-editing application software such as Adobe Photoshop to specify an image resolution of
150 dpi or more at actual size.
Enhanced Printing Options 315
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
For instructions on printing enlargements of scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER, refer to the
following topic.
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.317)
• Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X) (→P.319)
316 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.206)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
Enhanced Printing Options 317
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy Guide .
318 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically enlarged according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
To display the GARO ExtraKit dialog box, either double-click the GARO ExtraKit icon after
navigating to Applications - Canon Utilities - imagePROGRAF, or click C Set on the Utility
pane.
2.
In Enlarged Copy Settings, click Add or Edit and either create or modify the hot folder.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the GARO
ExtraKit utility.
Enhanced Printing Options 319
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning and sending settings to the Favorites button, refer to the Color
imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy Guide .
320 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paperr width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 321
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
8.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
10.
11.
12.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click ISO A4 in the G Media Size list.
Click F Scaling and enter “120.”
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is
printed in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting G Print Centered
on the Layout sheet.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
322 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS
X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 323
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
324 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click G Scaling and enter “120.”
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed
in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting the J Print Centered
check box.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 325
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (Mac OS
9)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing by entering a scaling value, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
Important
• In borderless printing, you cannot resize originals by entering a scaling value.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
326 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, ISO
A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 327
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Access the Page Setup pane.
13.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
328 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
15.
Click F Scaling and enter “120.”
Note
• You can specify enlargement that exceeds the paper size, but in this case, the portion off the edge of
the paper will not be printed.
• If the original size after enlargement or reduction is smaller than the paper size, the original is printed
in the upper-left corner. In this case, you can center originals by selecting F Print Centered on
the Finishing pane.
16.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 329
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
330 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
9.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
10.
Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.
Note
• After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed. Select the width of
the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list and click OK.
• Make sure the roll paper width you specify matches the width of the loaded roll.
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 331
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
332 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 333
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
334 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll paper width, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 335
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
336 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Access the Page Setup pane.
13.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
15.
16.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 337
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
338 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
9.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this
case, click ISO A4.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the D Fit Media Size check box.
Click ISO A3 in the G Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 339
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
340 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 341
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Make sure E Fit Media Size is selected.
Click ISO A3 in the I Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
342 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the paper size, based on the following
example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the printing application in the F Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 343
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
344 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing enlargements or reductions
12.
Access the Page Setup pane.
13.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Make sure D Fit Media Size is selected.
Click ISO A3 in the H Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 345
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Printing at full size
Printing on Oversized Paper
Except in borderless printing, the actual printing area corresponds to your selected paper size minus the
space for a margin. (→P.141) To print documents or images you prepare without a margin at actual size,
use an oversized paper size.
For example, to print a A4-sized original without a margin at A4 size, print it on paper larger than A4 size and
cut away the excess margin.
Note
• If you prepare an original for printing without a margin and print it on paper of regular size, the image
near the edge will not be printed.
Oversize
The margin required by the printer is added around the “outside” of a regular paper size. For example, when
printing a A4-sized original (210×297 mm), you have the following options.
a. Regular paper size: Gray area not printed
b. Page Size
c. Oversized paper size: Print area matches the page size (b)
Important
• When printing on oversize paper, load paper larger than the page size-a size that includes the margin
required by the printer.
• Sheets: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 28 mm (1.10 in) higher than the
page size
• Rolls: Load paper that is at least 10 mm (0.39 in) wider and 10 mm (0.39 in) higher than the
page size
• Paper larger than the maximum size supported by the printer cannot be used as paper for oversized
printing. (→P.175)
346 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Note
• Oversized printing (selecting Oversize in Page Size ) is only available in Windows. For oversized
printing on sheets, choose Cut Sheet as the media source.
• To perform oversized printing on a Macintosh computer, you must specify a non-standard page size and
print on it.
• To specify a non-standard paper size in oversized printing, register the paper size as a Custom Media
Size. Oversized printing is not available with “Custom Size.” (→P.396)
For instructions on oversized printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and
operating system.
• Printing at Full Size (Windows) (→P.358)
• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X) (→P.360)
• Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.363)
Enhanced Printing Options 347
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
348 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.350)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.352)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.355)
Enhanced Printing Options 349
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
350 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 351
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
352 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 353
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
354 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
In D Print Area Setting, click H For Broderless Printing.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In the A Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Enhanced Printing Options 355
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
9.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
10.
11.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
12.
13.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
356 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
14.
Access the Page Setup pane.
15.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
16.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 357
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
7.
Click O Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
In the Media Size Options dialog box, select the Oversize check box in Display Series.
358 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click OK to close the Media Size Options dialog box.
Click Oversize - ISO A4 in the A Page Size list.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Note
• You can select Oversize in Display Series to make all oversized versions of paper in the selected
Display Series available for printing. These sizes are displayed in the Page Size list in the format
Oversize - xxxxxx.
Enhanced Printing Options 359
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4 - Oversize.
Note
• For oversized printing, choose paper identied by the regular paper name followed by “- Oversize.”
4.
5.
6.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
360 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 361
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
12.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4 - Oversize.
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
362 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print at full size based on the following example. (Oversized Printing)
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
In D Print Area Setting, click G For printing oversizes.
8.
9.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the printing application in the F Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 363
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing at full size
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
364 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 365
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Fit Media Size
Enlarge or reduce the original to match the size of the paper you are using.
Note
• The printer driver automatically enlarges originals 3 mm (0.12 in) past the dimensions of the paper on
each side. The 3 mm portion beyond the edge on each side is not printed.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the paper size, refer
to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Windows) (→P.387)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS X) (→P.389)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.392)
366 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 367
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Scale to t Roll Paper Width
Enlarge or reduce the original as a whole to match the roll paper width.
Note
• You can combine this function with rotating pages 90 degrees before printing so that the original width
(relative to portrait orientation) matches the roll paper width in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos, images, and other documents to match the roll paper width,
refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Windows)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS X)
• Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (Mac OS 9)
368 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
Take advantage of borderless printing to print documents such as posters (made up mainly of photos or
images) without a surrounding margin, or border.
Borderless Printing
In regular printing, a margin required by the printer is added around the original. With borderless printing, you
can print documents without the margin, so that the printed image covers the entire surface of the paper.
Important
• Borderless printing is only available with rolls.
• Paper you can use for borderless printing is restricted to particular types of paper and rolls of particular
widths. For information on types of paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide. (→P.169)
• Paper incompatible with the printer’s auto cut function can be printed without borders on the left and
right sides only.
• These features cannot be used in combination with borderless printing: special page layouts, centering
originals, and printing cut lines on rolls.
• You cannot have pages rotated 90 degrees to conserve paper if you have set up borderless printing at
actual size or in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size.
• When borderless printing is used, the edge of the paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may be
uneven at the edges. If you require higher image quality, specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver. In
this case, the paper can be printed without borders on the left and right sides only. After ejecting and
cutting the printed document, use scissors to cut away the top and bottom edges.
• By factory default, the ink drying time is disabled for all paper. When you are using paper that takes
longer for ink to adhere for borderless printing and the Cutter Unit touches printing surfaces that are not
dry yet, it may damage the paper or the edge of the document that is cut, depending on frequency of
use. In this case, follow these steps to change the ink drying time.
1. On the Main sheet of the printer driver, click Settings in Media Type.
2. Select the ink drying time in the Between Pages list of Drying Time.
Borderless Printing Method
Choose the method of borderless printing that suits the original, as desired.
Enhanced Printing Options 369
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Print Image with Actual Size
Prints originals at actual size, without enlarging or reducing them. Originals must be prepared in a size that
exceeds the dimensions of the paper by 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side.
Note
• Not all page sizes are available.
• Even if you prepare originals of the same size as the paper size, the originals are automatically enlarged
when you print borderlessly in combination with resizing originals to match the paper size. This may
affect image quality. When image quality is most important, make the original 3 mm longer on each side
than the paper size so that the image can be printed at actual size in borderless printing.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows) (→P.350)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X) (→P.352)
• Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9) (→P.355)
370 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Create the original in the source application 3 mm (0.12 in) larger on each side than 254.0×304.8
mm (10 × 12 in) -that is, 260.0×310.8 mm (10.2 × 12.2 in)
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
• The extra 3 mm (0.12 in) on each side will not be printed. Create the original so that it ts inside the
paper area to be printed on.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 371
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click F Print Image with Actual Size.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
372 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Coated Paper.
9.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 373
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
374 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12" - Borderless.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 375
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print borderlessly at actual size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10 × 12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)-Borderless
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
In D Print Area Setting, click H For Broderless Printing.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In the A Page Size list, choose a paper size supported for borderless printing. Here, click
10"x12" - Borderless.
Note
• Paper sizes supported for borderless printing are indicated by “-Borderless.”
5.
6.
7.
8.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
376 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
9.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
10.
11.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
12.
13.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Conrm that the roll paper width matches the paper size.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 377
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
14.
Access the Page Setup pane.
15.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
16.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
378 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the roll width, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 379
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, make sure E Scale to t Roll Paper Width is selected.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
380 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 381
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
382 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
15.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
This ensures that F Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in D Enlarged/Reduced
Printing.
16.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 383
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll
Width (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before printing to match the roll width, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to t the roll width.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
384 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 385
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
15.
16.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the G Borderless Printing check box.
This ensures that E Fit Roll Paper Width is automatically selected in C Enlarged/Reduced
Printing.
17.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
386 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Windows)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
1.
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Note
• If you can specify the margin, as in Microsoft Word, set the margin at 0 mm. For instructions on
specifying the margin, refer to the software documentation.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Coated Paper.
6.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 387
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click 10"x12".
9.
10.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
11.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list-in this case, click 10-in. Roll
Select the B Borderless Printing check box to display the Information dialog box.
(254.0mm).
12.
13.
14.
15.
Click OK to close the Information dialog box.
In C Borderless Printing Method, click D Fit Media Size.
Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
388 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 389
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
390 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
On the Page Setup pane, select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the H Borderless Printing check box.
Click E Fit Media Size under D Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
In I Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 391
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match the
Paper Size (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to enlarge originals before borderless printing to match the paper size, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Heavyweight Coated Paper
Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click 10"x12".
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Note
• All sizes are available in borderless printing if you resize originals to match the paper size.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application, create an original that takes up the entire space of the paper size.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
392 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Heavyweight
Coated Paper.
9.
10.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 393
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Borderless Printing
13.
Access the Page Setup pane.
14.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, 10"x12".
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Select the G Borderless Printing check box.
Click D Fit Media Size under C Enlarged/Reduced Printing.
In H Media Size, click the paper size. In this case, click 10"x12" - Borderless.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
394 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing banners or at other non-standard
sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing)
You can create vertical or horizontal banners by printing originals that are in banner format on rolls.
Originals created in Microsoft Word or other applications in your preferred size can be enlarged to ll the width
of roll paper by completing simple printer driver settings.
Fit Roll Paper Width
You can easily create vertical or horizontal banners by automatically enlarging or reducing originals to t the
full width of rolls.
Note
• The maximum supported roll length is 18.0 m or 19.7 yd (when printing in Mac OS X).
For instructions on printing vertical or horizontal banners, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Windows) (→P.406)
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X) (→P.410)
• Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9) (→P.413)
Important
• Before printing, check how much of the roll paper is left. If you have activated automatic detection of the
remaining roll paper, a warning message is displayed when there is not enough roll paper left.
• If not much ink is left, prepare replacement ink tanks.
• To print at a higher level of quality, in the printer driver, choose High or Highest in Print Quality, and
choose Unidirectional Printing as the direction of printing.
Enhanced Printing Options 395
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
By specifying the paper size, you can print on non-standard sizes of paper.
There are two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes, as follows.
Registering non-standard paper size in the printer driver
After you register non-standard paper sizes, they are listed with standard sizes so that you can choose
them anytime as needed.
Note
• These non-standard paper sizes you register in the printer driver are called Custom Media Size in
Windows and Mac OS 9. In Mac OS X, they are called “Custom Sizes.”
Specifying custom media sizes for temporary use
Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you
exit the application. If you want to set up a non-standard paper size so that it will always be available, we
recommend registering the paper size in the printer driver.
Note
• These temporary paper sizes you register on the printer are called “Custom Sizes” in Windows.
For instructions on specifying non-standard paper sizes for printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows) (→P.397)
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X) (→P.401)
• Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9) (→P.403)
396 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)
This topic describes two ways to print on non-standard paper sizes.
• Printing by using Custom Size (→P.397)
• Printing by using Custom Media Size (→P.399)
Printing by using Custom Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Size based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: Square of non-standard dimensions (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
Enhanced Printing Options 397
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click Cut Sheet in the L Media Source list.
Click Custom Size in the A Page Size list to display the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
1. Select mm or inch in Units.
2. Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
11.
12.
Click OK to close the Custom Size Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
398 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing by using Custom Media Size
This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. First, register
a non-standard paper size called “430 mm Square” as a Custom Media Size.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
7.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 399
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
9.
Click O Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Media Size Options dialog box.
1. Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “430 mm Square” is used in this example.
2. Select mm or inch in Units.
3. Enter “430” (16.9 in) in both Width and Height.
Note
• If you select the Fix the Ratio of the Width to Height check box, after you enter a value in either
Width or Height, the other value will be automatically applied based on the original aspect ratio.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Click Add to register “430 mm Square.”
Click OK to close the Media Size Options dialog box.
Click Cut Sheet in the L Media Source list.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, "430 mm Square."
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
400 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print after registering “Custom Media Size” based on the following example. Here, you
will register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in “Custom Media Size”.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
3.
Create the document in the application.
4.
5.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
6.
In Page Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “43.00 cm” in Height and
Width.
7.
In Printer Margins, enter “0.5” for the top and side margins and “2.3” for the bottom margin.
Here, measurements are entered in centimeters.
8.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left in the Custom Page Sizes dialog box and enter the
paper name-in this case, “430*430”.
9.
10.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size
you registered.
11.
12.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Enhanced Printing Options 401
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
13.
Access the Main pane.
14.
15.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the E Print Target
list.
16.
Access the Page Setup pane.
17.
18.
19.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
In D Easy Settings, make sure “430*430” is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
402 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Mac OS 9)
This section describes how to print using Custom Media Size based on the following example. Here, you will
register a non-standard paper size named “430*430” in Custom Media Size. Document:
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Scanned image
Page size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A square sheet (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in])
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create the document in the application.
5.
Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.
6.
7.
Enter a paper name of your choice in B Custom Name. “430*430” is used in this example.
Load the square paper (430 × 430 mm [16.9 × 16.9 in]) in the printer.
Select the printer in Chooser.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In F Media Size, enter the height and width of the original. Here, enter “430” in H Hght and G
Wid..
8.
Click J Add to add the paper size named “430*430”.
Enhanced Printing Options 403
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
9.
10.
Access the Page Attribute dialog box.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click “430*430”, the size
you registered.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
In D Print Area Setting, click E Standard.
16.
17.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Click Cut Sheet in the E Standard list.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Scanned Image in the F Print Target list.
404 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
18.
Access the Finishing pane.
19.
20.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 405
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Windows)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: A horizontal banner created in Microsoft Word
Page size: Non-standard (100 × 500 mm [3.4 × 19.7in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 in (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. Register a Custom Media Size.
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100 ×
500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in) is registered.
2. In the application, create an original in the size you registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Registering a Custom Media Size
This example describes how to register a paper size that is horizontally elongated and suitable for banners in
either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.206)
3.
4.
5.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click O Size Options to display the Media Size Options dialog box.
Enter a desired paper name in Custom Media Size Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used
in this example.
6.
7.
In Units, click mm.
Under Media Size, enter “100” in Width and “500” in Height.
406 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
8.
9.
10.
Click Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”
Click OK to close the Media Size Options dialog box.
Close the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• You can also specify a Custom Size as the paper size. Note that Custom Size settings are not
available after you exit the application.
For more information, see “Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (Windows)”. (→P.397)
Creating the banner in the application
Follow the steps below to create the banner in Microsoft Word using the Custom Media Size you registered.
1.
2.
3.
Start Microsoft Word.
Choose Page Setup from the File menu to display the Page Setup dialog box.
Under Paper Size, click the Custom Media Size you registered-"My Horizontal Banner" in this
example.
Important
• If "My Horizontal Banner" is not listed, make sure this printer is selected as the printer to use.
• In applications such as Microsoft PowerPoint that do not enable you to choose registered paper
sizes, use the custom paper size setting in “Custom” and specify 100 × 500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in)
4.
5.
Set the printing orientation to horizontal
Create the banner.
Printing the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the Microsoft Word menu.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Enhanced Printing Options 407
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the
E Print Target list.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you registered, "My Horizontal Banner."
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Note
• If the Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box is not displayed on the Page Setup sheet, clear the
B Borderless Printing check box.
408 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
9.
10.
11.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
After you click E Fit Roll Paper Width, the Information dialog box is displayed.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 16-in. Roll
(406.4mm), and then click OK.
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Note
• If printing is unsuccessful, you may be able to print after completing the following setting.
1. On the Layout sheet, click M Special Settings to display the Special Settings dialog box.
2. In the FineZoom Settings list, click Yes.
Enhanced Printing Options 409
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
Page size: Non-standard (100 × 500 mm [3.4 × 19.7 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 16 inches (406.4 mm)
Follow the steps below to print a banner in either horizontal or vertical format.
1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.
2. Register a “Custom Page Size.”
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a “Custom Page Size” in Page Setup. In this
example, 100 × 500 mm (3.4 × 19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of setting up non-standard paper
sizes varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
Register a Custom Page Size
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable
for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
Create the document in the application.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click Manage Custom Sizes in the C Paper Size list to display the Custom Page Sizes
dialog box.
5.
Double-click Untitled in the list at left, and then enter a name for the page size you want
to register. Here, enter “100*500.”
If the Untitled size is not visible in the list at left, click + below the list.
6.
Under Page Size, enter “10” in Width and “50” in Height. Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
410 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
Specify the margins by entering “0.3” in Printer Margins. Here, measurements are entered
in centimeters.
8.
9.
Click OK to close the Custom Page Sizes dialog box.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click "100*500", the size
you registered.
10.
11.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Printing the banner
Follow the steps below to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the
E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 411
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
5.
Access the Page Setup pane.
6.
7.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 16
in. (406.4mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
8.
9.
10.
11.
In C Page Size, make sure "100*500" is displayed, as registered in Page Setup.
Select the D Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click F Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
412 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners (Large-Format
Printing; Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print a banner about ve times as long as the roll width based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original designed for a horizontal banner
Page size: Non-standard (100×500 mm, [3.9×19.7 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
The steps to print a vertical or horizontal banner are as follows.
1. In the application, create an original in the format of a horizontal or vertical banner.
2. Register a Custom Media Size in Media Design.
Banners tend to be in non-standard sizes, so register a Custom Media Size. In this example, 100×500
mm (3.9×19.7 in) is registered.
3. Print the banner, using the settings that correspond to banners.
Register a Custom Media Size
This example describes how to register and print using a page size that is horizontally elongated and suitable
for banners in either horizontal or vertical format.
1.
2.
3.
Create the document in the application.
4.
Click Media Design in the Page Attribute list to display the Media Design pane.
5.
6.
Enter a desired paper name in B Custom Name. “My Horizontal Banner” is used in this example.
Select the printer in Chooser.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In C Units, click D mm.
Enhanced Printing Options 413
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Under F Media Size, enter “100” in G Wid. and “500” in H Hght.
Click J Add to add the paper size of “My Horizontal Banner.”
Access the Page Attribute dialog box.
In the A Page Size list, click the size you added, “My Horizontal Banner.”
In B Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
414 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
Print the banner
Follow these steps to print the banner using the corresponding banner settings.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
4.
5.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click POP in the F Print Target list.
Access the Finishing pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 415
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes
7.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case, 10
in. (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Access the Page Setup pane.
In B Page Size, make sure “My Horizontal Banner” is displayed, as registered in Media Design.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
Click E Fit Roll Paper Width.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
416 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
By arranging originals from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or web browser screen shots next to
each other on single sheets, you can create highly expressive presentation materials, easy-to-understand
meeting materials, and a variety of other printed documents.
Free Layout (Windows)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Enhanced Printing Options 417
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh)
Besides combining multiple pages in a single-page layout, you can combine originals from multiple les-even
multiple source applications-in a single-page layout.
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on arranging originals from multiple applications, refer to the following topics.
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows) (→P.426)
• Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X) (→P.428)
418 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
You can print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Roll paper (banner)
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
For instructions on borderless printing of photos and images at actual size, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows) (→P.430)
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X) (→P.431)
• Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9) (→P.433)
Enhanced Printing Options 419
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet
To conserve paper, you can print several pages of the original on a single sheet by reducing the original
and dividing the sheet into areas for each page.
Page Layout
Specify a number of pages of the original to print on a single sheet, in a layout of multiple pages per sheet.
Note
• You can print up to 16 pages of the original on a single sheet.
• You can also change the page layout order and print page boundary lines, as desired.
Important
• This function cannot be combined with the following options.
• Borderless Printing
• Scaling Originals (Windows)
• Banner Printing (Windows)
For instructions on printing multiple pages per sheet, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows) (→P.435)
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X) (→P.437)
• Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9) (→P.440)
420 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Posters in Sections
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you
can create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer.
Page Layout
Choose poster printing.
For instructions on printing large posters, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Printing Large Posters (Windows) (→P.422)
• Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9) (→P.424)
Note
• This method of poster printing is supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.
Enhanced Printing Options 421
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Large Posters (Windows)
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge
an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Poster
Page size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Sheets ( Manual )
Paper Type: Glossy Paper
Paper size: A2 (420.0×594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Poster (Photos) or Poster (Text, Illustrations) in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
422 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case, click
ISO A2.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Manual in the L Media Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click Poster (2 x 2) in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• Follow the steps below to print only a portion of the poster as divided for printing.
1. Click C Set under B Page Layout to display the Pages to Print dialog box.
2. On the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of the portion you do not want to print.
3. Click OK to close the Pages to Print dialog box.
12.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 423
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9)
You can enlarge an original to print it in sections on several sheets. By assembling the printed sheets, you can
create a poster larger than the maximum supported paper size of the printer. This topic describes how to enlarge
an A2 original for printing it in sections on four sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Poster
Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Paper size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A2.
9.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In D Print Area Setting, click E Standard.
Click Cut Sheet in the E Standard list.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Photo Paper.
424 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
10.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click Poster (Graphic Image) in the F Print
Target list.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Select the I Page Layout check box.
16.
17.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
Click Poster (2 x 2) in the I Page Layout list.
In the Pages to Print dialog box, clear the check boxes of any portion you do not want to print.
Access the Finishing pane.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 425
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Windows)
This topic describes how to arrange multiple originals using the Free Layout function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
5.
6.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click Free Layout in the B Page Layout list.
426 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
7.
When you attempt to print, the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed. (At this
point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
Edit and rearrange the image in the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange originals
from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the imagePROGRAF Free Layout
help topic.
9.
Print from the imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .
Enhanced Printing Options 427
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to use the Free Layout function to arrange multiple originals next to each other before
printing.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window is displayed.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout.
428 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
4.
Edit and rearrange the image in the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout window, repeat steps 1-7 to arrange
originals from multiple applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the Canon imagePROGRAF Free
Layout help topic.
5.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout menu.
Note
• For details on Canon imagePROGRAF Free Layout functions, refer to Free Layout Guide .
Enhanced Printing Options 429
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Windows)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
6.
7.
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the L Media Source list.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Conrm the print settings and start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
430 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
Click the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Make your selection in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 431
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Media Source list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
432 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print multiple pages as a single continuous image, without margins between pages.
Important
• This feature is only available with rolls. It cannot be used when printing on sheets.
• During banner printing, settings for conserving paper, number of copies, borderless printing,
enlargement or reduction, and other layout-related settings are disregarded.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Click the original size in the A Page Size list.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, click the type of paper that is loaded.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Make your selection in the F Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 433
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper (Banner) in the A Media Source list.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
434 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0×420.0 mm [11.7×16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
Enhanced Printing Options 435
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the B Page Layout list.
Note
• You can select the layout order for placing four pages on a sheet and a frame border in the Page
Layout Printing dialog box by clicking C Set.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
436 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
Click 4 in the A Pages per Sheet list.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Layout pane.
Note
• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in B Layout
Direction and C Border (or Border ).
Enhanced Printing Options 437
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
11.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Access the Page Setup pane.
438 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
13.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
14.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 439
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print four pages of originals together on a single sheet based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
440 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Select the I Page Layout check box.
Click 4 Pages/Sheet in the I Page Layout list.
Note
• You can choose the layout order and specify a boundary line for the four pages in J Layout
Direction and K Page Border.
12.
Access the Finishing pane.
13.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Enhanced Printing Options 441
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet
14.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
442 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you
are reducing the original.
Centering originals relative to roll paper width
If you use originals smaller than the roll paper width, you can center them relative to the width when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the roll, relative to the width.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on rolls, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows) (→P.445)
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X) (→P.447)
• Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9) (→P.450)
Enhanced Printing Options 443
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
You can print originals centered on a page-for example, if the paper is larger than the original, or if you
are reducing the original.
Centering originals on sheets
If you use paper larger than the original size or print originals after reduction, the printed images may be
aligned in the upper-left corner of the paper. In this case, you can center originals on sheets when printing.
Print Centered
Aligns the center of the original with the center of the sheet.
For instructions on centering originals when printing on sheets, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for
your computer and operating system.
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows) (→P.453)
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X) (→P.455)
• Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9) (→P.457)
444 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Windows)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
Enhanced Printing Options 445
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
446 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.00 mm [11.7 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the print target in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 447
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
10-in. Roll.
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
448 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
12.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
13.
14.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 449
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to center originals before printing on rolls based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the print target in the F Print Target list.
450 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Make sure the B Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in A Page Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 451
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
12.
13.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
14.
15.
Select the F Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
452 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Windows)
This topic describes how to reduce an original 50% for printing centered on a sheet.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any Type
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
Enhanced Printing Options 453
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Select the C Enlarged/Reduced Printing check box.
13.
14.
Select the G Print Centered check box.
Click Match Page Size in the G Media Size list.
Click F Scaling and enter “50.”
Click Cut Sheet in the L Media Source list.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the media source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
454 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4/Letter
Paper: Sheets
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Non-standard
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
6.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
In the application software menu, choose Print.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 455
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
Make sure C Page Size shows the original size as specied in C Paper Size in the Page
Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
11.
12.
Select the J Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the media source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
456 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to center originals for printing on sheets, based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4/Letter
Paper: Sheets ( Manual )
Paper type: Plain Paper
Paper size: Non-standard
1.
Choose Page Setup from the source application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
6.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the source application menu, choose Print.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the printing application in the F Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 457
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
8.
Access the Page Setup pane.
9.
Make sure B Page Size shows the original size as specied in Page Setup in the Page
Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
458 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Centering originals
11.
12.
13.
Click Cut Sheet in the A Media Source list.
Select the F Print Centered check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Important
• If you have selected Cut Sheet as the media source, follow the instructions on the printer control
panel to enter the paper size.
Enhanced Printing Options 459
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)
When originals are printed in portrait orientation, the original is rotated 90 degrees before printing if it ts
within the roll width. This enables you to conserve paper.
Important
• If the page would exceed the roll paper width after rotation, use this function with Scale to t Roll
Paper Width to print rotated pages.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Windows) (→P.469)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS X) (→P.471)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (Mac OS 9) (→P.474)
460 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins
You can conserve roll paper by specifying particular settings as suitable for your original.
No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper)
You can print without feeding the paper for blank portions of originals if there are top and bottom margins in
originals. This enables you to conserve as much paper as the size of the margins.
Important
• Printing without the top and bottom margins is not supported in the following cases.
• Banner printing
• If you have chosen poster as the type of page layout
Note
• Even during borderless printing, you can print without the top and bottom margins.
• Printing without the top and bottom margins may cause inconsistency in the size of printed documents,
depending on the layout of images or text in your originals.
For tips on conserving roll paper, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Windows) (→P.462)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X) (→P.464)
• Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9) (→P.467)
Enhanced Printing Options 461
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
462 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
11.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the I No Spaces at Top or Bottom (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 463
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the print target in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
464 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 465
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the K No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
466 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top
and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper when printing originals that have a top and bottom margin,
based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Enhanced Printing Options 467
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
11.
12.
Select the H No Spaces at Top or Bottom check box.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
468 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Windows)
This topic describes how to conserve paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3×11.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll paper (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to
conserve paper.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
Enhanced Printing Options 469
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
7.
8.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A3/A4 Roll
(297.0mm).
9.
10.
Select the K Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper) check box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
470 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page Size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve
paper.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 471
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in B Roll Paper Width -in this case, ISO
A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
472 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
11.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
12.
13.
Select the L Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 473
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees
(Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to conserve roll paper by rotating originals 90 degrees before printing, based on the
following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Any type
Page size: A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll width: A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in])
This example illustrates how to rotate an A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in) original in portrait
orientation 90 degrees to t within the width of A3/A4 roll (297.0 mm [11.7 in]), which enables you to conserve
paper.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
474 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Conserving roll paper
8.
9.
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A3/A4 (297.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
11.
12.
Select the I Rotate Page 90 degrees check box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 475
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing CAD Drawings
Using this printer, you can print ne lines and text clearly and sharply. It’s easy to produce highly precise
drawings from CAD applications.
For instructions on CAD printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating
system.
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows) (→P.284)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X) (→P.286)
• Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)
476 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 477
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this
case, click ISO A3.
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Windows)”. (→P.507)
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
478 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View set..
Enhanced Printing Options 479
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
9.
10.
11.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
480 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
12.
Make sure C Page Size on the Page Setup pane shows the original size as specied in C
Paper Size in the Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A3.
13.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.558)
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 481
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print line drawings based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A3 (297.0 × 420.0 mm [11.7 × 16.5 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A3.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
482 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
7.
8.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the F Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set.
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 483
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing CAD Drawings
12.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
484 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Other useful settings
Printing With Watermarks
You can add watermarks (background images) to documents that require special handling.
Watermark
Watermarks are applied to all pages of your document.
Important
• Watermarks are not printed if you select poster as the type of page layout.
The following watermarks are provided:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
CONFIDENTIAL (Windows)
COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)
DRAFT (Windows and Mac OS 9)
FILE COPY (Windows and Mac OS 9)
FINAL (Windows)
PRELIMINARY (Windows and Mac OS 9)
PROOF (Windows)
TOP SECRET (Windows and Mac OS 9)
You can also create your own watermarks. Specify the following options to customize your watermark.
• Watermark string: Specify the font, size, color, and so on. Surround the watermark with a frame,
if desired.
• Watermark position: Specify the position on the page, the angle, and so on.
• Watermark printing method: Specify whether to print the watermark superimposed or under the
document image. You can also print the watermark only on the rst page, if desired.
Note
• Watermarks are supported in Windows and Mac OS 9.
• In addition to the provided watermarks, you can create up to 50 original watermarks in Windows. In Mac
OS 9, you can use up to 50 original watermarks including the watermarks provided.
For detailed instructions on printing with watermarks, refer to the following topics:
• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Windows) (→P.502)
• Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on (Mac OS 9) (→P.504)
Enhanced Printing Options 485
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation
You can specify the original orientation to match the orientation of the paper for printing.
Orientation
Paper is usually loaded in the printer in portrait orientation. When you have an original in landscape
orientation, you can specify the printing orientation so that the original is printed in landscape orientation.
Rotate 180 degrees
The original is rotated 180 degrees to print it upside down.
Mirror
A mirror image of the original is printed.
For instructions on specifying the original orientation before printing, refer to the following topics, as
appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Windows) (→P.495)
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS X) (→P.497)
• Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (Mac OS 9) (→P.500)
486 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Using Favorites
You can register print settings as “favorites” to reuse settings from a particular job that met your expectations,
or settings for a particular page size that you will use repeatedly.
Favorites
Registering a favorite for later use. You can choose the settings you have registered from a list before printing,
and you can check the settings details.
Note
• You can also save the favorite settings as les. Using these les is a convenient way to print under the
same conditions on another computer. (In Windows and Mac OS 9.)
For instructions on using favorites to print, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Using Favorites (Windows) (→P.514)
• Using Favorites (Mac OS X) (→P.572)
• Using Favorites (Mac OS 9) (→P.596)
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing
Roll paper can be automatically cut after printing.
Note
• It may not be possible to cut certain types of paper, such as adhesive paper. For details on types of
paper that cannot be used with the auto cut feature, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)
Automatic Cutting
Roll paper is cut automatically after printing. If you prefer, you can print continuously without cutting the
roll, or you can print a cut line.
For instructions on cutting roll paper after printing, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your
computer and operating system.
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows) (→P.490)
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.491)
• Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.493)
Enhanced Printing Options 487
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Printing from Photoshop
You can print images in the Adobe RGB color space that you have created in Photoshop, the Adobe Systems
photo retouching application. Using the dedicated Photoshop printer driver plug-in (provided with the printer)
makes it easy to print Adobe RGB images more attractively.
• Using the Plug-in to Print (→P.488)
• Using the Printer Driver to Print (→P.488)
Using the Plug-in to Print
The imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop is a dedicated plug-in provided with the printer that you can
load in Photoshop and customize for your printing needs. By using the plug-in, you can print while preserving
the 16-bit RGB data from Photoshop without losing the exceptional color gradations of original image. Some
of the settings and customizations available in the plug-in are as follows.
• Automatic detection of the color space (sRGB or Adobe RGB) for automatic selection of the optimal
prole. This feature eliminates the need to complete intricate settings when printing Adobe RGB images.
• Advanced gray adjustment, including adjustment of tone curves, in addition to an array of standard
adjustments for color balance, brightness, contrast, highlight, and shadow.
• Fine-tune color tones in Photoshop while viewing a preview that accurately reproduces printing results.
• With print log management, you can save and load setting parameters from past print jobs.
Note
• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop for Windows and Macintosh are provided with the printer.
For instructions and details on which versions of Photoshop are compatible with the imagePROGRAF Print
Plug-In for Photoshop, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Windows)
• imagePROGRAF Print Plug-In for Photoshop Guide (Macintosh)
Using the Printer Driver to Print
The printer driver offers the following settings and adjustments.
• Choose the standard sRBG color space or Adobe RGB as desired.
• Adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, saturation, and gray levels.
For instructions on using the printer driver to print Adobe RGB images created in Photoshop, refer to the
following topics, as appropriate for your computer and operating system.
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows) (→P.531)
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X) (→P.573)
• Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.598)
488 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
You can print a variety of source documents from word-processing or spreadsheet programs or screen shots
from web browsers after composing an original with them using PosterArtist.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
Edit Using PosterArtist
PosterArtist offers a wide range of features, including features to insert source documents in posters and
compose an original with them.
Important
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For detailed instructions on editing with PosterArtist, refer to the following topic:
• Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows) (→P.529)
Enhanced Printing Options 489
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as
how to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.
Note
• Auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function after it is disabled, or to change the setting for printing a
cut line instead.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
6.
To enable automatic cutting, click Yes in the A Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer to cut the
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Click N Auto Cut to display the Automatic Cutting Settingsdialog box.
paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
7.
8.
Click OK to close the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Roll paper will be automatically cut after printing.
490 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how
to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a
cut guideline instead.
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
7.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Choose the original size in the C Paper Size list.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 491
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
11.
To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer
Click C Set to display the Media Detailed Settingsdialog box.
to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the
printer Control Panel.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
492 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to cut roll paper automatically (using the auto cut function) after printing, as well as how
to print a cut line to cut the paper manually.
Note
• The auto cut function is activated on the printer by factory default and when the printer driver is installed.
Follow the steps below to reactivate the function once disabled, or select the setting for printing a
cut guideline instead.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
7.
Make sure Roll Paper is selected in A Media Source.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Finishing pane.
Enhanced Printing Options 493
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
8.
Access the Main pane.
9.
10.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded.
11.
To enable automatic cutting, click Printer Default in the H Automatic Cutting list. If you prefer
Click D Set to display the Media Detailed Settingsdialog box.
to cut the paper later yourself, click Print Cut Guideline.
Important
• If the automatic cut function has been deactivated on the printer, change the auto cut setting on the
printer Control Panel.
12.
13.
Click OK to close the Media Detailed Settings dialog box.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
494 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
Enhanced Printing Options 495
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
7.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the application. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
10.
In H Orientation, click J Landscape.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
11.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
496 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
Choose Page Setup in the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Select the printer in the B Format for list.
8.
9.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
In the C Paper Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
In D Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click F OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Access the Main pane.
Select the printing application in the E Print Target list.
Enhanced Printing Options 497
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
10.
Access the Page Setup pane.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
498 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
13.
Make sure the C Page Size setting matches the original size as selected in C Paper Size in the
Page Attribute dialog box-in this case, ISO A4.
14.
Conrm the print settings, and then click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Enhanced Printing Options 499
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print an original in landscape orientation after matching the paper orientation, based
on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: An original in landscape orientation
Page size: A4 (210.0 × 297.0 mm)/Letter (8.3 × 11.7 in)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A4.
8.
9.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
In B Orientation, click the icon of the document in landscape orientation.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Select the printing application in the F Print Target list.
500 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
10.
Access the Finishing pane.
11.
12.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
13.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Enhanced Printing Options 501
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on
(Windows)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on
the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
After conrming that D Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the E Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the E Print Target list by clicking F View Settings.
502 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
6.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
7.
In A Page Size, click the size of the original as specied in the application software. In this case,
click ISO A4 or Letter (8.5"x11").
8.
9.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the M Roll Paper Width list-in this case, ISO A2/A3 Roll
(420.0mm).
10.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
11.
12.
Select the D Watermark check box.
Click FILE COPY in the E Watermarks list.
Note
• To create your own, original watermark, click F Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for
instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.
13.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Enhanced Printing Options 503
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY, and so on
(Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print ofce documents with a watermark (in this case, “FILE COPY”) based on
the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: CAD drawing
Page size: A2 (420.0 × 594.0 mm [16.5 × 23.4 in])
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Plain Paper
Roll paper width: A2/A3 roll (420.0 mm [16.5 in])
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original. In this case, click ISO A2.
7.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Plain Paper.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
504 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
8.
After conrming that E Easy Settings is selected, click CAD (Line Drawing) in the F Print
Target list.
Note
• You can check the settings values selected in the F Print Target list by clicking G View set..
9.
10.
11.
Access the Finishing pane.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-in this case,
ISO A2/A3 (420.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer on the Main
pane and update the printer information.
Enhanced Printing Options 505
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other useful settings
12.
13.
Select the C Watermark check box.
Click FILE COPY in the D Watermarks list.
Note
• To create your own, original watermark, click E Edit Watermark. Refer to the printer driver help for
instructions on modifying watermarks to create your own.
14.
Specify additional printing conditions.
For details on available printing conditions, see “Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.584)
15.
Conrm the print settings, and then click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
506 Enhanced Printing Options
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Software
Windows
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)
For instructions on accessing the Windows printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows) (→P.539)
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows) (→P.206)
For information on the Windows printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516)
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose
Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings
to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.208)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Windows) (→P.557)
Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows) (→P.543)
Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows) (→P.549)
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows) (→P.524)
• Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.520)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.
• Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.553)
• Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.522)
You can specify the page layout, watermarks, the orientation, the number of copies, and print processing
options.
• Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows) (→P.556)
• Favorites Sheet (Windows) (→P.525)
Groups of print settings you select on each sheet can be saved in a favorite. Favorites you have added
can be edited or used at the time of printing as desired.
• Utility Sheet (Windows) (→P.526)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
Software 507
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
• Support Sheet (Windows) (→P.527)
You can view support information and the user’s manual.
• Device Settings Sheet (Windows) (→P.528)
You can display settings for optional equipment installed on the printer and see the printer driver version.
imagePROGRAF Free Layout is a feature for freely arranging originals from various source applications on a
single page as desired before printing. For details, see Free Layout Guide .
Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy is a feature for automatic enlargement and printing of scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .
508 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Conrming Print Settings (Windows)
There are two ways to conrm the print settings, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.509)
• Checking a print preview (→P.510)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, and Layout sheets. By
checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings for the page size,
orientation, media source, layout, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Top illustrations
Illustrations indicate the orientation, page layout, borderless printing
selection, color mode, and other settings information.
Middle, bordered area
The page size, paper size, and method and percentage of enlargement
or reduction are displayed.
Bottom illustrations
Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless printing
selection, and other settings information.
Software 509
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View Settings on the Main sheet to
display the View Settings dialog box.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
When you activate this feature, PageComposer is launched before printing. Conrming how documents will
be printed this way helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)”. (→P.511)
510 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
5.
Select the L Open Preview When Print Job Starts check box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
When you attempt to print, the PageComposer window is displayed. (At this point, the document
will not be printed yet.)
6.
In the PageComposer editing window, select the document to print and open the Print Preview
window.
7.
8.
After conrming that the layout is just as you expected, close the Print Preview window.
In the PageComposer editing window, make sure the document to print is selected. Choose
Print from the File menu.
Software 511
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Windows)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver settings for the media source and media type.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) ,
click Get Information by Media Type.
Setting Item
A Media Source
Description
Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as information
about the loaded paper. To update the Media Source and media type
settings in the printer driver, select the desired Media Source option and
click OK .
512 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)
The Settings Summaries dialog box enables you to conrm the settings for the Main, Page Setup, Layout,
and Favorites sheets.
Button
A Copy
Corresponding Utility
Click to copy the settings information to the
clipboard. You can paste the settings information
into a le created with a text editor or similar
application.
Software 513
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Using Favorites (Windows)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
6.
Click H Add to display the Add dialog box.
7.
Click OK to close the Add dialog box.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Complete the print settings.
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Complete the following settings in the Add dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• Choose a tting icon for these print settings in the Icon list.
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added, as desired.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in A Favorites.
Note
• To save a favorite as a le, click J Export and specify the le to save.
514 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Favorites, choose the favorite you registered.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Click the Favorites tab to display the Favorites sheet.
Note
• To import a favorite, click I Import and specify the favorite le.
5.
6.
Click D Apply Favorite to replace the favorite settings with the current print settings.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For instructions on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Software 515
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Main Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Main sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Note
• On the Main sheet, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a
media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
media source, media type, and roll width.
C Preferences
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Target
F View Settings
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)
Depending on the Media Type setting, some Print Target options may
not be available.
Click to display the View Settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target .
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.
Job Starts
Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.551)
516 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to conrm
the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Software 517
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
and sizes by media source, as specied on the printer. When you select a
media source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the
media source, media type, and roll width.
C Preferences
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
G Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
The available Color Mode options vary depending on the Media Type
setting.
H Color Settings
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.254)
I Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
K High-Precision Printing
Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this
will take more time than regular printing.
L Open Preview When Print Activate this option to preview the print image before printing.
Job Starts
Conrming the Print Image Before Printing (→P.551)
518 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
M Status Monitor
Click to start imagePROGRAF Status Monitor , which enables you to
conrm the status of the printer and print jobs.
You can also set up email notication if printer errors occur by completing
the Email Notice settings.
For details, refer to the Status Monitor help.
N About
Click to conrm version information for the printer driver.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Software 519
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Page Setup Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Page Setupsheet. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Page Size
Select the page size as specied in the source application.
For details on available page sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
B Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the L Media
Source list. Choose from the following options when this setting is
activated.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.365)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.367)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.348)
D Fit Media Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Scale to t Roll Paper
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
Width
F Print Image with Actual Prints documents at their actual size. This function is available, when you
Size
have selected the size same as the width of Roll Paper for either length
or width of the document from the A Page Size list.
G Media Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
Paper sizes compatible with borderless printing are shown in the list.
Available when Fit Media
Size is selected.
C Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.313)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.314)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.315)
D Fit Media Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
F Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
G Media Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
520 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
H Orientation
Choose the printing orientation.
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper Orientation (→P.486)
K Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before
printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.460)
(Conserve Paper)
L Media Source
Choose how paper is supplied.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media
Type in the Main sheet.
M Roll Paper Width
Choose the roll width.
For details on available roll widths, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
N Auto Cut
You can activate or deactivate automatic cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. Click to display the Automatic Cutting Settings dialog box.
Under A Automatic Cutting , you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut
Guideline .
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (→P.487)
O Size Options
Click to display the Media Size Options dialog box, which enables you to
register additional paper sizes or select the size system for use.
S Defaults
Restores all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Software 521
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Layout Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Layout sheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Setting Item
A Page Layout
C Set
D Watermark
Description
Activate this setting to select a particular page layout.
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.420)
Printing Posters in Sections (→P.421)
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other (→P.417)
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (→P.489)
Click to display one of the following dialog boxes depending on the selection in
A Page Layout . In these dialog boxes, you can specify layout details and
which pages to print, as well as other settings.
• Page Layout Printing
• Pages to Print
• Free Layout Settings
Activating this option makes two settings available, E Watermarks and F
Edit Watermark .
Printing With Watermarks (→P.485)
E Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
F Edit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own, original
watermark.
G Print Centered
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.443)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.444)
H Rotate 180 degrees
Activate this option to rotate document images by 180 degrees before printing.
I No Spaces at Top or
Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above and
below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom Margins
(→P.461)
Bottom (Conserve Paper)
J Copies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
522 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
M Special Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option to change how
printing is processed.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Software 523
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment sheet.
Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment sheet, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image
qualities.
Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , select Monochrome
(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.
Setting Item
Description
A Sample
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.
DX
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or enter
the values directly.
EY
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image
(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it
appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other,
as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing
the Contrast softens images.
H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.
I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.
K Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
524 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Favorites Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Favoritessheet. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Favorites
Printing favorites you have created are listed with Default Settings
favorites.
Using Favorites (→P.487)
B Settings Details
Displays details of the favorite selected in the A Favorites .
C Comment
Displays notes registered in the favorite.
D Apply Favorite
Click to change the current print settings to those of the favorite
selected in the A Favorites .
E Application Settings Priority
Activate this setting to use settings values specied in the source
application in preference to favorite settings selected in the A
Favorites , when clicking D Apply Favorite . For details on the
settings items used in preference, refer to the printer driver help.
F Delete
Click to delete the selected favorite settings from the A Favorites .
G Edit
Click to display the Edit dialog box, which enables you to change the
name and icon for the favorite settings selected in the Favorites .
H Add
Click to display the Add dialog box, which enables you to add the
current print settings as a favorite.
I Import
Click to display the Open dialog box, which enables you to import
favorite settings saved as a le.
J Export
Click to display the Save As dialog box, which enables you to save the
favorite settings as a le.
Software 525
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Utility Sheet (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Utilitysheet. For details on the utilities, refer to the relevant
utility help.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Maintenance
Click to start the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
, which offers the following maintenance for the
printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) check
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
Click to launch Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy (*1) (iR enlargement copy), which enables
you to create hot folders used for Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy and assign
print settings to hot folders.
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows) (→P.317)
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .
526 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Support Sheet (Windows)
On the Support sheet, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage,
where you can nd the latest information on the
printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This
function requires the user’s manual to be installed
on your computer.
C Settings Summaries
Click to display the View Settings dialog box,
which enables you to conrm the settings for the
Main , Page Setup , Layout , and Favorites
sheets.
Software 527
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)
Many settings items on the printer properties sheets are controlled by Windows applications. However, the
Device Settings sheet is for conguring the printer, and it is an extension of the printer driver.
The following settings are available on the Device Settings sheet.
Setting Item
A About
528 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Description
You can display version information for the printer
driver.
Windows
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals (Windows)
This topic describes how to use PosterArtist to compose originals from multiple applications, creating a poster
layout for printing.
Important
• PosterArtist (sold separately) must be installed to use this function.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
Click the Layout tab to display the Layout sheet.
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then open the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Software 529
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
5.
6.
7.
Select the A Page Layout check box.
Click in the Edit Using PosterArtist in the B Page Layout list.
When you attempt to print, PosterArtist starts up and the PageCapture window is displayed. (At
this point, the document will not be printed yet.)
8.
9.
Choose the page to load in PosterArtist.
Edit and rearrange the image in the PosterArtist window as desired.
Important
• Without closing the PosterArtist window, repeat steps 1-8 to arrange originals from multiple
applications on the same page.
Note
• For instructions on editing and rearranging images, refer to the PosterArtist Manual.
10.
Print from the PosterArtist menu.
530 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page Size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll Paper Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• In Photoshop, select no color-matching.
• In the printer driver settings, select Driver Matching Mode and choose Adobe RGB in Color Space.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• The following procedures are based on the example of Photoshop CS2.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Choose Print with Preview from the File menu to display the Print dialog box.
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print to display the Print dialog box.
Select the printer and click Properties to display the printer driver dialog box.
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Software 531
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
8.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Photo Paper.
9.
10.
11.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
In Matching Mode, click Driver Matching Mode.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Page Setup tab to display the Page Setup sheet.
532 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
19.
In the A Page Size list, click the size of the original as specied in the source application.
In this case, click 10"x12".
20.
21.
Click Roll Paper in the L Media Source list.
Select the width of the loaded roll in the Roll Paper Width list. In this case, click 10-in. Roll
(254.0mm), and then click OK.
22.
Conrm the print settings and print as desired.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Windows)”. (→P.509)
Software 533
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
Two screens are available in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor : “Printer List” shows a list of printers, and
“Status Monitor” shows details for each printer.
• You can view a list of the printers for which printer drivers have been installed on your computer, printers
connected to your computer, and printers found on the network.
• Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
• If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
• Images of Ink Tanks are shown, with different images for various types of ink. An icon and warning
message will notify you when ink levels are low.
• The type of paper loaded in each media source is identied. You can also check to see if paper has
run out.
• This way, the utility enables you to check printer information and take care of printer maintenance
for optimal printing results.
• You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Note
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
534 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility is a utility to establish communication between the printer and
your computer by completing relevant settings. After the printer is installed, for example, you can use
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility to complete the network settings initially.
• Starting imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility will show a list of printers found on the network. In this
list, select the printer (specically, the printer’s MAC address) that you want to set up, and then congure
the basic settings from your computer, such as the printer’s IP address and the network frame type.
• You can see which printers are online in the network by checking the printer list. Communication
between your computer and these printers is possible.
Note
• We recommend that your network or printer administrator complete the setup work using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
• For details, refer to the imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility help.
Software 535
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
536 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.536)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
Software 537
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Digital Photo Front-Access
Digital Photo Front-Access is an application that links photos from Canon digital cameras and other image
les on your computer with various other applications.
• Simply select an image and click the icon of the application you want to start to launch the application.
• You can also print from Digital Photo Front-Access. In short, Digital Photo Front-Access can help you
manage images in many ways from editing to printing as an effective way to work with other applications.
• Digital Photo Front-Access also enables image retouching. For automatic retouching, select an image
for retouching and click Image Adjustment.
• Because this application automates the workow from retouching to display for all of your images, it
can save time and work in retouching.
Note
• For details, refer to the Digital Photo Front-Access help.
538 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)
1.
2.
Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some
cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.
■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Note
• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these
six sheets may be displayed.
Software 539
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.206)
540 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)
1.
2.
Click start > Printers and Faxes (or Printers ).
3.
Click Printing Preferences to display the Printing Preferences dialog box, titled with the
Select the printer, and then display the printer properties dialog box.
name of this printer.
Software 541
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the operating system menu, changes you make to the
settings will apply to all applications you use for printing.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from applications.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Windows)”. (→P.539)
542 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows)
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.
However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.
Color Adjustment : color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click Color Settings
by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Original
The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can
compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
I Gray Tone Adjustment
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.
Software 543
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
J Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
544 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Driver Matching Mode in
the Matching Mode list.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click Color Settings by Color
Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Normally, select Driver Matching Mode . For color matching based on
ICC proles, select ICC Matching Mode , Driver ICM Mode , or Host ICM
Mode , depending on your color matching system. If you don’t want color
matching using the printer driver, select Off .
B Matching Method
Select the color matching method that suits the document to be printed.
Various Matching Method options are available depending on your
selection in Matching .
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Software 545
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode, Driver ICM Mode, and Host
ICM Mode
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select ICC Matching Mode, Driver
ICM Mode, or Host ICM Mode on the Matching Mode sheet.
Note
• To display the Matching sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click Color Settings by Color
Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click the Matching sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Input Prole Settings
You can select Image , Graphics , or Text . You can choose Matching
Method and Input Prole .
Various options are available depending on your selected Matching Mode .
To apply the same input prole automatically for Graphics and Text , select
Use the Same Prole for All Objects . To apply separate input proles
to Graphics and Text , clear Use the Same Prole for All Objects and
specify the individual settings.
C Printer Prole Settings
Specify the printer prole as desired. Normally, select Auto Settings .
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
546 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos)
On the Matching sheet, you can specify color matching to compensate for differences in the appearance of
colors on various devices. The following options are available when you select Ambient Light Matching
Mode (Kyuanos) in the Matching Mode list.
When you select By selecting a chart number in Setting Method
When you select By entering values directly in Setting Method
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
Here, select Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) .
B Matching Method
Select the matching method.
C Setting Method
You can choose conguration based on printed Charts or based on using
the Eye-One spectrophotometer.
D Print Chart
Click to start the Light Source Check Tool , for printing Charts . The
Light Source Check Tool must be installed to use this function.
Software 547
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Setting Item
Description
E Chart Number
In Chart , select the number of the pattern with your desired colors.
F Lighting Source Type
Select the light source measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.
G Color Temperature
Select the value measured using the Eye-One spectrophotometer.
Light Source Check Tool
The Light Source Check Tool enables you to print Chart.
Setting Item
Description
A Printer
The printer name is displayed here.
B Media Type
Select the type of paper, as desired. For information on the types of paper
compatible with Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) , refer to the
Paper Reference Guide . (→P.169)
C Media Source
Choose the media source, as desired.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in Media Type
in the Main sheet.
D Print
Click to print the Chart .
548 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings sheet for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment : monochrome
On the Color Adjustment sheet for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment sheet, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click Color Settings
by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Original
The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can
compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Not available.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Not available.
I Gray Tone Adjustment
Not available.
J Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
S Defaults
Click to restore all settings on the sheet to the default values.
Software 549
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment sheet.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
550 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Conrming the Print Image Before Printing
The preview screen displayed before printing enables you to see the original image just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs helps prevent printing errors.
For instructions on previewing print jobs, refer to the following topics, as appropriate for your computer
and operating system.
• Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows) (→P.511)
• Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.563)
• Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9) (→P.587)
Software 551
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
552 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows)
In the Media Size Options dialog box, you can create and register your own Custom Media Size. The sizes
you dene are listed with standard media sizes for selection later as needed.
Note
• To display the Media Size Options dialog box, on the Page Setup Sheet (Windows) (→P.520) , click
Media Size Options.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Size List
Shows the names and sizes of paper that can be used with the printer
driver.
B Delete
Custom media sizes created by users can be deleted from the Media Size
List , as needed.
However, they cannot be deleted in the following situations.
• If a standard media size of the printer driver is selected.
• If an oversized media size is selected.
• If a media size in a red box is selected.
C Custom Media Size Name
You can name Custom Media Size as desired.
D Units
Specify the desired unit of measure for the Custom Media Size height
and width.
E Media Size
Specify the desired Width and Height . You can make your selection
from sizes that are compatible with Borderless Printing by selecting
Borderless Printing Size . To maintain the aspect ratio of the Width
and Height as you resize the paper, select Fix the Ratio of the Width
to Height .
F Add
Enables you to register the custom media size you have specied or
overwrite an existing custom media size.
G Display Series
You can limit the number of options shown in Page Size , Media Size ,
and Media Size List .
Software 553
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a Color
imageRUNNER (Windows)
Scanned originals from a Color imageRUNNER can be enlarged and printed automatically.
Originals you create by scanning with a Color imageRUNNER are transferred to a "hot folder" and printed
automatically after enlargement according to printing conditions you specify for that folder.
This processing sequence is called the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy function.
To use Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, rst complete these settings in the following order.
1. Register a hot folder on your computer
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER
and complete the settings for enlargement copy.
2. Complete the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder.
After these settings are complete, you can print enlarged copies of scanned originals from the Color
imageRUNNER.
Registering a hot folder on your computer
Folders used for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy) are called hot folders.
Register a hot folder on your computer for storing scanned originals from the Color imageRUNNER. You can
specify printing conditions (such as the image quality and paper size), based on which originals transferred to
the hot folder will be printed. Follow these steps to register and modify hot folders.
1.
2.
Display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.206)
3.
Click B Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy to start the Color imageRUNNER
Click the Utility tab to display the Utility sheet.
Enlargement Copy utility.
4.
Use the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility to register or modify hot folders.
For instructions on registering and modifying hot folders, refer to the help le for the Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility.
554 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Completing the scanning settings on the Color imageRUNNER.
Congure the Color imageRUNNER to send scanned originals to the hot folder. It is easy to send scanned
originals to the hot folder if you assign the scanning settings and destination to a Favorites button on the
Color imageRUNNER.
For instructions on assigning scanning settings and destinations to a Favorites button, refer to the setting
manual, displayed by clicking Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Setup Manual button of Color
imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy utility, or refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
Scanning the original and print an enlargement
Follow the steps below to scan an original on the Color imageRUNNER for enlarged printing on the printer.
For detailed instructions, refer to the Color imageRUNNER manual.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Load the original on the platen glass or document feeder of the Color imageRUNNER.
Press Send to display the screen for transmission.
Press Favorites, and then press the Favorites button assigned to the hot folder.
Press Start on the control panel. If you scan originals on the platen glass, after scanning all
originals, press Done on the touch-panel display.
Scanned originals are sent to the hot folder and automatically enlarged and printed following the
conditions you specied for the folder.
Note
• For details on Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy, refer to Color imageRUNNER Enlargement
Copy Guide .
Software 555
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special
Settings dialog box.
Note
• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Layout Sheet (Windows) (→P.522) , click Special
Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A FineZoom Settings
This function is used in large-format printing. Normally, choose Auto . If
documents are not printed correctly on large-format media, it may help to
select Yes , and if ne lines are not visible or if images are distorted when
printed, it may help to select No .
B Fast Graphic Process
If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed
in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected
results.
C Application Color
You can give applications priority in color management.
Matching Priority
556 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Windows
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Sheet (Windows) (→P.516) , click View Settings
by Print Target.
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each listed item for the
selected Print Target .
Software 557
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Mac OS X
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X)
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS X printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS X) (→P.578)
For information on the Mac OS X printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565)
You can specify the media type, color processing, print quality, print preview, and other settings. Choose
Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or Advanced Settings
to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X) (→P.209)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS X) (→P.583)
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X) (→P.579)
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X) (→P.581)
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.570)
• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.567)
You can specify the page size of the original, borderless printing, enlargement or reduction, the
orientation, the media size and source, and automatic cutting.
• Utility Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.569)
You can specify settings related to maintenance for the Printhead and feed amount, as well as settings
for Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy.
• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.571)
You can specify settings for how print jobs are sent to the printer.
• Support Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.572)
You can view support information and the user’s manual.
With the imagePROGRAF Free Layout feature, you can arrange originals from various source applications
on a single page before printing. For details, see the Free Layout Guide .
With the imagePROGRAF Preview feature, you can check the layout before printing and adjust layout or size
settings while viewing a preview screen. For details, see the imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
With the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy feature, you can automatically enlarge and print scanned
originals from a Color imageRUNNER. For details, see the Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .
558 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)
There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.559)
• Checking a print preview (→P.560)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Utility, and Additional
Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm current settings
for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Pane displayed when the Images tab is
clicked
On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the
paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection,
color mode, and other settings information.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and
percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the Size tab is
clicked
Paper size details are indicated numerically.
Pane with printer and paper illustrations
Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless
printing selection, and other settings information.
Software 559
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click F View set. on the Main pane to display
the View settings dialog box.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)”. (→P.563)
560 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Checking the Layout Before Printing
You can check the print layout on the preview screen. While viewing this screen, you can also adjust layout or
size settings, and your changes will be instantly applied on the preview screen.
Preview (Macintosh)
Important
• The driver must be installed from the User Software CD-ROM to use this function.
For instructions on how to check the layout before printing, refer to the following topics:
• Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X) (→P.562)
Software 561
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to check the layout before printing using the Preview function.
1.
2.
Choose Print in the application menu.
3.
The Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window is displayed.
4.
5.
Check the layout and adjust settings in the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview window as desired.
Click PDF and select Canon imagePROGRAF Preview.
Print from the Canon imagePROGRAF Preview menu.
Note
• For details on imagePROGRAF Preview functions, refer to imagePROGRAF Preview Guide .
562 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
In the application menu, choose Print.
Click Preview to open the preview window.
Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print to start printing.
Note
• “Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS
documentation.
Software 563
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
On the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, you can obtain information on the paper in the printer and
congure printer driver media type setting.
Note
• To display the Paper Information on Printer dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) ,
click Get Information by Media Type.
Setting Item
A Media Source
Description
Shows the Media Source supported by the printer, as well as the type of
paper loaded. To update the media type setting in the printer driver, select
the desired Media Source option and click OK .
564 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Main Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Note
• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the print target, or
switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media
source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media
source and media type.
C Set
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Target
F View set.
L Printer Information
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.247)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Windows, Mac OS X) (→P.251)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)
Click to display the View settings dialog box, which enables you to conrm
the settings for the selected item from the E Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in E Print Target .
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
Software 565
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Setting Item
A Media Type
Description
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Get Information
Click to display the Get Information dialog box, which shows media types
specied on the printer for each media source. When you select a media
source, your selection is applied to the printer driver settings for the media
source and media type.
C Set
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
E Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
F Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
H Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
I Set
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.254)
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
K High-Precision Printing
Select this option for printing at the highest level of quality. However, this
will take more time than regular printing.
L Printer Information
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which indicates the ink levels and
gives other information about the printer.
566 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Source
Choose how paper is supplied.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in A Media
Type in the Main pane.
B Roll Paper Width
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is
displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.
C Page Size
Displays the size of the original, as specied in the page settings of the
application.
For details on page sizes available in the application.see “Paper Sizes”.
(→P.175)
D Enlarged/Reduced Printing Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.313)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.314)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.315)
E Fit Media Size
Resizes the document image to match the paper size.
F Fit Roll Paper Width
Resizes the document image to match the roll width.
G Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
H Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected in the A Media
Source list.
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width
of the paper.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.365)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.367)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.348)
I Media Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
Click Display all selections for Media Size to list available sizes.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
Software 567
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Setting Item
J Print Centered
Description
Activate this setting to print document images in the center of the paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.443)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.444)
K No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above
and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve
the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom
Margins (→P.461)
L Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the original 90 degrees before printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.460)
568 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Utilitypane.
Setting Item
Description
A Set
Click to display the Printer dialog box, which offers the following
maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
B View
Click to start imagePROGRAF Printmonitor , which enables you to view
the status of print jobs.
C Set
Click to complete the settings for Auto Arrange or Color imageRUNNER
Enlargement Copy (iR enlargement copy).
*1: For details, see Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy Guide .
Software 569
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.
Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image
qualities.
Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , select Monochrome
(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.
Setting Item
Description
A Sample
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.
DX
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or enter
the values directly.
EY
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image
(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it
appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other,
as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing
the Contrast softens images.
H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.
I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.
570 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane.
Setting Item
Description
A Data Send Method
Choose how print data is sent to the printer.
• B Send Print Data Immediately to Printer
• C Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer
D Send job to
Click to display the Send job to dialog box, which enables you to specify
how print jobs are stored on the printer’s hard disk.
• E Print
• F Print (auto delete)
• G Save in mail box
H Save data before printing
Jobs are printed after they are saved on the hard disk.
Software 571
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Support Pane (Mac OS X)
On the Support pane, you can view support information and the user’s manual.
Button
Corresponding Utility
A Support Information
Click to access the Canon support webpage,
where you can nd the latest information on the
printer and consumables, check for printer driver
updates, and browse other information.
B User Manual
Click to view the printer user’s manual. This
function requires the user’s manual to be installed
on your computer.
C Settings
The settings can be saved as a le. Click to
display the Export dialog box, which enables you
to specify where to save the le.
D About
You can display version information for the printer
driver.
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)
You can use the Presets function in Mac OS X for favorite-based printing.
Note
• In the printing dialog box, click Save As in the Presets list to save the current print settings. This is a
standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS documentation.
572 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll Width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.
• In the printer driver, specify Driver Correction and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose Print with Preview from the Photoshop menu to display the Print dialog box.
7.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the setting mode is Color Management.
In the Color Handling list in Options, click No Color Management.
Click Print.
Access the Main pane.
Photo Paper.
Software 573
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
8.
9.
10.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
Click Image in the E Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the F Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the F Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click Matching to display the Matching pane.
In Mode, click Driver Correction.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Access the Page Setup pane.
574 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
18.
19.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,
10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the loaded roll is not displayed in B Roll Paper Width, click L Printer Information on
the Main pane and update the printer information.
20.
Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in C Page Size -in this case,
10"x12".
21.
Conrm the print settings, and click M Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS X)”. (→P.559)
Software 575
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•
•
•
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
576 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Note
• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer
again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.
4. Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the
Search button.
Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
5. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
Software 577
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X)
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
578 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.
However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.
Color Adjustment pane: color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click Color Settings
by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Original
The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can
compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
I Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.
Software 579
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance
of colors on various devices.
Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click Color Settings by Color
Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Matching Method
Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various
Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in
Matching .
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
580 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment pane: monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click Color Settings
in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Original
The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can
compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Not available.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Not available.
I Gray Tone
Not available.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Software 581
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS X)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. You can adjust this setting
if paper is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, specify Yes , No, or Print Cut Guideline .
I Calibration Value
You can specify whether to apply the results of calibration performed on the
printer to image processing.
J Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
582 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS X
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS X) (→P.565) , click View Settings
by Print Target.
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in
the Print Target list.
Software 583
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Mac OS 9
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)
For instructions on accessing the Mac OS 9 printer driver, refer to the following topics.
• Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from Applications (Mac OS 9) (→P.603)
For information on the Mac OS 9 printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588)
You can specify the number of copies, page range, media type, color processing, print quality, and print
preview. Choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing application or
Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
•
•
•
•
•
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.210)
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application (Mac OS 9) (→P.612)
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9) (→P.605)
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9) (→P.608)
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.593)
• Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.590)
You can specify the amount of enlargement or reduction, borderless printing, media size, and page
layout.
• Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.592)
You can specify the media source, watermarks, and orientation.
• Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.594)
You can perform maintenance for the Printhead or feed amount.
• Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.595)
You can specify settings for background printing, how print jobs are sent to the printer, and notication
after printing.
• Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9) (→P.611)
584 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)
There are two ways to conrm what printing conditions have been specied, as follows.
• Checking a preview of the settings (→P.585)
• Checking a print preview (→P.586)
Checking a preview of the settings
A preview of the settings is displayed on the left side of the Main, Page Setup, Finishing, Utility, and
Additional Settings panes. By checking images and numerical values in the preview, you can conrm
current settings for the page size, orientation, media source, and so on.
Display Area
Information Displayed
Pane displayed when the H Images tab
is clicked
On top, illustrations indicate the page size of the original, the
paper size, orientation, layout, borderless printing selection,
color mode, and other settings information.
Under this, the page size, paper size, and method and
percentage of enlargement or reduction is displayed.
Pane displayed when the I Size tab is
clicked
Paper size details are indicated numerically.
Pane with printer and paper illustrations
Illustrations indicate the media source, orientation, borderless
printing selection, and other settings information.
Software 585
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Note
• To conrm the Print Target specied in Easy Settings, click G View set. on the Main pane to display
the View set. dialog box.
Checking a print preview
You can check an image of the original just as it will be printed.
Conrming the image of print jobs beforehand helps prevent printing errors.
For details on print previews, see “Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.587)
586 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to preview images of print jobs before actually printing them.
1.
2.
3.
In the application menu, choose Print.
Click Preview to open the preview window.
Check the layout and other aspects of the printing image, and then click Print this page
to start printing.
Note
• “Preview” is provided as a standard feature of the operating system. For details, refer to the Mac OS
documentation.
Software 587
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Main Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Main pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Note
• On the Main pane, choose Easy Settings to specify basic print settings based on the printing
application, or switch to Advanced Settings to complete more detailed settings as desired.
Conguration using Easy Settings
Setting Item
Description
A Copies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
B Page
Specify the pages to print.
• All Pages
• From and To
C Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
D Set
F Print Target
G View set.
L Printer
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
Choose presets that match the type of document to be printed.
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9) (→P.249)
Printing Line Drawings and Text (Mac OS 9) (→P.252)
Printing Ofce Documents (→P.253)
Click to display the View set. dialog box, which enables you to conrm the
settings for the selected item from the F Print Target list or change the
order of items listed in F Print Target .
Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink
levels and gives other information about the printer.
588 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Conguration using Advanced Settings
Setting Item
Description
A Copies
Enter the number of copies to print, in a range of “1-999.”
B Page
Specify the pages to print.
• All Pages
• From and To
C Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
D Set
Click to display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box for ink drying time
and other detailed settings based on the paper type.
F Print Priority
Choose the graphic elements that you want to emphasize for printing.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
G Print Quality
Choose the level of print quality.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
H Color Mode
Choose the color mode.
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and Colors for Printing
(→P.243)
I Set
Click to display the Color Settings dialog box for more advanced color
settings.
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.254)
J Unidirectional Printing
Although unidirectional printing is slower, it can help prevent misaligned
lines and ensure better results.
Depending on the printing conditions, unidirectional printing may be the
default setting even if you do not choose it. In this case, the printing speed
will not change if you activate the setting.
K Thicken Fine Lines
Activate this option to print ne lines more distinctly.
L Printer
Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which indicates the ink
levels and gives other information about the printer.
Software 589
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Page Setup pane. For details on settings items, refer to the
printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Roll Paper Width
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer.
B Page Size
Displays the page size, as specied in the source application.
For details on paper sizes available from the source application, see
“Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
C Enlarged/Reduced Printing
Choose from the following options when this setting is activated.
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size (→P.313)
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.314)
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value (→P.315)
D Fit Media Size
Scales the document image to match the paper size.
E Fit Roll Paper Width
Scales the document image to match the roll width.
F Scaling
Resizes the document image based on a specied scaling value. Enter a
value in a range of “5-600.”
G Borderless Printing
Borderless printing is available if Roll Paper is selected from the A
Media Source list in the Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9). (→P.592)
Activate this setting for borderless printing to match the size and width
of the paper.
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size (→P.365)
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.367)
Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.348)
H Media Size
Choose the size of the paper you will print on.
For details on available paper sizes, see “Paper Sizes”. (→P.175)
I Page Layout
Activate this option to select the page layout when printing multiple pages
per sheet.(*1)
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (→P.420)
Printing Posters in Sections (→P.421)
590 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Setting Item
Description
J Layout Direction
This setting is available when I Page Layout is selected. Here, you can
specify the orientation of multiple pages to be printed on a single sheet.
K Page Border
This setting is available when I Page Layout is selected. Here, you can
specify the type of boundary line around each page of multiple pages
printed on a single sheet.
*1: Selecting poster layout from the I Page Layout list displays a check box for specifying the pages to
print.
Software 591
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Finishing pane. For details on settings items, refer to the printer
driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Source
You can choose the media source.
Options displayed in the list vary depending on the selection in C Media
Type in the Main Pane (Mac OS 9). (→P.588)
B Roll Paper Width
Displays the paper width of the roll loaded in the printer. Unknown is
displayed if the printer cannot detect the roll paper width.
C Watermark
Activating this option makes two settings available, D Watermarks and
E Edit Watermark .
Printing With Watermarks (→P.485)
D Watermarks
Lists the provided watermarks. Choose the watermark to print.
E Edit Watermark
Click to display the Edit Watermark dialog box for creating your own,
original watermark.
F Print Centered
Choose this option to print the document images in the center of the
paper.
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls (→P.443)
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets (→P.444)
G Rotate 180 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 180 degrees before
printing.
H No Spaces at Top or Bottom Activate this setting to print the next image skipping blank areas above
and below printable data in documents, which enables you to conserve
the paper.
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without Top and Bottom
Margins (→P.461)
I Rotate Page 90 degrees
Activate this setting to rotate the document image by 90 degrees before
printing.
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90 Degrees (→P.460)
592 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Gray Adjustment pane.
Gray Adjustment
On the Gray Adjustment pane, you can adjust the color balance, brightness, contrast, and other image
qualities.
Note
• To display the Gray Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , select Monochrome
(Photo) by Color Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Color Settings.
• Monochrome (Photo) is not available for all types of paper.
Setting Item
Description
A Sample
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the sheet, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Sample List
Select a sample image, as desired.
C Color Balance
Click the list to select a color balance that suits the printing application.
DX
Adjust the color balance as you check the color tone in the adjustment area.
You can adjust the square area in the center by clicking or dragging it.
Drag the vertical or horizontal scroll bars for adjustment, as desired.
You can click the arrows by the X (horizontal) and Y (vertical) boxes or enter
the values directly.
EY
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original image
(that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic as it
appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each other,
as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and reducing
the Contrast softens images.
H Highlight
Adjust the brightness of the lightest portion.
I Shadow
Adjust the brightness of the darkest portion.
Software 593
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Device Settings pane.
Setting Item
A Utility
Description
Click to display the Printer Information dialog box, which offers the
following maintenance for the printer.
• Nozzle (ink ejecting outlet) cleaning
• Head alignment adjustment
• Feed amount adjustment
594 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Additional Settings pane. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Setting Item
Description
A Background Printing
Choose the printing method.
Activate this setting by clicking B On to print in the background.
Deactivate this setting by clicking C Off to print in the
foreground.
D Data Send Method
Choose how print data is sent to the printer.
• E Send Print Data Immediately to Printer
• F Send All Print Data as Batch to Printer
G Printing Finished Alert Method
Choose how to be notied when printing is nished.
Specify how to be notied when printing is nished, by a tone
or a message.
H Make a Sound
Activate this setting to be notied by a tone when printing is
nished. You can also choose a different tone.
J Display a Message
Activate this setting to be notied by a dailog box when printing
is nished.
K Send job to
You can choose the output method of print jobs.
• L Print
• M Print (auto delete)
• O Save in mail box
Q Special Settings
If the printing results are not as you expected, click this option
to change how printing is processed.
Software 595
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Using Favorites (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to register favorites and print using favorite settings.
Registering a favorite
Follow the steps below to save the current print settings as a favorite.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the printer in Chooser.
6.
Click OK to close the Add Favorite dialog box.
Choose Print in the application menu.
Complete the print settings.
In the Favorites list, click Add Favorite to display the Add Favorite dialog box.
Complete the following settings in the Add Favorite dialog box.
• Enter a desired name in Name, such as “Photos for Presentations” or “Monthly Report.”
• In Comment, enter a description of the favorite to be added.
The favorite you have added is now displayed in Favorites.
Note
• To edit the name of an existing favorite or comment, click Edit Favorite in the Favorites list to
display the Edit Favorite dialog box.
• To save a favorite as a le, click Export and specify the le to save.
Printing using the favorite
Follow the steps below to print using the favorite you have registered.
1.
2.
Select the printer in Chooser.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Choose the original size in the A Page Size list.
Choose Page Setup from the application menu to display the Page Attribute dialog box.
Click I OK to close the dialog box.
In the application menu, choose Print.
In the Favorites list, choose the favorite you registered.
Note
• To import a favorite, click Import and specify the favorite le.
• If you select a favorite and edit it, an icon is displayed at left of the name to indicate that the settings
have been changed. For details, refer to the printer driver help.
596 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
7.
Conrm the print settings, and then click Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
Software 597
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9)
This topic describes how to print Adobe RGB images based on the following example.
•
•
•
•
•
Document: Adobe RGB image created in Photoshop
Page size: 10×12 inches (254.0×304.8 mm)
Paper: Roll
Paper type: Glossy Photo Paper
Roll width: 10 inches (254.0 mm)
Important
• Do not set up color-matching in Photoshop.
• In the printer driver, specify Driver Matching Mode and set Color Space to Adobe RGB.
1.
In Photoshop, create an image in the Adobe RGB color space.
Note
• Photoshop CS2 is used in this example.
• For instructions on creating Adobe RGB images, refer to the Photoshop documentation.
2.
3.
In the Photoshop menu, choose Print.
4.
In the C Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded. In this case, click Glossy
Make sure the Main pane is displayed.
Photo Paper.
598 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
5.
Click E Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
7.
Click Image in the F Print Priority list.
Select the print quality in the G Print Quality list.
Note
• Options displayed in the G Print Quality list vary depending on the paper type.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Click Color in the H Color Mode list.
Click I Set to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click Matching to display the Matching pane.
In Mode, click Driver Correction.
In Color Space, click Adobe RGB.
Click OK to close the Color Settings dialog box.
Access the Page Setup pane.
Software 599
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
15.
Make sure the page size as specied in Photoshop is shown in B Page Size -in this case,
10"x12".
16.
Access the Finishing pane.
17.
18.
Click Roll Paper in the A Media Source list.
Make sure the width of the loaded roll paper is displayed in the B Roll Paper Width list-here,
10-in. Roll (254.0mm).
Note
• If the width of the roll loaded in the printer is not shown in the B Roll Paper Width list, click the L
Printer in the Main pane to update the printer information.
19.
Conrm the print settings, and click N Print to start printing.
Note
• For tips on conrming print settings, see “Conrming Print Settings (Mac OS 9)”. (→P.585)
600 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh)
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor is a utility for checking the printer status and managing print jobs.
•
•
•
•
Printer status can be checked in real time on a computer monitor.
You can check the status of print jobs, cancel jobs, and manage them as needed.
If a printer error occurs, you can investigate the corrective action immediately.
You can also set up automatic email notication of any printer problems or errors to email addresses you
designate in advance.
Software 601
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Note
• If the status of the desired printer is not shown in imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, select the printer
again as follows.
1. Make sure the printer is on and connected to the network or to a local port.
2. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
3. If information about the printer is not shown in step 2, choose Search Printer in the Printer menu.
4. Select the zone to search (or select *(My Zone) if no zones have been set up) and click the
Search button.
Printer names listed in the Printer menu are updated with the printers that are now detected.
5. In the Printer menu, select the name of the desired printer.
After the printer is detected, the printer status is shown.
602 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS 9)
1.
In the application software, select Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing
conditions.
Note
• This dialog box includes basic printing options and enables you to choose the printer, specify the
range of pages, number of copies, and so on.
2.
Select the printer in the Printer list.
Software 603
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
3.
Click Print to start printing.
As shown in the following illustration, you can switch to other panes in this dialog box to complete
settings for various methods of printing, including enlarged and reduced printing, borderless
printing, and so on.
604 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9)
In general, make any needed adjustments to the color of documents in the application used to create them.
However, if the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can also adjust the color in the printer driver.
Color Adjustment pane: color
If the color tone as printed is not as you expected, you can adjust it on the Color Adjustment pane.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click Color Settings
by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image at left is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the pane, enabling you to check the results of adjustment.
B Original
The image at right shows the original state before adjustment. You can
compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Correct color tones by adjusting the levels of each color.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the computer screen).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Adjust the color intensity as desired. Increasing the Saturation setting
makes colors more vivid, and reducing the Saturation makes colors more
subdued.
Software 605
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Setting Item
Description
I Gray Tone
Adjust the color tone of grays as desired. Choose Cool Black (tinged with
blue), Warm Black (tinged with red), and so on.
J Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, click Object Adjustment on the Color Adjustment pane.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
606 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Matching pane
On the Matching pane, you can specify color matching, to compensate for differences in the appearance
of colors on various devices.
Note
• To display the Matching pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click Color Settings by Color
Mode in Advanced Settings, and then click Matching.
Setting Item
Description
A Matching Mode
Select the color matching mode to use, as desired.
B Matching Method
Select the matching method that suits the document to be printed. Various
Matching Method options are available depending on your selection in
Matching .
C Color Space
Select the applicable color space as desired.
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Software 607
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9)
The following settings are available on the Color Settings pane for monochrome printing.
Color Adjustment pane: monochrome
On the Color Adjustment pane for monochrome printing, you can adjust the brightness and contrast.
Note
• To display the Color Adjustment pane, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click Color Settings
by Color Mode in Advanced Settings.
Setting Item
Description
A Preview
The image above is updated to reect any changes you make to setting
items on the right of this pane, enabling you to check the results of
adjustment.
B Original
The image on the bottom shows the original state before adjustment. You
can compare it to the Preview image.
C Cyan
Not available.
D Magenta
E Yellow
F Brightness
Adjust the overall image brightness as desired. You can adjust the
brightness if the printed document is lighter or darker than the original
image (that is, the original photo that was scanned or the original graphic
as it appears on the monitor).
G Contrast
Adjust the contrast of the darkest and lightest portions relative to each
other, as desired. Increasing the Contrast makes images sharper, and
reducing the Contrast softens images.
H Saturation
Not available.
I Gray Tone
Not available.
J Object Adjustment
Select this option to display the Object Adjustment dialog box, in which
you can specify objects subject to color adjustment.
608 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Note
• For details on settings items, see “Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver”. (→P.254)
Object Adjustment dialog box
In the Object Adjustment dialog box, you can specify what type of print jobs to apply color adjustment to. If
an original comprises images, graphics, and text, you can specify which portion to apply color adjustment to.
Note
• To display the Object Adjustment dialog box, on the Color Adjustment pane, click Object Adjustment.
Setting Item
Description
A Image
Select this option to apply color adjustment to image areas, such as photos.
B Graphics
Select this option to apply color adjustment to graphics, such as lines and
circles.
C Text
Select this option to apply color adjustment to text.
Software 609
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)
The Media Detailed Settings dialog box offers the following settings. For details on settings items, refer to
the printer driver help.
Note
• To display the Media Detailed Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click
Settings by Media Type.
Setting Item
Description
A Media Type
Select the paper type.
For information on the types of paper the printer supports, refer to the Paper
Reference Guide . (→P.169)
B Drying Time
Specify the time that the printer waits for ink to dry, as needed. The Drying
Time setting is only valid for rolls.
(→P.198)
C Between Pages
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a page until ejecting the
paper, as needed.
D Between Scans
Specify the time the printer waits after printing a line on the page until
printing the next line, as needed.
E Roll Paper Margin for
Safety
F Near End Margin
You can specify the length of a margin on the leading edge of paper to
ensure that paper susceptible to curling is held rmly against the Platen .
Specify the length of the Near End Margin (the leading edge margin) of the
roll, as needed.
G Cut Speed
Select the speed of automatic cutting, as needed. Adjust this setting if paper
is not cut well when automatic cutting is used.
H Automatic Cutting
You can activate or deactivate Automatic Cutting and printing of cut lines,
as desired. In this list, you can specify Yes or No and Print Cut Guideline .
I Mirror
Specify whether to print a mirror image, as needed. Select this option to print
a version of the document or image with the left and right sides inverted.
610 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)
If the printing results are not as you expected, you can change how printing is processed in the Special
Settings dialog box.
Note
• To display the Special Settings dialog box, on the Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.595) ,
click Special Settings.
Setting Item
A Fast Graphic Process
Description
If image colors are inconsistent in printed documents or if lines are printed
in varying thicknesses, clearing this option may help produce the expected
results.
Software 611
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Mac OS 9
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS 9)
In the View Settings dialog box, you can check details of the selected printing application.
Note
• To display the View Settings dialog box, on the Main Pane (Mac OS 9) (→P.588) , click View Settings
by Print Target.
Setting Item
Description
A Print Target
Shows all Print Target options (settings items for the printing application).
B Name
Identies the item selected in Print Target by its name and an icon.
C Details
Here, you can conrm detailed settings values for each item selected in
the Print Target list.
612 Software
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Setting
Network Environment
System requirements
The system requirements, which vary depending on your network, are as follows.
• Printing over a TCP/IP network
• Compatible operating systems
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Home Edition or Professional)
• Windows Server 2003 (Standard Edition)
• Windows Vista (Home Basic/Business/Ultimate)
• Mac OS 9.1 or later
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
• Printing over an AppleTalk network
• Compatible operating systems
• Mac OS 9.1 or later
• Mac OS X 10.2.8 or later
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
• The printer cannot be used over a LocalTalk network.
• Compatible with EtherTalk Phase 2.
• Printing over a NetWare network
• Compatible servers
• Novell NetWare 4.2/5.1/6.0
• Compatible clients
• Windows 2000 (Professional or Server)
• Windows XP (Professional)
• Compatible computer
• A computer that runs one of the above operating systems
Note
• In NetWare 6.0, iPrint is not supported.
Network Setting 613
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Network environment
After conrming what type of network environment you will connect the printer to, set up the printer and
computers as needed.
• Example of a Windows network
In Windows networks, print over TCP/IP.
Note
• NetBIOS is not supported.
• Example of a Macintosh network
In Macintosh networks, print over AppleTalk (EtherTalk) or TCP/IP, using Bonjour(Zeroconf) functions.
• Example of a NetWare network
Note
• Even if there is a NetWare server in your network environment, you can use both TCP/IP and AppleTalk.
In this case, complete the settings for each protocol you will use.
614 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address on the Printer
You must congure the printer’s IP address before using the printer on a TCP/IP network.
The printer’s IP address is congured automatically when you install the printer driver following the instructions
in the Quick Start Guide.
Follow the steps below to congure the IP address by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, the
printer Control Panel, or ARP or PING commands, if the IP address is changed, or if you change the printer
connection mode to a network connection. For details on conguring the IP address, refer to the following
topics.
• Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows) (→P.537)
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.619)
• Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING Commands (→P.620)
Note
• We recommend conguring the printer’s IP address even if you will use the printer in other network
except for TCP/IP. Conguring the printer’s IP address enables you to use RemoteUI to congure the
network settings and manage the printer with a web browser.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
Network Setting 615
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Initializing the Network Settings
Use RemoteUI to restore the network settings to the default values as follows.
Important
• Initializing the network settings will also restore the default value of the printer’s IP address. As a result,
the RemoteUI page cannot be displayed in the web browser after this procedure.
• For instructions on reconguring the IP address, see “Conguring the IP Address on the Printer”.
(→P.615)
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Reset to Default settings in the lower-right corner of the Network Interface group.
After conrming the message, click OK to restore the network settings to the default values.
Note
• You can also use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the Control Panel to restore the default
network settings.
• If you use the Control Panel to initialize the network settings, press the Menu button to display MAIN
MENU, and then press ▲, ▼, and ► to select Interface Setup → Ethernet Driver → Init. Settings →
Yes (in this order), and nally press the OK button.
616 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the TCP/IP network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the TCP/IP group to display the Edit TCP/IP Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the TCP/IP Settings Items table to complete the settings.
TCP/IP Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Use DHCP
Activate this setting to use DHCP Off
for conguring the IP address.
Use BOOTP
Activate this setting to use
BOOTP for conguring the IP
address.
Use RARP
Activate this setting to use RARP Off
for conguring the IP address.
RAW Mode Bi-direction
Activate this setting to use
Raw mode bidirectional
communication.
Off
Enable DNS Dynamic Update
Activate this setting to perform
DNS server registration
automatically.
Off
Use Zeroconf Function
Activate this setting to use
Bonjour.
On
IP Address
Specify the printer’s IP address.
0.0.0.0
Subnet Mask
Specify the printer’s subnet mask. 0.0.0.0
Gateway Address
Specify the printer’s default
gateway.
0.0.0.0
LPD Printing
Activate this setting to use LDP
Printing.
On
IPP Printing
Activate this setting to use IPP
Printing.
On
IPP Printer URI
Specify the URI of the printer used printer
for IPP printing using up to 252
characters (1-252 characters).
When using a standard Windows
port for IPP printing, enter an
URL less than 255 bytes for
all characters for “http://<IP
address/IPP-URI.”
Off
Network Setting 617
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Item
7.
Default Setting
Details
RAW Printing
Activate this setting to use Raw
Printing.
On
SMTP Server Address
Specify the SMTP server’s IP
address.
0.0.0.0
Primary DNS Server Address
Specify the IP address of the
primary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
Secondary DNS Server Address Specify the IP address of the
secondary DNS server.
0.0.0.0
DNS Host Name
Specify the printer host name,
up to 63 characters (1-63
characters). Use single-byte
letters, numbers, and “-”
(hyphens). Do not use numbers
or “-” for the rst character or “-”
for the last character.
NB-17FBxxxxxxxxxxxx
DNS Domain Name
Specify the printer domain
(Blank)
name, up to 63 characters. Use
single-byte letters, numbers, “-”
(hyphens), and “.” (periods). Do
not use numbers, “-”, or “.” for the
rst character, or “-” or “.” for the
last character.
Multicast DNS Service Name
Specify the printer’s Multicast
Canon iPFxxxx (xxxxxx)
DNS service name, up to 63
characters. (1-63 characters)
This name will be displayed when
Bonjour functions are used.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Note
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, there must be a server that
supports such protocol running in the network.
• If you specify to congure the IP address using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, the IP address obtained by this
method is used rst. If you cannot obtain the IP address, the address specied in IP Address is used.
• It takes a minute or two to determine whether DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP are available. We recommend
clearing check boxes of options you will not use.
• If you are using a DNS server, select Enable DNS Dynamic Update and enter the IP Address for DNS
servers, DNS host name, and DNS domain name in Primary DNS Server Address, Secondary DNS
Server Address, DNS Host Name, and DNS Domain Name, respectively.
618 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel
This topic describes how to congure the printer’s IP address on the Control Panel.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the number, and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select TCP/IP, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select IP Address, and then press the ► button.
Press ◄ or ► to move to another digit for numerical input.
Note
• Hold down ▲ or ▼ to increase or decrease the value continuously.
8.
9.
Repeat steps 6-7 to enter the IP address assigned to the printer.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings are changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 6. This will activate the values you have entered.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway on the Control Panel.
Network Setting 619
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Conguring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands
This topic describes how to congure the IP address using ARP and PING commands.
To use the ARP and PING commands, you will need to know the printer’s MAC address. You can conrm
the MAC address on the Control Panel.
1.
Check the printer’s MAC address.
You can conrm the MAC address on the Control Panel as follows:
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select MAC Address, and then press the ► button.
You can also print information on the printer status, which includes the MAC address, as follows:
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Status Print, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The MAC address is indicated in the printer status information in the following location.
2.
3.
In Windows, open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt, or in Mac OS X, start Terminal.
Execute the following command to add entries to the ARP table for managing IP addresses
and corresponding MAC addresses.
arp -s [IP address] [the printer’s MAC address you have veried]
Example: arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx 00-00-85-xx-xx-xx
Note
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the arp command in the format “arp -s xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx
00:00:85:xx:xx:xx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
620 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
4.
Execute the following command to send the IP address to the printer and congure it.
ping [IP address as specied in the ARP command] -l 479
Example: ping xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx -l 479
Note
• In “-l,” the “l” is the letter “l”.
• In Mac OS X when using Terminal, enter the ping command in the format “ping -s 479
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx.” For details, refer to the help le for the command line.
Note
• The subnet mask and default gateway will be set to “0.0.0.0.”Use RemoteUI to change the subnet mask
and default gateway to match your network settings.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
Network Setting 621
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Specifying Printer-Related Information
Follow the steps below to specify device information and security settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Information in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Information page.
To display the relevant settings page, click Edit in the upper-right corner of Device Information
or Security, depending on what information you want to specify.
6.
Refer to the tables of settings items for device information and security settings to complete
the settings.
Device information settings items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Device Name
Specify the device name.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Location
Specify where the device is installed.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Administrator
Identify the administrator.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Phone
Specify the device administrator’s contact
information.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Comments(E-mail)
Enter any notes from the device administrator.
(0-32 characters)
(Blank)
Security settings items
Item
Details
Default Setting
Old Password
Enter the current device password.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
New Password
Enter a new password.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
Conrm
Enter the new password again to conrm it.
(0-15 characters)
(Blank)
Besides entering a password, you can specify other security-related information, such as use of SNMP
or IPP authentication, or an IP address to restrict printing via TCP/IP.
7.
Click OK to activate the settings.
622 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Using RemoteUI
Enter the printer’s IP address in a web browser to display the RemoteUI page. After you log on to RemoteUI
from the page, you can check and change the status of the printer and print jobs, and congure network
settings.
For details on conguring printer settings for networks, refer to the following topics.
•
•
•
•
Conguring the Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings (→P.617)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings (→P.638)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings (→P.625)
Specifying Printer-Related Information (→P.622)
Note
• RemoteUI also offers many other features. You can display the ink levels, check error messages and
other status information, and cancel print jobs.
• By factory default, the English screen is displayed. You can change the display language after logging
on in Administrator Mode by choosing the desired language in the Language list.
Important
• Use Netscape Navigator/Communicator 6.0 or later, Internet Explorer 5.01 or later, or Firefox 1.5 or later
as a web browser. In Mac OS X, you can also use Safari 1.32 or later or Safari 2.03 or later.
• Access is not possible via a proxy server. In environments where a proxy server is used, add the
printer’s IP address to Exceptions (addresses accessed without a proxy server) in the web browser
proxy server settings. (Settings may vary depending on the network environment.)
• Enable JavaScript and cookies in the web browser.
• If you access RemoteUI with the printer name instead of its IP address, make sure the DNS settings are
correctly congured.
Network Setting 623
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting
Email Notication When Printing is Finished or Errors
Occur
The printer can notify you of the printer status by email. Even when you are away from the printer, you can
know when printing is nished or if errors occur. Receive notication via email on your mobile phone or
at your computer.
Use the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) function to set up email recipients and message timing.
Besides being informed of nished print jobs or errors, you can also complete settings for email notication
when service is needed or it’s time to replace consumables.
Note
• For details on email notication using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows), refer to the
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
624 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the NetWare network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
Refer to the NetWare Settings Items table to complete the settings.
NetWare Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Frame Type
Specify the type of frame to
use in NetWare.
Disabled
NCP Burst Mode
Activate this setting to use
On
NCP Burst Mode.
This mode supports fast data
transfer when printing in queue
server mode. Normally, leave
the setting On.
Print Application
Choose the print service.
• Bindery PServer
• RPrinter
• NDS PServer
• NPrinter
Packet Signature
Select If Requested by Server If Requested by Server
to use packet signature.
Bindery
PServer
File Server Name
Specify the name of a le
server that has a NetWare print
server, up to 47 characters.
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-15 seconds)
5
NDS PServer
Network Setting 625
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Item
RPrinter
NDS
PServer
NPrinter
7.
Default Setting
Details
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
-
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-5)
0
Tree Name
Specify the name of an NDS
tree that has a NetWare print
server, up to 32 characters.
-
Context Name
Specify the name of a context
that has a NetWare print
server, up to 255 characters.
-
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 64 characters.
-
Print Server Password
Set a password for the print
server, up to 20 characters.
-
Polling Interval
Specify the interval to conrm
jobs.
(1-255 seconds)
5
Print Server Name
Specify the name of a
NetWare print server, up
to 47 characters.
Enter the advertising name
of the print server designated
by the NetWare print service.
Usually, the advertising name
is the same as the name of the
print server.
Printer Number
Specify the number of the
printer connected to the
NetWare print server.
(0-254)
Enter the printer number
designated by the NetWare
print service.
Click OK to display the Network page.
626 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
0
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type
To enable communication between the printer and computers on your network, specify the Ethernet frame
type in your NetWare environment.
Follow the steps below to specify the frame type by using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility or the
printer Control Panel.
Note
• You can specify the frame type by using RemoteUI if the printer’s IP address is congured.
Important
• Before specifying the frame type, make sure the printer is on and connected to the network.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.536)
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the NetWare Frame Type list, select the frame type.
Click ETHERNET II under Frame Type in TCP/IP.
In IP Address, enter the IP address assigned to the printer, and then enter the subnet mask in
Subnet Mask and the default gateway in Gateway Address.
Important
• You must specify the IP address here to be able to congure NetWare protocol settings using
RemoteUI.
7.
8.
9.
Click Set.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Network Setting 627
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying the frame type using the printer Control Panel
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select NetWare, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Frame Type, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the frame type to use, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Service, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the desired print service, and then press the OK button.
Return to the NetWare menu.
10.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Note
• If an error message is displayed, check the settings and correct any invalid values.
• To cancel the setup process, hold down the Stop button for a second or more.
Important
• Be sure to complete step 5. This will activate the values you have entered.
628 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Print Services
Before printing in a NetWare network, you must congure print services such as print servers, print queues,
and so on. You can congure the print service settings from a computer using any of the following software.
• NWADMIN
• PCONSOLE
(from Novell, provided with NetWare)
Important
• If you use NWADMIN to congure the print service settings, Novell Client (the Novell NetWare client
software) must be installed as the client software application.
• NetWare networking is unsupported in Windows Vista.
This topic gives instructions for conguring NetWare print services. The order of this procedure may vary
depending on the environment.
Choosing the type of print services
Before completing print service settings, choose the type of print service. Refer to the following descriptions
as needed.
Note
• In NetWare 5.1/6.0/6.5, NDPS may also be used as the print service. If you use NDPS, use the
Novell printer gateway included with NetWare. For details on conguring NDPS, refer to the NetWare
documentation.
• NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery
NDS and bindery are both supported. Use the mode that is compatible with your network environment.
• Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode
Queue server mode and remote printer mode are both supported.
• Queue Server Mode
When using queue server mode, all print server functions are supported, so there is no need for
other print server software or hardware. In NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS
print server is used for printing. In bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the bindery print
server is used for printing. Note that if you use queue server mode, a NetWare user license is
required for each network interface.
• Remote Printer Mode
In remote printer mode, the printer is controlled by the NetWare print server. Thus, a NetWare
print server is required. In NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), the NDS print server is used for
printing, and in bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter), the bindery print server is used for printing.
Network Setting 629
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the print server
Use NWADMIN to set up the print server if NDS queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
Log into NetWare as Administrator or with equivalent rights, and then start NWADMIN.
Run Quick Setup.
1. Choose Print Services Quick Setup in the Tools menu.
2. Enter a desired name in Print Server Name. To use an existing print server, click the button at right
and choose the name from the list.
3. Enter a desired printer name in Name.
4. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use the printer in
remote printer mode, choose Parallel in Type, click Communications, and set Ports to LPT1 and
Connection Type to Manual Load.
5. Enter a desired queue name in Name.
6. In Volume, enter the volume object (that is, the object representing the physical volume on the
network) where the print queue will be created. Click the button at right to choose from a list.
7. Complete other settings as needed and click OK.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s network settings. Note the
print server name for future reference.
• When running Quick Setup, the printer is assigned printer number “0.” When using the printer in
queue server mode, do not change the printer number from “0.”
3.
Set a password.
1. Right-click the print server created in step 2 and choose Details.
2. Click Change Password to open the password input dialog box. Enter the password.
3. Click OK to close the password input dialog box.
4. Click OK or Cancel to close the details dialog box.
4.
To use the printer in remote printer mode, start the print server.
To use the NetWare le server as the print server, enter “LOAD PSERVER.NLM” at the le
server and press the Enter key.
Note
• This procedure is not required when using queue server mode.
630 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Use PCONSOLE to set up the print server if bindery queue server mode or remote printer mode is used.
1.
2.
3.
Log into NetWare as Supervisor and start PCONSOLE.
Switch to bindery mode.
If the print server has not been created, create it.
1. In Available Options, select Quick Setup and press the Enter key.
2. Enter the name of the new print server, the new printer, and the queue.
Note
• The print server name will be required when conguring the printer’s protocol settings. Note down
the print server name for future reference.
4.
Specify the printer type.
1. To use the printer in queue server mode, choose Other/Unknown in Type. To use remote printer
mode, set Printer Type to Parallel and Position to Manual Load.
2. Press the Esc key.
3. After the conrmation message is displayed, choose Yes and press the Enter key.
5.
Set a password.
1. In Available Options, select Print Servers and press the Enter key.
2. Select the print server created in step 2 and press the Enter key.
3. Select Password, and press the Enter key to display the password input dialog box.
4. Enter the password and press the Enter key.
6.
Press the Esc key several times to display the dialog box for conrming that PCONSOLE
is nished.
7.
Click Yes to exit PCONSOLE.
Network Setting 631
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Specifying NetWare Protocols
Follow the steps below to congure NetWare protocol settings other than the frame type by using RemoteUI.
Note
• For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the NetWare group to display the Edit NetWare Protocol
Settings page.
6.
7.
Make sure the Frame Type indicates the frame type used on the NetWare network.
To use burst mode, choose On for NCP Burst Mode.
Note
• Burst mode supports fast data transfer when printing in queue server mode. Normally, choose On.
8.
In Print Application, click the print service to be used.
Note
• Only one print service selected here will be enabled. Multiple print services are not available at
the same time.
9.
10.
For packet signature, click If Requested by Server in Packet Signature.
Complete the following settings based on the selected service.
• If you have selected Bindery PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In File Server Name, enter the le server name.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare
Print Services. (→P.629)
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.629)
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected RPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a Bindery Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.629)
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print
Services. (→P.629)
632 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
• If you have selected NDS PServer: Queue Server Mode (Using an NDS Print Server)
1. In Tree Name and Context Name, enter the tree and context name of the print server. Do not
exceed 255 characters for the context name.
2. In Print Server Name, enter the name of the print server created in Specifying NetWare
Print Services. (→P.629)
3. In Print Server Password, enter the password of the print server created in Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.629)
4. In Polling Interval, specify the interval at which the printer checks the NetWare print queue.
• If you have selected NPrinter: Remote Printer Mode (Using a NDS Print Server)
1. In Print Server Name, enter the advertising name of the print server created in Specifying
NetWare Print Services. (→P.629) Usually, the advertising name is the same as the name of
the print server.
2. In Printer Number, enter the same printer number specied in Specifying NetWare Print
Services. (→P.629)
11.
12.
Click OK to display the Network page.
Click Reset to activate the settings.
For a list of NetWare protocol settings items, see “Conguring the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”.
(→P.625)
Note
• If you use RemoteUI to display the print log in RPrinter or NPrinter mode, the document and user
information cannot be obtained. Thus, Document Name only indicates Unknown, and the User Name
information is identied as RPRINTER/NPRINTER.
Network Setting 633
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring NetWare Network Settings
To print over a NetWare network, congure the network environment as follows.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
1.
Specify the Ethernet frame type for communication between the printer and computers.
For instructions, see “Specifying the Printer’s Frame Type”. (→P.627)
2.
Specify the NetWare print services, including the print server and queue.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Print Services”. (→P.629)
3.
Specify NetWare protocol details besides the frame type.
For instructions, see “Specifying NetWare Protocols”. (→P.632)
After you have completed the steps above, congure each computer for printing over the
NetWare network.
4.
Connect to the NetWare network.
Install NetWare client software on each computer to be used for printing over the network, and
log in to the NetWare server or tree. For instructions on connection, refer to the NetWare and
operating system documentation.
5.
Install the printer driver.
Follow the instructions of your network administrator to install the printer driver on each computer
to be used for printing. When installing the printer driver, choose Network Printer as the printer
destination, and then choose the print queue created from the NetWare print service settings.
6.
Follow these steps to congure the printer port.
1. Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
2. Right-click the printer icon and choose Properties.
3. Click the Port (or Advanced ) tab to display the Port (or Advanced ) sheet.
4. As the destination port, specify the print queue created by conguring the NetWare print service
settings.
Note
• This step is not necessary if you specied the printer destination during installation of the printer
driver.
634 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)
This topic describes how to specify the printer driver destination if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you
will use the printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
Important
• If you use the printer on a TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address on the Printer (→P.615)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Open the Printers and Faxes (or Printers ) window.
Right-click the icon of this printer and choose Properties to open the printer properties window.
Click the Port tab to display the Port sheet.
Click Add Port to display the Printer Ports dialog box.
In the Available Port list, select Standard TCP/IP Port.
Click New Port.
After the wizard starts, a window is displayed for the Welcome to the Add Standard TCP/IP
Printer Port Wizard.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Click Next.
In Printer Name or IP Address, enter the printer’s IP address.
Follow the instructions on the screen to add a printer port.
Click Close to close the Printer Ports dialog box.
Make sure the printer port you added is displayed under Ports, and that the port is selected.
Click OK to close the printer properties window.
Note
• The procedure described above is the conguration based on the LPR or RAW protocol using the
standard TCP/IP port in Windows ( Standard TCP/IP Port ).
Network Setting 635
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
Install imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer
as follows:
Important
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights equivalent to the “Administrator” account.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM in the CD-ROM drive.
On the Setup Menu window, click Install Individual Software.
Click Install in imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Follow the instructions on the screen to proceed with the installation.
636 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Windows)
Conguring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility
From a computer running Windows, you can use imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility provided with the
printer to congure the printer’s IP address. This topic describes how to congure the IP address using
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Important
• To congure network settings, you must be logged in with administrative rights such as “Administrator”
account. We recommend that your network administrator congure the network settings.
• For instructions on installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility, see “Installing imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility”. (→P.536)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Start imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility from the start menu.
In the list of printers, select the printer to congure.
Choose Protocol Settings from the Printer menu.
In the Setting IP Address list, choose Manual.
Enter the IP address assigned to the printer and click the Set button.
Click OK after the Conrmation message dialog box is displayed.
Exit imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
Note
• To congure the IP address automatically, choose Auto in the Setting IP Address list and select
DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.
• You can also specify the subnet mask and default gateway.
Network Setting 637
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network Settings
Follow the steps below to congure the AppleTalk network settings.
1.
Start the web browser and enter the following URL in the Location (or Address ) box to display
the RemoteUI page.
http://“printer IP address or name”/
Example: http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select Administrator Mode and click Logon.
If a password has been set on the printer, enter the password.
Click Network in the Device Manager menu at left to display the Network page.
Click Edit in the upper-right corner of the AppleTalk group to display the Edit AppleTalk
Protocol Settings page.
6.
Refer to the AppleTalk Settings Items table to complete the settings.
AppleTalk Settings Items
Item
Default Setting
Details
Phase Type
Specify whether to use AppleTalk.
If you will use AppleTalk, choose Phase 2.
If you will not use AppleTalk, choose Disabled .
Disabled
Name (*1)
Specify the object name used by AppleTalk (in up to 31
single-byte or 15 double-byte characters).
However, do not use the following single-byte characters:
@*: =
Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx)
Zone (*2)
Specify the printer zone name, up to 31 single-byte
characters.
However, do not use the following single-byte characters:
@ : = Also avoid using “*” (which represents the default
zone) in the middle of a string.
*
*1:The object name you have specied in Name is displayed in Chooser in Mac OS 9 or Printer Setup
Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X. If you use multiple printers in the same zone, assign a
unique name to each printer. By default, the network interface name is “Canon NB-17FB (xxxxxx).”
(Here, xxxxxx is the last six digits of the printer’s MAC address.)
*2: If zones have been created on the network, enter the name of the printer’s zone. If there are
no zones, leave the asterisk “*” entry (for the default zone) as it is. If you enter a network zone
name that does not match created zones, the printer will not be detected by Macintosh computers.
Consult your network administrator for information on zone names.
7.
Click OK to display the Network page.
638 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Printer Driver Destination (Macintosh)
Specify the printer driver destination as follows if the printer’s IP address is changed, or if you will use the
printer over a network connection instead of via USB connection.
• If you switch to printing in an AppleTalk network, see “Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P.640)
• If you switch to printing in a TCP/IP network, or if the printer’s IP address is changed, see “Conguring
the Destination for TCP/IP Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.644)
• If you switch to printing in a Bonjour network, see “Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)”. (→P.648)
Network Setting 639
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)
To print over an AppleTalk network, activate the AppleTalk protocol and congure the destination as follows.
Activating AppleTalk on the printer
Important
• By factory default, the AppleTalk protocol is disabled on the printer.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select AppleTalk, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select On, and then press the OK button.
Press the Online button to bring the printer online.
If any of the settings is changed, a message for conrmation is displayed. In this case, press
the OK button.
Note
• By using RemoteUI, you can also specify the object name used by AppleTalk, as well as the printer
zone name.
For details on RemoteUI, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
Important
• Be sure to complete step 3. This will activate the values you have entered.
640 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the destination (Mac OS 9)
1.
2.
Choose Chooser from the Apple menu to display the Chooser window.
3.
4.
5.
Close the Chooser window.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Close the AppleTalk window and save the settings.
10.
In AppleTalk, click Active.
Click AppleTalk under Control Panels to display the AppleTalk window.
In Connect via, choose Built-in Ethernet.
Choose Chooser from the Apple menu to display the Chooser window.
In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.
In the Destination list at right, select AppleTalk, and then select the printer in the list below.
Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.
Network Setting 641
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the destination (Mac OS X)
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X.
1.
2.
In System Preferences, click Network to display the Network window.
In Show, choose Built-in Ethernet. Next, click AppleTalk, select Make AppleTalk Active,
and click Apply now.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Close the Network window and save the settings.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
642 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
7.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
Network Setting 643
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)
Follow the steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.
Important
• If you use the printer on TCP/IP network, make sure the printer’s IP address is congured correctly.
• Conguring the IP Address Using the Printer Control Panel (→P.619)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS 9)
1.
2.
Choose Chooser from the Apple menu to display the Chooser window.
3.
Click Registering IP Address in the Destination list to display the IP Address Register/Edit
In the list at left, click GARO Printer Driver.
dialog box.
644 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
4.
Enter the printer’s IP address in IP Address and click Add.
5.
Click OK to close the IP Address Register/Edit dialog box.
6.
In the Destination list, click the address you registered.
7.
Close the Chooser window and click OK after the conrmation message is displayed.
Network Setting 645
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Destination (Mac OS X)
Note
• The following procedures are based on Mac OS X 10.4. The method of conguring the destination
varies depending on the version of Mac OS X. If you use other versions, refer to the help for the Printer
Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
4.
Click More Printers.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
Click Add to display the Printer Browser window.
646 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
5.
In the list of connection methods, click Canon IP(iPF).
6.
Enter the printer’s IP address in Printer’s Address and click Add.
7.
Make sure the printer has been added, and then close the Printer List window.
Network Setting 647
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
Conguring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)
In Mac OS X 10.2.8 and later, use Bonjour functions to easily connect the printer to the network. Follow the
steps below to congure the destination if you use the printer on TCP/IP network.
Note
• In Mac OS 9, if the computer’s TCP/IP settings have been congured, you can connect the printer to the
network as easily as with the Bonjour function.
Select IP Print (Auto) from the Destination list in Chooser to specify the destination.
Important
• Bonjour and IP Print (Auto) do not support printing to a printer on other network groups that require a
router for connection. Make sure the computer and printer are on the same network. For information
about network settings, ask your network administrator.
• By default, Bonjour is activated on the printer. The printer name as displayed in Chooser in Mac
OS 9 or Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in Mac OS X is predened as the Multicast DNS
Service Name. You can activate or deactivate the Bonjour function or change the printer name by using
RemoteUI. For instructions on changing it, see “Using RemoteUI”. (→P.623)
1.
2.
3.
Choose Utilities (or Applications ) in the Go menu of Finder.
Click Printer Setup Utility (or Print Center ) in the Utilities folder.
If the printer name is not displayed in Printer List, click Add.
648 Network Setting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Network Setting (Macintosh)
4.
Select the printer from the list in the Printer Browser window and click Add.
Network Setting 649
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the Printhead
Maintenance
Adjusting the Printhead
Correcting Print Misalignment
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.
For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically”. (→P.650)
For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.652)
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by printing and reading a test pattern.
There are two modes for automatic adjustment: Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Standard Adj. will x
most slight image distortion or color misalignment, but if not, try Advanced Adj.
If using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using
advanced adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on manual adjustment, see “Adjusting the
Printhead Alignment Manually”. (→P.652)
Follow these steps for standard automatic adjustment of the Printhead.
1.
When using sheets, have three unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready when Standard
Adj. is selected or 11 when Advanced Adj. is selected.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
Note
• Use Standard Adj. if you have switched to another type of paper or if you want the boundaries
between colors to appear as attractive as possible.
• Use Advanced Adj. to ne-tune the space between nozzles or colors if you have switched the
printhead or if you want printed documents to appear as vivid as possible. We recommend using
Advanced Adj. for printing at a higher level of image quality.
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
• This function is not available for CAD Tracing Paper, CAD Translucent Matte Film, or CAD Clear
Film. If adjustment is not possible as expected using highly transparent lm or similar media, try
another type of media or adjust the Printhead alignment manually. (→P.652)
650 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the Printhead
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Head Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the Printhead alignment.
Maintenance 651
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually
If printed vertical lines are warped or colors are out of alignment, adjust the Printhead alignment. Adjust the
Printhead alignment automatically or manually by using a printed test pattern.
You can adjust the Printhead alignment automatically or manually. Normally, choose automatic adjustment. If
using special media or printing does not improve even after performing automatic adjustment using advanced
adjustment, try manual adjustment. For instructions on automatic adjustment, see “Adjusting the Printhead
Alignment Automatically”. (→P.650)
Follow these steps for standard manual adjustment of the Printhead.
Note
• If Manual Head Adj is unusable although displayed in the menu, choose Advanced Adj. in Auto Head
Adj. Manual Head Adj is available in the menu after you try Auto Head Adj. once.
1.
When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4-sized or larger ready.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment
cannot be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for adjustment.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Head Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for printhead adjustment.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select D-1, and then press the ► button.
652 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the Printhead
8.
Examine test pattern D-1 for printhead adjustment. After you determine the pattern with straight
lines, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
Note
• If lines seem straightest in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
9.
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to specify the adjustment value for D-2 to D-5, D-7 to D-11, and D-13 to
D-24.
10.
11.
12.
Press ◄.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Register Setting, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer goes online.
Maintenance 653
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the Printhead
Adjusting the Printhead Height
If the printing rubs or the edge of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, adjusting the Printhead height may improve
results.
If image edges are blurred, it may help to lower the Printhead.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Height, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Printhead height, and then press the OK button.
654 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed. There are
two modes for adjusting the amount paper is fed, Standard Adj. and Advanced Adj. Use Advanced
Adj. if Standard Adj. does not eliminate streaks, or when using paper other than genuine Canon paper or
paper for purposes other than checking output. When using highly transparent media not compatible with
automatic adjustment, you must adjust the feed amount manually. For instructions on manual adjustment, see
“Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually”. (→P.658)
Note
• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed
at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when
adjusting the feed amount. (→P.662)
• This may take some time, depending on the type of paper.
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band
Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you
set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.243)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.
Maintenance 655
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount automatically.
1.
Prepare one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger when Standard Adj. is selected or two
when Advanced Adj. is selected.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Band Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Standard Adj. or Advanced Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for band adjustment.
After reading the pattern, the printer automatically adjusts the feed amount and returns to online
mode.
Note
• In some cases, the feed amount cannot be adjusted automatically. If so, choose Advanced Adj.
in Auto Band Adj. (→P.49)
• If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular
intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.657)
656 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount during printing
If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears
every 50 mm (2.0 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. However, note that because printing is
paused, colors may be slightly different.
1.
Press the Online button to pause printing.
2.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.
Note
• The supported range is -5 to +5.
5.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
Note
• The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust
the feed amount (manually or automatically), the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.
Maintenance 657
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually
If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
This topic describes how to adjust the feed amount manually.
When using highly transparent media for which automatic adjustment is not supported, adjust the feed amount
manually. We recommend automatic adjustment for other types of media. For instructions on automatic
adjustment, see “Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically”. (→P.655)
Note
• To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed
at exactly the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when
adjusting the feed amount. (→P.662)
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the feed amount in printing, you must rst set Feed Priority to Band
Joint. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be applied in printing if you
set Print Priority in the printer driver to Image or Ofce Document. (→P.243)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Band Joint, and then press the OK button.
658 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow the steps below to adjust the feed amount manually.
1.
When using sheets, have two unused sheets A4/Letter-sized or larger ready.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
Note
• Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting. Adjustment cannot be
completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Manual Band Adj, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern A is printed for band adjustment.
6.
Examine test pattern A for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
Test pattern B is printed for band adjustment.
Note
• If streaks seem least noticeable in two patterns but you cannot decide which one is better, choose an
intermediate value. For example, choose 11 if you cannot decide whether pattern 10 or 12 is better.
7.
Examine test pattern B for band adjustment.After you determine the pattern in which streaks are
least noticeable, press ▲ or ▼ to choose the pattern number, and then press the OK button.
The feed amount is adjusted, and the printer goes online.
If printed documents are still affected by uneven contrast or banding in different colors at regular
intervals after this adjustment, you can adjust the feed amount during printing. (→P.660)
Maintenance 659
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the feed amount during printing
If, during printing, the contrast is uneven sideways across the paper or banding in different colors appears
every 50 mm (2.0 in) or so, try adjusting the feed amount as follows. The results of adjustment are applied to
printing in progress, enabling you to check the results immediately. However, note that because printing is
paused, colors may be slightly different.
1.
Press the Online button to pause printing.
2.
Press the Menu button to display Menu Durng Prtng.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Fine Band Adj., and then press the OK button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to change the value, and then press the OK button.
Note
• The supported range is -5 to +5.
5.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
Note
• The Fine Band Adj. value set during printing is also applied to the next print job. However, if you adjust
the paper feed amount (automatically or manually), the Fine Band Adj. value is reset to 0.
660 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength
When printing on heavyweight paper or paper that curls or wrinkles easily, if the printing rubs or the edge
of paper is wrinkled from rubbing, results may be improved by adjusting the strength of vacuum against
paper on the Platen.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select VacuumStrngth, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of suction against paper on the Platen, and then press the
OK button.
Maintenance 661
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better Accuracy
To adjust the measurement scale and ensure accuracy (so that lines in CAD drawings are printed at exactly
the right length, for example), specify the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage when adjusting the feed
amount.
Note
• If printed images are affected by banding in different colors, adjust the amount that paper is fed.
(→P.658)
Important
• Use paper of the same type and size for adjustment as you will use for printing.
• To apply the results of adjusting the measurement scale for better accuracy in printing, you must rst set
Feed Priority to Print Length. Note that if you select Automatic, the results of adjustment will only be
applied in printing if you set Print Priority in the printer driver to Line Drawing/Text. (→P.243)
Follow these steps to change the Feed Priority setting.
1. Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Paper Details, and then press the ► button.
3. Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of paper, and then press the ► button.
4. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Feed Priority, and then press the ► button.
5. Press ▲ or ▼ to select Print Length or Automatic, and then press the OK button.
662 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Adjusting the feed amount
Follow these steps to adjust the scale for better accuracy.
1.
When using sheets, load one unused sheet A4/Letter-sized or larger.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
Note
• When loading paper, specify the correct paper type. When the paper type is not specied, the
printing quality may be affected without the correct adjustment of the feeding.
• We recommend using the type of paper you use most often for feed amount adjustment.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Length, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A test pattern is printed for adjustment based on the amount of paper stretching or shrinkage.
The scale bar shows “Millimeter” in 50 mm units and “Inch” in 1 inch units.
6.
Measure the length of the adjustment pattern. Calculate the difference between the measured
length and actual length. Enter it as a percentage and press the OK button.
You can adjust the value in 0.02% increments. Press ▲ to increase the value and ▼ to decrease
it.
If the scale is printed shorter than actual size, set the value toward the positive side; if it is printed
longer, set the value toward the negative side.
Note
• You can also specify the adjustment value by selecting Paper Details → Adjust. Setting.
Maintenance 663
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Color adjustment
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors
Color calibration is a feature that compensates for changes in color from individual variation among Printhead
or from the printing environment, ensuring better color consistency.
We recommend using color calibration in the following situations.
• After initial installation
• After Printhead replacement
• If colors seem different from before (however, make sure you are printing under the same conditions
and in the same printing environment)
• When consistent color is desired from multiple printers (in this case, also use the same version of
rmware and printer driver and the same settings.)
When you execute color calibration, a test pattern is printed and an adjustment value is automatically set
based on the results of printing.
Important
• Before executing color calibration, you must prepare one of the following types of paper. Note that
various environmental conditions are recommended for various types of paper. Use the printer under
the recommended environmental conditions for the paper to be used. For details on recommended
environmental conditions for various paper, see the Paper Reference Guide. (→P.169)
664 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Paper Compatible With
Color Calibration
Japan
Europe
Americas
HW Coated
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Premium MatteP
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Glossy Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
FineArt Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
FneArt HW Photo
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
HW GlossyPhoto2
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
HW SemiGlPhoto2
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
Poster Semi-Gl
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
SatinPhoto 190
-
Compatible
Compatible
Proong Paper
Compatible
Compatible
Compatible
GlossyPhoto 190
-
Compatible
Compatible
GlossyPhoto 240
-
Compatible
Compatible
SatinPhoto 240
-
Compatible
Compatible
Comm Proong
-
Compatible
Compatible
RC Proong 210
-
Compatible
Compatible
Opaque Paper
-
Compatible
-
Art Extr Smooth
-
Compatible
-
• Optimal adjustment values from color calibration are also applied for paper other than the type you use
to execute color calibration when printing on that other type of paper.
• In the printer driver or in the MAIN MENU of the Control Panel, you can specify whether to apply the
adjustment value from color calibration when printing. The printer driver settings are given priority.
For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)
For information on printer driver settings, refer to the following topics.
• Printer Driver Settings (Windows) (→P.507)
• Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X) (→P.558)
• Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9) (→P.584)
• Before color calibration, ensure the printer is not exposed to direct sunlight or other strong sources of
light.
• If you reinstall the printer driver and change the region selection of the Media Conguration Tool,
region-specic paper information originally registered on the printer before installation will be deleted. If
the information of paper you used for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration can no longer be
applied to any type of paper. To apply the results of color calibration, perform color calibration again
using paper supported in the newly selected region and compatible with color calibration. See the Media
Conguration Tool Guide (Windows) or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh)
Maintenance 665
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
• Default settings will be restored if you select MAIN MENU > System Setup > Reset PaprSetngs > Yes.
Because information added or updated using the Media Conguration Tool is also deleted, if paper of
which information was added using the Media Conguration Tool was used for color calibration and is
now deleted, such color calibration can no longer be applied to any type of paper. To apply the results
of color calibration, perform color calibration again using a paper included originally in the default
settings that is compatible with color calibration. See the Media Conguration Tool Guide (Windows)
or Media Conguration Tool Guide (Macintosh).
Note
• We recommend using only one type of paper for color calibration. Using the same type of paper for
color calibration can improve color consistency.
• For better color consistency, we recommend performing color calibration under the same conditions of
temperature and humidity each time.
• For further adjustment of the color of documents as printed applying color calibration, adjust the color in
the printer driver. (→P.254)
• You can check when color calibration was executed and what paper was used from Status Print,
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (in Windows) or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (on a Macintosh
computer) in the MAIN MENU on the Control Panel.
For menu details, see “Main Menu Settings”. (→P.49)
For details on imagePROGRAF Status Monitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Status Monitor help.
For details on imagePROGRAF Printmonitor, refer to the imagePROGRAF Printmonitor help.
666 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Follow these steps to execute color calibration.
1.
Load paper compatible with color calibration.
When using sheets, load paper A4 (210.0×297.0 mm)/Letter (8.5×11 in) vertical, or larger. One
sheet is required.
When using a roll, load a roll 10 inches (254 mm) or wider.
• Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.142)
• Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.146)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Adjust Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Calibration, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Adjust, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the printer measures environmental conditions and checks the paper, a test pattern for color
calibration is printed. An adjustment value based on the results of printing is set automatically.
After adjustment is complete, the printer goes online or ofine automatically.
Maintenance 667
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment
You can print in the colors that look best when viewed under the light where the printed image will be displayed.
There are two ways to adjust the color tone for the ambient light, as follows.
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
On the printed Chart, note the number of the set of colors with the desired color tone and enter this number in
the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For instructions on selecting color tones on Charts before printing, refer to the following topic:
• By selecting color tones on Charts before printing (Windows) (→P.669)
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the Eye-One spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also
be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported Eye-One devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure
Tool.
• This function is only supported in Windows.
For instructions on measuring light levels before printing, refer to the following topic:
• Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light (→P.673)
668 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
(Windows)
Print Charts, note the number of the chart with your desired color tone, and enter this number in the printer
driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires that the Light Source Check Tool be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Check Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
1.
2.
3.
Choose Print in the application menu.
4.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper
used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)
Maintenance 669
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
5.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
6.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the A Matching Mode list.
670 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
11.
Conrm that By selecting a chart number is selected in C Setting Method.
If it is not selected already, select it.
12.
Click D Print Chart.
Light Source Check Tool now starts up.
13.
Check the settings and click Print.
The Chart is printed.
14.
In the viewing environment, determine the number of the set of images on the Chart in which all
four vertical images have the best overall color tone.
Note
• Choose the number of the set of images in which the people, the blue of the sky, and the red of
the strawberries look the most natural overall.
Maintenance 671
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
15.
After conrming that Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) is selected in A Matching
Mode, select the number for the desired color tone on the chart in E Chart Number.
16.
17.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and start printing.
672 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient Light
Measure the light level in the viewing environment and enter the results in the printer driver before printing.
Important
• This function requires the Eye-One spectrophotometer. The Light Source Measure Tool must also
be installed.
• You can install the Light Source Measure Tool from the User Software CD-ROM.
• For a list of supported Eye-One devices, refer to the manual provided with the Light Source Measure
Tool.
1.
Using the Eye-One spectrophotometer and the Light Source Measure Tool, determine the
Lighting Source Type and Color Temperature in the viewing environment.
Note
• For detailed instructions on Eye-One and the Light Source Measure Tool, refer to the provided
instructions.
2.
3.
4.
Choose Print in the application menu.
5.
In the A Media Type list, select the type of paper that is loaded (for example, Glossy Photo
Select the printer in the dialog box, and then display the printer driver dialog box. (→P.539)
Make sure the Main sheet is displayed.
Paper).
Important
• Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) may not be available, depending on the type of paper
used. For details, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)
Maintenance 673
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
6.
Click D Advanced Settings to switch the print mode.
7.
In F Print Quality, click Highest or High.
Important
• Ambient Light Matching mode is only available when the F Print Quality is set to Highest or High.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Click Color in the G Color Mode list.
Click H Color Settings to display the Color Settings dialog box.
Click the Matching tab to display the Matching sheet.
Click Ambient Light Matching Mode (Kyuanos) in the A Matching Mode list.
674 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
12.
Select By entering values directly in C Setting Method.
13.
14.
15.
Select the F Lighting Source Type and G Color Temperature determined in step 1.
Click OK.
Conrm the print settings and start printing.
Maintenance 675
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)
1.
2.
Choose Print from the File menu to display the dialog box for printing conditions.
Select the printer, and then display the printer driver dialog box.
Note
• The dialog box for specifying printing conditions varies depending on the source application. In some
cases, when you select the printer, a sheet for conguring the printer driver is added to the dialog box.
In the following case, click Preferences.
■Example: Print dialog box displayed by the application software
Six sheets of print settings are displayed by the printer driver: Main, Page Setup, Layout,
Favorites, Utility, and Support.
Note
• The titles of dialog boxes may vary depending on the application, and sheets other than these
six sheets may be displayed.
676 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Color adjustment
Important
• If you access the printer driver dialog box from the source application, changes you make to the settings
will only apply temporarily to that application. Because these are sizes you specify temporarily in the
printer driver, the sizes will not be available after you exit the application.
• You can also access the printer driver dialog box from the Windows system menu.
see “Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the Operating System Menu (Windows)”. (→P.206)
Maintenance 677
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
Ink Tanks
An Ink Tank that can be used in the printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side.
When purchasing an Ink Tank, make sure an “H” is printed on the label, along with the following Ink Tank
part numbers.
• 330 ml (11.2  oz)
• MBK Ink Tank PFI-302MBK
• BK Ink Tank PFI-302BK
• C Ink Tank PFI-301C
• M Ink Tank PFI-301M
• Y Ink Tank PFI-301Y
• PC Ink Tank PFI-301PC
• PM Ink Tank PFI-301PM
• R Ink Tank PFI-301R
• G Ink Tank PFI-301G
• B Ink Tank PFI-301B
• GY Ink Tank PFI-302GY
• PGY Ink Tank PFI-302PGY
678 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
• 700 ml (23.7  oz)
• MBK Ink Tank PFI-702MBK
• BK Ink Tank PFI-702BK
• C Ink Tank PFI-701C
• M Ink Tank PFI-701M
• Y Ink Tank PFI-701Y
• PC Ink Tank PFI-701PC
• PM Ink Tank PFI-701PM
• R Ink Tank PFI-701R
• G Ink Tank PFI-701G
• B Ink Tank PFI-701B
• GY Ink Tank PFI-702GY
• PGY Ink Tank PFI-702PGY
Note
• For instructions on replacing Ink Tank, see “Replacing Ink Tanks”. (→P.680)
Maintenance 679
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Replacing Ink Tanks
Compatible Ink Tank
The printer supports both 330 ml (11.2  oz) and 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tanks as replacement tanks.
An Ink Tank for this printer is labeled with a white letter “H” in a black circle on the side. Request an Ink Tank
with the same label when you purchase a new Ink Tank. For more information, see “Ink Tanks”. (→P.678)
Precautions when handling an Ink Tank
Take the following precautions when handling an Ink Tank.
Caution
• For safety, keep an Ink Tank out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• Before removing an Ink Tank from the pouch for installation, shake it gently seven or eight times. If you
do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the ink holes of Ink Tank you remove. Handle an Ink Tank carefully during
replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• We recommend using up an Ink Tank in the course of printing within six months after breaking the seal.
Using an old Ink Tank may affect the printing quality.
• Do not remove the Ink Tank if the printer is not used for a long period (a month or more). Ink remaining
in the printer may become clogged and cause of printing problems.
• Coverage may be uneven if you replace the ink during a print job.
How to Replace the Ink Tank
1. Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.681)
2. Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement. (→P.681) (Otherwise, open the Ink Tank Cover.)
3. Remove the Ink Tank.
• 330 ml (11.2  oz) Ink Tank (→P.682)
• 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank (→P.684)
4. Load the new Ink Tank.
• 330 ml (11.2  oz) Ink Tank (→P.686)
• 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank (→P.689)
680 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank replacement
You can replace Ink Tank if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Online or Ofine, or if messages advise
you to check the amount of ink left or replace the Ink Tank.
If a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank, press the OK button.
Do not remove an Ink Tank during initialization immediately after turning on the printer, or during printhead
cleaning.
Note
• Ink Tank replacement is possible even when print jobs are being canceled or if paper is being fed.
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement
Note
• This step is not necessary if a message prompts you to replace the Ink Tank. Check the message on the
Display Screen and press the OK button. Next, remove the Ink Tank.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Rep. Ink Tank, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Ink Tank Cover. Next, remove the
Ink Tank.
Maintenance 681
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2  oz])
1.
Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.
The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.
Caution
• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.
2.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement. Lift the Ink Tank Lock
Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.
Important
• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.
• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the previous position.
682 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
3.
Hold the empty Ink Tank by the grip (a) to remove it, and press the OK button.
Note
• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank with the ink holes (a)
facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains. Put the Ink Tank in a plastic bag and seal it.
• Dispose of used Ink Tanks according to local regulations.
Maintenance 683
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7  oz])
1.
Open the Ink Tank Cover of the tank for replacement and check the Ink Lamp.
The Ink Lamp ashes quickly if there is no ink left.
Caution
• Avoid hitting the printer when replacing an Ink Tank. Handle the printer gently when replacing tanks.
2.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever of the color for replacement. Lift the Ink Tank Lock
Lever until it stops, and then push it down to the front.
Important
• Push the Ink Tank Lock Lever down until it locks.
• Make sure the Ink Tank Lock Lever does not return to the previous position.
684 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
3.
Hold the empty Ink Tank by the handle (a) to remove it, and press the OK button.
Note
• If there is still some ink left in the Ink Tank you removed, store the ink tank in the box with the ink
holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• Dispose of used Ink Tanks according to local regulations.
Maintenance 685
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Install the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2  oz])
1.
Before opening the pouch, tilt the Ink Tank to the left and right shaking gently seven or eight times.
Note
• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
2.
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and
affect printing quality.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause
stains.
• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
686 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
3.
Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with
the ink holes down.
Important
• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.
If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the
Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank
before reloading it.
4.
Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.
Maintenance 687
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
5.
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the ink.
• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.
6.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The printer now goes online or ofine.
Important
• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close,
some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure every Ink Tank Lock Lever is
fully closed.
688 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Install the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7  oz])
1.
Before opening the pouch, hold the new Ink Tank with both hands and tilt it to the left and right as
shown shaking gently seven or eight times.
Caution
• The 700 ml (23.7  oz) Ink Tank is heavy, so use your whole arm to agitate it instead of just your wrist.
Note
• If you do not shake the Ink Tank, the ink may sediment, which may affect printing quality.
2.
Open the pouch and remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Never touch the ink holes or metal contacts. This may cause stains, damage the Ink Tank, and
affect printing quality.
• Avoid dropping the Ink Tank after removing it from the pouch. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause
stains.
• Do not remove and shake an Ink Tank that has already been installed in the printer. Ink may leak out.
Maintenance 689
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
3.
Press the OK button and insert the Ink Tank into the holder facing as shown in the gure, with
the ink holes down.
Important
• Ink Tank cannot be loaded in the holder if the color or orientation is wrong.
If the Ink Tank does not t in the holder, do not force it into the holder. Make sure the color of the
Ink Tank Lock Lever matches the color of the Ink Tank, and check the orientation of the Ink Tank
before reloading it.
4.
Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops, and then push it down until it clicks into place.
690 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
5.
Make sure the Ink Lamp is lit in red.
Note
• If the Ink Lamp is not lit in red, reload the ink.
• Ink Lamp ashes when there is little ink left.
6.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
The printer now goes online or ofine.
Important
• After Ink Tank replacement, always close the Ink Tank Cover. If the Ink Tank Cover cannot close,
some Ink Tank Lock Lever may not be closed completely. Make sure every Ink Tank Lock Lever is
fully closed.
• To close the Ink Tank Cover when no Ink Tank is installed (as when moving the printer), push the
release lever (a) as shown while returning the Ink Tank Lock Lever to the original position.
Maintenance 691
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
Checking Ink Tank Levels
On the Display Screen, you can check how much ink is left in the Ink Tank.
The Display Screen indicates the remaining ink levels, unless a message is displayed.
During messages, press the Information button to view the ink levels on the Display Screen.
These levels shown on the Display Screen correspond to the inks identied by the Color Label on the bottom
of the Display Screen.
These symbols may be displayed above the ink level: “!” if ink is low, “×” if no ink is left, and “?” if you have
deactivated ink level detection.
The remaining ink level is indicated as shown below.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Ink Tank, replace the Ink Tank. If a message is displayed
indicating to check the remaining ink levels, or after tasks that consume a lot of ink such as large-format
printing or head cleaning, check the remaining levels and replace Ink Tank as needed. (→P.680)
692 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Ink Tanks
When to Replace Ink Tanks
Replace or prepare to replace Ink Tank in the following situations.
If a message for checking the ink is shown on the Display Screen
When there is little ink left, the Message lamp is lit and Ink Level: Check is shown on the Display Screen.
You can continue to print, but prepare to replace the Ink Tank. (→P.692)
If a message for ink replacement is shown on the Display Screen
When the Ink Tank becomes empty, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement
is shown on the Display Screen. You can continue to print, but replace the Ink Tank.
When ink runs out, the Message lamp ashes, a message regarding Ink Tank replacement is shown on the
Display Screen, and printing is disabled. Replace the Ink Tank at this point.
Before print jobs and maintenance that consume a lot of ink
If little ink is left, there may not be enough for large-format printing, head cleaning, and maintenance, which
require a lot of ink. In this case, replace or prepare to replace the Ink Tank before maintenance.
Maintenance 693
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
Printheads
Printhead
This is a replacement Printhead for the printer.
• Printhead PF-03
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Printhead, see “Replacing the Printhead”. (→P.697)
Checking the Print Quality
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
For instructions, see “Checking for Nozzle Clogging”. (→P.695)
Improving the Print Quality
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles. Clean the Printhead if the printed test pattern was faint.
For instructions on cleaning the Printhead, see “Cleaning the Printhead”. (→P.696)
694 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
Checking for Nozzle Clogging
If printing is faint or streaked in different colors, make sure the Printhead nozzles are clear by printing a test
pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)
1.
Load unused paper.
• Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder (→P.179)
• Loading the Roll in the Printer (→P.182)
• Loading the Sheet in the Printer (→P.212)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Test Print, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Nozzle Check, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
The printer goes online and prints a test pattern.
6.
Check the printing results.
The Printhead L prints the test pattern for nozzle checking on the top line in each color, and the
Printhead R prints the test pattern on the bottom line.
If the horizontal lines are not faint or incomplete, the nozzles are clear.
If some sections of the horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, the nozzles for those colors
are clogged.
If horizontal lines are faint or incomplete, follow the steps below and check again for nozzle
clogging.
1. Clean the Printhead. (→P.696)
2. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
Note
• If you repeat these steps several times but the horizontal lines are still faint or incomplete, contact
your Canon dealer.
Maintenance 695
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
Cleaning the Printhead
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about two minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about three minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.695)
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve
the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B at least two times. If this still does not improve printing, the
Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.
696 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
When to replace the Printhead
This printer uses two Printheads.
Replace one or both Printheads in the following situations.
• If the printing quality does not improve even after two cycles of Head Cleaning B from the printer menu
Replace both Printheads in the following situations.
• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the left printhead.
Replace the left Printhead.
• If the Display Screen indicates Open top cover and replace the right printhead.
Replace the right Printhead.
• If your Canon dealer has advised you to replace the Printhead
Replace the Printhead that your dealer advised you to replace.
Compatible Printhead
For information on compatible Printhead, see “Printhead”. (→P.694)
Precautions when handling the Printhead
Take the following precautions when handling the Printhead.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Printhead out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
• Do not touch the Printhead immediately after printing. The Printhead becomes extremely hot, and
there is a risk of burns.
Important
• Avoid dropping or shaking the Printhead. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• There may be ink around the nozzles of the Printhead you remove. Handle the Printhead carefully
during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not open the Printhead pouch until immediately before installation. After removing the Printhead from
the pouch, install it right away. If the Printhead is not installed after the pouch is opened, the nozzles
may dry out, which may affect printing quality.
• If you need to store a Printhead temporarily before installation, do not keep the nozzles and metal
contacts (→P.702) facing down. If the nozzles or metal contacts are damaged, it may affect the
printing quality.
• Never attempt to take apart or modify a Printhead. This may damage the printer.
• Never touch the Printhead nozzles or metal contacts. This may cause printing problems.
Maintenance 697
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
Replacing the Printhead
Follow the steps below to replace the Printhead. Failure to follow this procedure may cause ink to leak
from the Printhead, resulting in stains.
Only remove or install the Printhead after selecting Replace P.head in the menu, and follow the instructions
on the panel. Removing or installing the Printhead without following the correct procedure may damage the
Printhead.
Note
• Prepare a new Ink Tank when ink levels are low.
• Your hands may become dirty during Printhead replacement. During replacement, wear the gloves
provided with the new Printhead.
• Choose On in Auto Print to have the printer automatically adjust the Printhead alignment after
Printhead replacement. (→P.49)
1.
If the roll is not ejected because of the cutting method selected, cut it manually and remove it.
(→P.487)
2.
3.
Clean inside the Top Cover. (→P.720)
4.
5.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Replace P.head, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Select Printhead L when replacing Printhead L and Printhead R when replacing Printhead R.
When replacing both, select L & R Printheads. Be sure to specify the correct Printhead.
Ink is now absorbed.
After about three minutes, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to open
the Top Cover.
7.
Open the Top Cover.
Instructions are now shown on the Display Screen regarding Printhead replacement.
698 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
8.
If the Carriage Cover is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it
clean.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
• Never touch the metal contacts of the Carriage. This may damage the printer.
Maintenance 699
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
9.
If the ventilation duct (a) is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely to wipe it
clean.
Move the Carriage out of the way manually if Carriage is concealing the ventilation duct, and
then clean the duct.
10.
Lift the Carriage Cover to open it fully.
11.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Lever forward all the way to open it completely.
700 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
12.
Lift the Printhead Fixer Cover to open it fully.
13.
Remove the used Printhead.
Caution
• When replacing the Printhead immediately after printing, wait a few minutes before replacing
it. The metal parts of the Printhead become hot during printing, and there is a risk of burns from
touching these parts.
Note
• Dispose of the used Printhead according to local regulations.
Maintenance 701
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
14.
Holding the new Printhead by the grips (a), remove it from the case.
Important
• When handling the Printhead, always hold it by the grips (a). Never touch the nozzles (b) or metal
contacts (c). This may damage the Printhead and affect printing quality.
15.
While rmly holding the Printhead you have removed, use your other hand to remove the orange
Safety Cap 1 (a). Squeeze the grips (c) of Safety Cap 2 (b) and pull it down to remove it.
Important
• Safety Cap 1 (a) may be coated with ink to protect the Printhead. Be careful not to touch areas
other than the grips.
• Never touch the ink supply section (d). This may cause printing problems.
• The inside surface of Safety Cap 2 (b) is coated with ink to protect the nozzles. Handle it carefully to
avoid touching the nozzles or spilling ink. Spilled ink may cause stains. The Printhead contains ink
to protect the nozzles. If this ink is accidentally spilled, it may stain the printer or surrounding area.
We recommend removing the Safety Cap 2 (b) on top of the Printhead package or safely out of the
way. Wipe off any spilled ink with a dry cloth. This ink is non-toxic.
• Do not reattach the Safety Cap or protective material. Dispose of these materials according to
local regulations.
702 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
16.
With the nozzles facing down and the metal contacts toward the back, tilt the Printhead slightly
forward as you insert it in the Carriage. Carefully push the printhead rmly into the Carriage,
ensuring that the nozzles and metal contacts do not touch the carriage.
17.
Pull the Printhead Fixer Cover down toward the front to lock the Printhead in place.
18.
Push the Printhead Fixer Lever toward the back of the printer until it clicks.
Maintenance 703
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printheads
19.
Push the Carriage Cover down toward the front.
20.
Close the Top Cover.
Ink now lls the system.
After about ten minutes, the Printhead will be automatically aligned, and the printer will go online.
If no paper has been loaded, a message is displayed requesting you to load paper.
Important
• Never remove an Ink Tank or Maintenance Cartridge while the system is lling with ink.
• If Auto Print is Off in the printer menu, the Printhead will not be aligned. In this case, adjust the
alignment after Printhead replacement by accessing Advanced Adj. in Auto Head Adj. (→P.650)
704 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cutter Unit
Cutter Unit
Cutter Unit
A reaplacement Cutter Unit.
• Cutter Unit CT-06
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Cutter Unit, see “Replacing the Cutter Unit”. (→P.705)
Replacing the Cutter Unit
Note
• For information on compatible Cutter Unit, see “Cutter Unit”. (→P.705)
1.
2.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Change Cutter, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the Carriage is centered, a message is shown on the Display Screen instructing you to
open the Top Cover.
Note
• If you do not respond within two minutes, cutter replacement is canceled and the printer goes online
automatically. In this case, repeat this procedure.
6.
Open the Top Cover.
Maintenance 705
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cutter Unit
7.
If the Cutter Unit or Carriage Cover is dirty, use a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely
to wipe it clean.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
8.
Holding the Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b), remove it from the Carriage.
Important
• Never touch any part of the Cutter Unit except the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b). This poses a risk of
injury and may stain your hands. Also, it may damage the printer.
Caution
• Dispose of the used Cutter Unit in accordance with local regulations.
• Do not disassemble the Cutter Unit. Touching the blade may cause injury.
706 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cutter Unit
9.
Holding the new Cutter Unit by the Lock Lever (a) and grip (b), push it onto the Carriage until it
clicks into place.
Important
• After installing the Cutter Unit, hold it only by the grip (b) and pull the Cutter Unit forward to make
sure it does not come off. If the Cutter Unit comes off, it may damage the printer.
10.
Close the Top Cover.
The Carriage moves into position and a conrmation message is displayed regarding resetting
the cut counter.
If you have replaced the cutter unit, reset the counter.
11.
Press the OK button.
The printer now goes online.
Maintenance 707
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
Maintenance Cartridge
A replacement Maintenance Cartridge. Maintenance Cartridge is provided with a Shaft Cleaner.
• Maintenance Cartridge MC-08
Note
• For instructions on replacing the Maintenance Cartridge, see “Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge”.
(→P.708)
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
Compatible Maintenance Cartridge
For information on the compatible Maintenance Cartridge, see “Maintenance Cartridge”. (→P.708)
Precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge
Take the following precautions when handling the Maintenance Cartridge.
Caution
• For safety, keep the Maintenance Cartridge out of the reach of children.
• If ink is accidentally ingested, contact a physician immediately.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge except to replace it.
• To prevent ink from leaking from a used Maintenance Cartridge, avoid dropping the cartridge or storing it
at an angle. Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• Ink adheres to the top of the Maintenance Cartridge after it has been used. Handle the Maintenance
Cartridge carefully during replacement. The ink may stain clothing.
• Do not install a used Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
708 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge
1.
Make sure no print jobs are in progress.
You can replace the Maintenance Cartridge if the Display Screen indicates the printer is Ofine
or if messages advise you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge.
If a message prompts you to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, press the OK button. Steps 2-5
are unnecessary in this case. Go to step 6 and remove the Maintenance Cartridge.
Do not replace the Maintenance Cartridge during initialization immediately after turning on the
printer, during Printhead cleaning, or while ink is being lled.
If you pause printing to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, it may cause the printed images to
be blurry.
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. maint cart, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A message on the Display Screen advises you to open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
6.
At this point, open the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
Maintenance 709
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
7.
Hold the used Maintenance Cartridge by the grip (a) with one hand and put your other hand
under the Maintenance Cartridge to hold it rmly on the bottom, keeping it level as you pull it out.
Important
• Used Maintenance Cartridge is heavy. Always grasp the cartridge rmly and keep the cartridge level
during removal and storage. If you drop a used Maintenance Cartridge or store it at an angle, ink
may leak and cause stains.
• The remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity is recorded on each printer. Do not install a used
Maintenance Cartridge in another printer.
8.
Open the box, remove the plastic bag, packaging material, and Shaft Cleaner, and take out
the Maintenance Cartridge.
Important
• Never touch the metal contacts (a). This may damage the Maintenance Cartridge.
710 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
9.
Attach the packaging material to the used Maintenance Cartridge and put it in the box. Keep it
level as you put it in the plastic bag. Expel excess air from the plastic bag and seal the zipper.
10.
Conrm the Maintenance Cartridge is right-side up, put it in the box, and store it so that it stays
level.
Important
• Always put the used Maintenance Cartridge back in the box and store the box on a at surface.
Otherwise, ink may leak and cause stains.
• In accordance with its active and ongoing policy to protect the environment, Canon collects used
Maintenance Cartridge. Follow the instructions provided with the new Maintenance Cartridge that
describe how to process the used Maintenance Cartridge.
11.
Wipe away any soiling on the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
Important
• Support the Maintenance Cartridge Cover from underneath as you wipe it.
Maintenance 711
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
12.
Keeping the new Maintenance Cartridge level, insert it all the way in.
13.
Close the Maintenance Cartridge Cover.
14.
Press the OK button.
The printer now initializes the Maintenance Cartridge.
Next, replace the Shaft Cleaner.
712 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
Replacing the Shaft Cleaner
Replace the Shaft Cleaner when you replace the Maintenance Cartridge. New Shaft Cleaner is included
with replacement Maintenance Cartridge.
After you execute Repl. maint cart and replace the Maintenance Cartridge, a message will appear on the
Display Screen requesting you to replace the Shaft Cleaner. Select Yes and press the OK button. Next,
go to step 4.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Repl. S. Cleaner, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
After the Carriage is moved, the Display Screen indicates Open Upper Cover.
Note
• If you do not respond within two minutes, shaft cleaner replacement is canceled and the printer goes
online automatically. In this case, repeat the procedure.
5.
Open the Top Cover.
Maintenance 713
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
6.
Grasp the Shaft Cleaner on the right side of the Carriage by the grips (a) and pull it toward
the right to remove it.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
714 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
7.
Holding the new Shaft Cleaner by the grips (a), attach it to the Carriage.
Note
• Be sure to put used Shaft Cleaner in the smaller box and put that box in the box of the used
Maintenance Cartridge for recycling.
8.
Close the Top Cover.
The Carriage is moved, and the printer goes online.
Maintenance 715
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge Capacity
The Maintenance Cartridge absorbs excess ink from borderless printing, printhead cleaning, and other
processes. You can conrm the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge by checking the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity shown on the Display Screen.
Press the Information button to display the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge on the Display
Screen.
If the Display Screen indicates to replace the Maintenance Cartridge, replace the Maintenance Cartridge. If a
message is displayed indicating to check the remaining capacity of the Maintenance Cartridge, or before
tasks that deplete much of the capacity such as head cleaning or preparations to move the printer, check the
remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and replace the Maintenance Cartridge as needed. (→P.708)
716 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Maintenance Cartridge
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Replace or prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge in the following situations.
If a message for checking the Maintenance Cartridge is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is low, the Message lamp is lit and Prepare for maint cart
replacement. is displayed. You can continue to print, but check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge
capacity and prepare to replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one. (→P.716)
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge capacity is depleted
Printhead cleaning, Printhead replacement, and preparations to transfer the printer deplete much of the
Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (In particular, preparing to move the printer depletes a lot of the capacity.)
To check the remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity, press the Information button. Replace the
Maintenance Cartridge and perform related maintenance as needed.
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge replacement is shown on
the Display Screen
When the Maintenance Cartridge is full, the Message lamp ashes and a message to replace the
Maintenance Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen. Printing is disabled, and you cannot replace the
Printhead or transfer the printer. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge with a new one.
Maintenance 717
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printer Exterior
Clean the printer regularly to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
About once a month, clean the printer exterior.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.19)
Unplug the power cord from the outlet.
Caution
• Always turn off the printer and unplug the power cord before cleaning or maintenance. Accidentally
leaving the printer on poses a risk of injury if you touch moving parts inside the printer.
3.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe away any dirt or paper dust from
the Paper Feed Slot (a), power cord plug, and so on. Dry these parts with a dry cloth.
Caution
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
Important
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered
with paper dust.
718 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
4.
Plug the power cord into the outlet.
Maintenance 719
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover
Clean inside the Top Cover to maintain better printing quality and help prevent problems.
Also clean inside the Top Cover in the following situations to ensure optimal operation.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
If the printed surface or the underside of paper is dirty after printing
After you have used up a roll
After borderless printing
After printing on small paper
After printing on paper that generates a lot of cutting debris
If you have replaced the roll
After printing on paper that generates a lot of paper dust
Important
• If the Platen inside the Top Cover becomes dirty, it may soil the underside of paper. We recommend
cleaning the Platen after borderless printing or printing on small paper.
• If the Ejection Guide is dirty, it may soil the edge of the paper when the paper is cut. We recommend
cleaning the Ejection Guide even if it does not appear dirty, because it may actually be covered with
paper dust.
1.
Open the Top Cover.
720 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
2.
If paper dust has accumulated in the Vacuum holes (a) on the Platen, the Borderless Printing
Ink Grooves (b), or cutter guide (c), use the Cleaning Brush (d) included with the printer to
wipe it away.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
Note
• If the Cleaning Brush is dirty, rinse it in water.
Maintenance 721
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
3.
Using a damp cloth that you have wrung out completely, wipe inside the Top Cover to clean
it. Wipe away any ink residue on the Top Cover Roller (a), all over the Platen (b), the Paper
Retainer (c), the Borderless Printing Ink Grooves (d), the Ejection Guide (e), the cutter guide
(f), the left-side ink suction ports (g), the section around the right-side Borderless Printing Ink
Grooves (h), and so on.
Important
• Do not use a dry cloth to wipe inside the Top Cover. This may create a static charge, which may
attract dust and affect the printing quality.
• Never use ammable solvents such as alcohol, benzene, or thinner. If these substances come into
contact with electrical components inside the printer, there is a risk of re or electrical shock.
• Do not touch the clear sheet on the side of the Top Cover Roller. This may damage the roller.
4.
Close the Top Cover.
722 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cleaning the Printer
Cleaning the Printhead
Cleaning the Printhead may help clear nozzles that are clogged.
Note
• You can specify a number of pages in the printer’s Noz. Check Freq. menu for automatic nozzle
checking and cleaning every time you nish printing that quantity. (→P.49)
• You can start Head Cleaning A by holding down the Information button for three seconds or more.
Cleaning the Printhead
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Head Cleaning, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the type of cleaning, and then press the OK button.
• Head Cleaning A
Use Head Cleaning A if printing is faint or contains foreign substances. This method of cleaning
consumes the least amount of ink. It takes about two minutes to complete.
• Head Cleaning B
Use Head Cleaning B if no ink comes out of the printhead, or if Head Cleaning A does not solve the
problem. It takes about three minutes to complete.
The printhead is cleaned, and the printer goes online.
4.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles, and determine whether cleaning has cleared the
nozzles. (→P.695)
Note
• If printing does not improve after Head Cleaning A, try Head Cleaning B. If this does not solve
the problem, repeat Head Cleaning B at least two times. If this still does not improve printing, the
Printhead may have reached the end of its useful life. Contact your Canon dealer.
Caution
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge or Ink Tanks during cleaning.
Maintenance 723
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
Other Maintenance
Preparing to Transfer the Printer
Important
• Be sure to contact your Canon dealer before transferring the printer to a new location. Ink may leak and
damage the printer if you do not prepare the printer correctly and it is tipped in transit.
Note
• It is not possible to prepare the printer for transfer if the Display Screen prompts you to replace the
Maintenance Cartridge or check the remaining capacity. Replace the Maintenance Cartridge before
transfer preparations. (→P.708)
• Depending on the state of the printer, part replacement may be necessary when preparing to transfer
the printer (that is, when you execute the printer menu item to prepare for transfer).
• Ink must be drained before Level 2 or Level 3 printer transfer, as described in the following table.
Prepare a Maintenance Cartridge in advance.
• Always follow the instructions of the service representative when transferring the printer under Level 3
conditions.
Shipping
Method
Level
(Example)
1
By truck
Permitted Angle of Inclination
Lengthwise: 0°-30°
Amount of Ink
to Dispose of
0
Required
Maintenance
Cartridge *1
0(+1)
Rotation: 0°-10°
2
By plane
All directions: 0°-30°
Approx. 600 ml
(20.3  oz)
1(+1)
3
Tipping the
printer for
elevators or
stairs
Lengthwise: 0°-90°
Rotation: 0°-30°
Approx. 1,900
ml (64.2  oz)
3(+1)
*1: Unused Maintenance Cartridge
724 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
To protect the internal parts in transit, always follow the steps below before transferring the printer to a new
location. Refer to the Quick Start Guide for details on packing the printer and installing it after transfer.
Caution
• Avoid tipping the printer excessively in transit. Ink inside the printer may leak and cause stains. If it is
necessary to stand the printer up or tilt it, contact your Canon dealer.
1.
Remove the paper.
• Roll
(→P.186)
(→P.181)
• Sheet
(→P.216)
2.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Maintenance, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Move Printer, and then press the ► button.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the level of transfer, and then press the OK button.
The printer now starts preparing for transfer.
Under Level 1 conditions, follow the procedure starting with step 10. There is no need to remove
Ink Tank.
When you are nished preparing to transfer the printer under Level 2 or Level 3 conditions, the
Display Screen prompts you to open the Ink Tank Cover. You must remove the Ink Tank at this
point. Follow the procedure starting with step 4.
6.
Open the left and right Ink Tank Covers.
Maintenance 725
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
7.
Lift the stopper (a) of the Ink Tank Lock Lever (a). Lift the Ink Tank Lock Lever until it stops,
and then push it down to the front.
8.
Remove the Ink Tank.
Note
• Store the Ink Tank you removed in the box with the ink holes (a) facing up. Otherwise, ink may
leak and cause stains.
726 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
9.
10.
Repeat steps 5 and 6 to remove every Ink Tank.
Push down the release lever (a) as shown as you gently return every Ink Tank Lock Lever to
the original position.
11.
Close the Ink Tank Cover.
At this point, ink is drawn out from inside the tubes.
Important
• Do not remove the Maintenance Cartridge during this process.
When the process is nished, Finished preparing to move printer. Turn off printer. is
displayed.
12.
Press the Power button and turn off the printer.
Important
• Turn off the printer before you unplug it. It may damage the printer if you unplug it before it is off and
transfer it in that state. If you accidentally unplug the printer, plug it in again, reinstall the Ink Tanks,
wait until the printer comes online, and follow this procedure again.
Maintenance 727
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
13.
14.
Disconnect the power cord, interface cable, and Media Take-up Unit Power Inlet.
15.
Remove the six Ejection Supports and lower the Ejection Guide.
16.
Grasp the Belt, insert it between the Belt Stopper, and afx the Belt Stopper with a hex screw at
Open the Top Cover and lift the Ejection Guide.
the position indicated.
728 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
Important
• Attach the Belt Stopper, which was removed and stored after initial installation. Neglecting to attach
the Belt Stopper may damage the printer.
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
17.
Close the Top Cover.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Tape down printer covers to secure them, in the reverse order of tape removal during installation.
If the Output Stacker is installed, reverse the installation procedure to remove the Output Stacker.
Remove the Stand by reversing the installation procedure, when it was attached to the printer.
To disassemble and repackage the Stand, follow the procedure for printer installation with four
people (that is, installation by lifting the printer) in reverse.
Caution
• Do not reverse the installation procedure that involves tipping the printer over. This may damage the
printer. For more information, see the Quick Start Guide.
22.
Repack the Roll Holder, Holder Stopper, and printer in the shipping materials, and then package
them in the shipping box.
Maintenance 729
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Maintenance
Updating the Firmware
Update the printer rmware to take advantage of new and improved printer functions.
Conrming the rmware version
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select System Info, and then press the OK button.
The rmware version is displayed.
Updating the Firmware
To obtain the latest rmware, visit the Canon website. If the rmware available online is newer than the
installed rmware, update the printer rmware. For details on downloading and updating the rmware,
visit the Canon website.
730 Maintenance
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Frequently Asked Questions
Troubleshooting
Frequently Asked Questions
Frequently Asked Questions
This section presents frequently asked questions and answers. To view more detailed explanations, click the
hyperlinks in the answer column.
Question
Answer
How do I print on a roll?
When printing on rolls, after loading the roll, specify
the paper type and length, both on the Control Panel
and in the printer driver.
⇒Loading and Printing on Rolls (→P.142)
How do I print manually?
When printing manually, specify the paper type and
size in the printer driver, and then load the paper.
⇒Loading and Printing on Sheets (→P.146)
How do I switch between printing on a roll and
printing manually?
Press the Feeder Selection button to switch the
paper source between the roll and a sheet.
⇒Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source (→P.178)
⇒Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source (→P.211)
How do I change the paper type or size?
Specify the type and size of paper, both on the
Control Panel and in the printer driver.
• Specifying it in the Printer Driver
⇒Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (→P.733)
• Specifying it on the Control Panel
Selecting the paper type
⇒Selecting the Paper Type (Roll) (→P.188)
⇒Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet) (→P.215)
Selecting the Paper Size
⇒Specifying the Paper Length (Roll) (→P.189)
How do I cut the roll paper after printing?
You can wait until ink dries before cutting the roll, and
you can cut rolls at a desired position.
⇒Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls (→P.193)
How do I print without borders?
Borderless printing is possible on rolls. You can also
specify borderless printing in the printer driver by
adjusting the original size to match the paper size.
Borderless printing is not supported on sheets.
⇒Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size
(→P.365)
⇒Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (→P.367)
⇒Borderless Printing at Actual Size (→P.348)
Troubleshooting 731
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Frequently Asked Questions
Question
Answer
How do I print an A4 original enlarged on A2 paper?
In the printer driver, you can adjust the original image
to match the paper size or width, or you can specify
enlargement or reduction before printing as desired.
⇒Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(→P.313)
⇒Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width (→P.314)
⇒Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(→P.315)
How do I print without wasting paper?
To conserve paper, you can specify in the printer
driver to rotate originals 90 degrees or to print without
top and bottom margins.
⇒Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (→P.460)
⇒Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals
Without Top and Bottom Margins (→P.461)
How do I print without wasting all the blank space
on the right side when printing an A4-sized original
at A3 size?
By specifying to rotate originals 90 degrees in the
printer driver, you can print at A4 size to ll the width
of A3 paper.
⇒Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (→P.460)
How do I print in landscape (or portrait) orientation?
You can print originals that are in landscape (or
portrait) orientation automatically enlarged to t the
roll width. This is an easy way to create vertical or
horizontal banners.
⇒Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing) (→P.395)
How do I print on a custom paper size?
You can specify custom sizes temporarily in the
printer driver.
⇒Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.396)
How do I register custom paper sizes?
You can add desired sizes (Custom Media Sizes) in
the Size Options dialog box of the printer driver.
⇒Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes (→P.396)
How do I print lines thicker?
By specifying Thicken Fine Lines in the printer
driver, you can print ne lines thicker to make them
easier to see.
⇒Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing (→P.243)
How do I modify how colors are printed?
You can adjust colors as desired in the printer driver
before printing.
⇒Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver (→P.254)
How do I use printer driver settings again in
subsequent jobs?
By saving settings information in a favorite, you can
apply the settings again before printing anytime as
needed.
⇒Using Favorites (→P.487)
732 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Frequently Asked Questions
Answer
Question
How do I use the printer in combination with a Color
imageRUNNER ?
The printer can be used for automatic enlargement
and printing of scanned originals from a Color
imageRUNNER .
⇒Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from
a Color imageRUNNER (→P.316)
How do I print enlargements of scanned originals
from a Color imageRUNNER ?
By using Color imageRUNNER Enlargement Copy
(iR enlargement copy), you can automatically print
enlargements of scanned originals from a Color
imageRUNNER .
⇒Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from
a Color imageRUNNER (→P.316)
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
If you replace the paper, complete the printer driver settings for the paper type and size.
For instructions on conguring paper settings in the printer driver, refer to the following topics, as appropriate
for your computer and operating system.
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Windows) (→P.156)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS X) (→P.158)
• Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver (Mac OS 9) (→P.160)
Troubleshooting 733
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Printing does not start
Printing does not start
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not light up
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is not on.
Make sure the power cord is securely plugged in, all the way. Press the
Power button to turn the printer on.
The printer is not selected in the
printer driver. (The printer is in
Sleep mode.)
In Windows, select the printer by clicking Select Printer or Printer in
the printing dialog box and try printing again.
In Mac OS X, select the printer by clicking Printer Setup Utility (or
Print Center ) and try printing again.
In Mac OS 9, select the printer in Chooser and try printing again.
The print job is paused. (The
printer is in Sleep mode.)
In Windows, restart the print job as follows.
1. Select the printer icon in the Printers and Faxes (or Printers )
window.
2. Clear Pause Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
In Mac OS X, restart the print job as follows.
1. Open the Printer Setup Utility (or the Print Center ).
2. Select the printer, and then Start Jobs in the Printers menu to
restart the print job.
In Mac OS 9, restart the print job as follows.
1. Open imagePROGRAF Printmonitor .
2. Choose Resume Printing in the File menu to restart the print job.
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs are Sent
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is ofine.
Press the Online button on the Control Panel to bring the printer online.
The Display Screen indicates the system is lling with ink
Cause
When the printer was turned off previously, some
cleaning operation was terminated.
734 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Wait until the system has been lled with ink. This
process may take about ten minutes.
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a network
Cannot connect the printer to the network
Cause
Corrective Action
The Ethernet cable is not connected
correctly to the printer’s Ethernet port.
1. Make sure the printer is connected to the network with the correct
Ethernet cable, and then turn the printer on. For instructions on
connecting the cable, refer to the Quick Start Guide .
2. Make sure the Link indicator is lit.
The Link indicator is green if the printer is connected via 100
Base-TX and orange if connected via 10Base-T.
If the Link indicator is not lit, check the following points.
• Make sure the hub is on.
• Make sure the end of the Ethernet cable is connected
correctly.
Insert the Ethernet cable until it clicks and locks in place.
• Make sure there is no problem with the Ethernet cable.
If there is any problem, replace the Ethernet cable.
• Check the communication mode with the hub.
Although the printer normally detects the hub
communication mode and transmission rate automatically
(in auto negotiation mode), sometimes the hub settings
cannot be detected. In this case, congure the connection
method manually, specifying the communication mode in
use. (→P.736)
Troubleshooting 735
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cannot print over a network
Conguring the Communication Mode Manually
This topic gives instructions for conguring the communication mode manually.
1.
Press the Menu button to display MAIN MENU.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Interface Setup, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Driver, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Auto Detect, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Off, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
6.
7.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Comm.Mode, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the communication mode, and then press the OK button.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
8.
9.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Ethernet Type, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select the Ethernet type, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
10.
11.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Spanning Tree, and then press ►.
Press ▲ or ▼ to enable or disable spanning tree support, and then press OK.
Return to the Ethernet Driver menu.
12.
Press the Online button.
After the conrmation message is displayed, press OK.
The printer will now restart.
736 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s IP address is not congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s IP address is congured
correctly. For details, see “Conguring the IP
Address Using imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility”. (→P.537) or see “Conguring the IP Address
Using the Printer Control Panel”. (→P.619)
The printer’s TCP/IP network settings are not
congured correctly.
Make sure the printer’s TCP/IP network settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring the
Printer’s TCP/IP Network Settings”. (→P.617)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s TCP/IP network settings
are congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
the Printer Driver Destination (Windows)”. (→P.635)
Troubleshooting 737
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks
Cause
Corrective Action
The AppleTalk protocol is not enabled on the printer.
Activate AppleTalk on the printer. For details,
see “Conguring the Printer’s AppleTalk Network
Settings”. (→P.638)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s AppleTalk settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
the Destination for AppleTalk Network (Macintosh)”.
(→P.640) or see “Conguring the Destination for
Bonjour Network (Macintosh)”. (→P.648)
The computer and printer are not on the same
network.
Due to the nature of Bonjour, you cannot print if
the printer is on another network behind a router.
Make sure the computer and printer are on the same
network. For information about network settings, ask
your network administrator.
738 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Cannot print over a network
Cannot print over a NetWare network
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer’s NetWare settings are not congured
correctly.
Make sure the printer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly. In particular, make sure a valid
frame type is selected. For details, see “Conguring
the Printer’s NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.625)
The computer you are trying to print from is not
congured correctly.
Make sure the computer’s NetWare settings are
congured correctly. For details, see “Conguring
NetWare Network Settings”. (→P.634)
The NetWare server and services are not congured Check the following points.
correctly.
1. Make sure the NetWare le server is running.
2. Make sure there is enough free disk space on the
NetWare le server. Insufcient disk space may
prevent you from processing large print jobs.
3. Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE and conrm that
the print service is congured correctly and the
print queue is available.
4. If data transmission to a printer on another subnet
fails, deactivate NCP burst mode in that printer’s
network protocol settings.
5. If the printer is used in queue server mode, specify
“Other/Unknown” as the printer type.
Troubleshooting 739
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
The printer stops during a print job
The printer stops during a print job
An error message is shown on the Display Screen
Status
Corrective Action
An error message is displayed during printing.
Check the error message and take action as
necessary.
(→P.766)
The last portion of roll paper was used during a print
job, and paper could not be advanced because the
trailing edge is taped to the roll.
Remove the used roll and insert a new roll.
(→P.186)
(→P.181)
(→P.142)
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper
Status
Corrective Action
The leading edge of the roll paper was cut to
straighten it.
This operation is normal.
The printer cuts the leading edge of the roll to
straighten it and ejects the scraps when Trim
Edge First in the printer menu is On or when Trim
Edge First is Automatic and the leading edge is
slanted. The printer is ready to print after this initial
preparation.
When Off is selected under Trim Edge First , the
edge is not cut and scraps are not removed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and make
sure the Printhead is in good condition for printing.
(→P.695)
Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.696)
A print job was received from an incompatible printer Use the correct imagePROGRAF printer driver for
driver.
the printer and try printing again.
The printer is damaged.
740 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality
Printing is faint
Cause
Corrective Action
You may be printing on the wrong side of the paper.
Print on the printing surface.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.695)
Because the printer was left without Ink Tanks
installed for some time, ink has become clogged in
the ink supply system.
After the Ink Tank has been installed for 24 hours,
run Head Cleaning B .
(→P.696)
Paper is jammed inside the Top Cover .
Follow the steps below to remove the jammed piece
of paper inside the Top Cover .
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2. Open the Top Cover and make sure the Carriage
is not over the Platen .
3. Remove any scraps of paper inside the Top Cover
.
4. Close the Top Cover .
For tips on clearing paper jams, refer to the following
topics.
• Clearing Jammed Roll Paper (→P.201)
• Clearing a Jammed Sheet (→P.217)
During borderless printing, the ink was not dry
enough before cutting.
Specify a longer drying period in the printer menu, in
Roll DryingTime in Paper Details .
(→P.49)
Printing may be faint if Print Quality in Advanced
Settings in the printer driver is set to Standard or
Draft .
In Advanced Settings in the printer driver, choose
Highest or High in Print Quality .
(→P.243)
Troubleshooting 741
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
Paper rubs against the Printhead
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper type as specied in the printer driver does Load paper of the same type as you have specied
not match the type loaded in the printer. (*1)
in the printer driver.
(→P.182)
(→P.212)
Make sure the same type of paper is specied in the
printer driver as you have loaded in the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper type in the printer driver and
try printing again.
Paper has been loaded incorrectly, causing it to
wrinkle.
Reload the paper.
(→P.182)
(→P.212)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.654)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still
scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest . (→P.661) (→P.654)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or other
lm-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting
of Standard , Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is
still scratched, try setting the Printhead level in Head
Height to Highest . (→P.661) (→P.654)
When printing on paper 0.1 mm (0.004 in) thin
or thinner, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of
Weakest . If the paper is still scratched, try setting
the Printhead level in Head Height to Highest .
(→P.661) (→P.654)
*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer.
742 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
The edges of the paper are dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .
or printing on small paper.
(→P.720)
The paper type as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver.
Make sure the same paper type is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.188)
(→P.215)
Make sure the same paper type is specied in the
printer driver as on the printer.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper type in the printer driver and
try printing again.
The paper is wrinkled or warped.
Straighten out the wrinkles or curls and reload the
paper. Do not use paper that has been printed on
previously.
(→P.182)
(→P.212)
A cut line is printed because the function to reduce
cutting dust has been activated.
If this function is not needed, deactivate
CutDustReduct. through the printer menu.
(→P.49)
You are printing on heavyweight paper or paper that
curls or wrinkles easily after absorbing ink.
When printing on Heavyweight Coated Paper or
other paper-based media, choose a VacuumStrngth
setting of Strong or Strongest . If the paper is still
scratched, try raising the Printhead higher in Head
Height , one level at a time. (→P.661) (→P.654)
When printing on CAD Tracing Paper or lm-based
media, choose a VacuumStrngth setting of Standard
, Strong , or Strongest . If the paper is still scratched,
try raising the Printhead higher in Head Height , one
level at a time. (→P.661) (→P.654)
The Printhead is set too low.
In Head Height , choose Automatic . (→P.654)
The Ejection Guide is soiled.
Clean the Ejection Guide . (→P.718)
Troubleshooting 743
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
The surface of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.720)
You are using a paper that does not dry easily.
Specify a time of about a minute in Roll DryingTime .
The back side of the paper is dirty
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen has become dirty after borderless printing Open the Top Cover and clean the Platen .
or printing on small paper.
(→P.720)
Set CarriageScanWdth to Fixed .
The Platen has become soiled due to printing on the Activate width detection, and open the Top Cover and
Platen because width detection is deactivated.
clean the Platen .
(→P.720)
The Paper Retainer is soiled.
Clean the Paper Retainer . (→P.720)
Banding in different colors occurs
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper feed amount is not adjusted correctly.
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.655)
Printing does not proceed smoothly because print
jobs are interrupted during transmission.
Exit other applications and cancel other print jobs.
In the printer menu, Print Length is specied in
Feed Priority .
Selecting Band Joint may improve printing results.
Adjust the feed amount in the printer menu by
specifying Band Joint in Feed Priority and try
printing again.
(→P.655)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.650)
Streaks may occur if you set the Print Quality too
low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver and try
printing again.
(→P.243)
744 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
The contrast becomes uneven during printing
Cause
The paper feed amount is out of adjustment.
Corrective Action
Adjust the feed amount.
(→P.655)
Execute Fine Band Adj. during printing.
(→P.655)
Colors in printed images are uneven
Cause
Corrective Action
Line Drawing/Text is selected when printing images Specify Image in the printer driver.
in many solid colors.
You are printing on paper that curls easily.
Printed colors may appear uneven on the leading
edge of paper that is susceptible to curling. Increase
the level of vacuum holding the paper against the
Platen or specify a margin of 20 mm (0.79 in) or more
for the leading edge. (→P.661)
Printed colors may be uneven if you set the Print
Quality too low.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(→P.243)
Color may be uneven between dark and light image
areas.
Select Unidirectional Printing in the Advanced
Settings of the printer driver.
When using Borderless Printing, the edge of the
paper is cut during printing. Thus, ink density may
not be even at the edges.
Specify No in Auto Cut in the printer driver before
printing. In this case, the paper can be printed without
borders on the left and right sides only. Cut the
printed document ejected from the printer, then use
scissors to cut away the edges on the top and bottom.
Choose a higher level of Print Quality in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
(→P.243)
The Printhead is out of alignment.
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.650)
Drying documents stacked on each other may cause To avoid uneven colors, we recommend drying each
uneven colors.
sheet separately.
Color density may be uneven if you use Glossy
Paper , art paper, or Coated Paper .
In Advanced Settings of the printer driver, choose
Highest or High in Print Quality .
Troubleshooting 745
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
Problems with the printing quality caused by the type
of paper
For paper-specic troubleshooting tips to improve the printing quality, refer to the Paper Reference Guide.
(→P.169)
Lines are misaligned
Cause
The Printhead alignment is not adjusted.
Corrective Action
Adjust the Printhead alignment.
(→P.650)
(→P.652)
The length of printed images is inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
In the printer menu, Band Joint is specied in Feed
Priority .
To ensure the feed amount matches the paper size,
select Print Length in Feed Priority in the printer
menu and enter the amount for adjustment in Adjust
Length . You can adjust the feed amount in 0.02%
increments. (→P.49)
Documents are printed in monochrome
Cause
Corrective Action
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
Monochrome or Monochrome (Photo) , is specied specify Color in Color Mode and try printing again.
in Color Mode .
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
746 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Print a test pattern to check the color ink nozzles and
see if they are clogged.
(→P.695)
Problems with the printing quality
Printed colors are inaccurate
Cause
Corrective Action
Color adjustment has not been activated in the
Advanced Settings of the printer driver.
In the Advanced Settings of the printer driver,
access Color Settings in Color Mode to adjust
colors.
Colors have not been adjusted on the computer or
monitor.
Refer to the computer and monitor documentation
to adjust the colors.
Adjust the settings of the color management software,
referring to the software documentation as needed.
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Print a test pattern to check the nozzles and see if
they are clogged.
(→P.695)
In the printer driver, Application Color Matching
Priority is not selected.
Click Special Settings on the Layout sheet of the
printer driver and select Application Color Matching
Priority in the dialog box.
There may be a slight difference in how colors are
printed after you replace the Printhead because of
individual variation among Printheads .
Execute color calibration.
Printhead characteristics gradually change through
repeated use, and colors may change.
Execute color calibration.
Color may change slightly even on the same model Follow these steps to prepare the printing
of printer if you use a different version of the rmware environment.
or printer driver, or when you print under different
1. Use the same version of rmware or printer driver.
settings or in a different printing environment.
2. Specify the same value for all settings items.
3. Execute color calibration.
The region selection of the Media Conguration Tool Perform color calibration again using paper supported
was changed when you reinstalled the printer driver. in the newly selected region and compatible with
If you change the region selection of the Media
color calibration.
Conguration Tool , region-specic paper information
originally registered on the printer before installation
will be deleted. If the information of paper you used
for color calibration is deleted, such color calibration
can no longer be applied to any type of paper.
Troubleshooting 747
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Problems with the printing quality
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding Occurs
Cause
Corrective Action
The Platen suction is too strong.
Set VacuumStrngth to Weakest . (→P.661)
The Printhead is set too high.
Lower the Printhead . (→P.654)
Documents are printed crooked
Cause
Corrective Action
Skew Skew Check Lv. has been set to Loose or
Off .
Choose Standard in Skew Check Lv. .
Width Detection has been set to Off .
Choose On in Width Detection .
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows)
Cause
In the Special Settings dialog box of the Windows
printer driver, Fast Graphic Process is selected.
748 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Open the printer driver’s Properties dialog box from
Print in the application software’s File menu, and try
printing following the steps below.
1. Remove the check from Open Preview When
Print Job Starts in the Main sheet.
2. Remove the check from Page Layout in the
Layout sheet.
3. Click the Special Settings button in the Layout
sheet to open the Special Settings dialog
box, and remove the check from Fast Graphic
Process .
Installation problems
Installation problems
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed Correctly
In Windows, the device interface driver may not be installed correctly in some cases if you connected the
IEEE 1394 cable before installing the printer driver.
If so, reinstall the IEEE 1394 device interface driver and the printer driver as follows.
Important
• This procedure is based on an example for Windows XP. The name of the wizard may be different
in other operating systems.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Right-click My Computer and choose Properties to display the System Properties window.
On the Hardware sheet, click Device Manager to display the Device Manager window.
Right-click Other Devices icon and choose Properties.
On the Driver sheet, click Update Driver to start the Hardware Update Wizard (or the Upgrade
Device Driver Wizard.)
5.
6.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the CD-ROM
drive. Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer and follow the instructions
on the screen.
The device/interface driver is installed.
The device is detected, and the New Hardware Wizard (or Add New Hardware Wizard )
is started.
7.
8.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
When the window is displayed to choose the source for driver installation, select the printer
driver folder.
Choose the CD-ROM drive > Driver > WinXP_2K > Driver, and click OK. (For Windows
2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003)
9.
Follow the instructions on the screen.
The printer driver is installed.
Troubleshooting 749
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Installation problems
Removing Installed Printer Drivers
Follow the steps below to remove installed printer drivers and utilities.
Removing printer drivers (Windows)
Remove the printer driver as follows.
Note
• In Windows 2000/Windows XP/Windows Server 2003/Windows Vista, you must log on with
administrative rights such as “Administrator” account.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > Canon Printer Uninstaller >
imagePROGRAF Printer Driver Uninstaller to display the Delete Printer window.
2.
3.
4.
Select the printer in the list and click Delete.
Click Yes in the Warning message dialog box.
Make sure that the printer has been removed from the list, and click Exit.
Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF Printmonitor
(Macintosh)
Remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF Printmonitor as follows.
1.
2.
Insert the User Software CD-ROM provided with the printer in the CD-ROM drive.
Start the printer driver installer included in the User Software CD-ROM.
For Mac OS X, open OS X and double-click iPF Driver Installer X.
For Mac OS 9, open OS 9 and double-click iPF Driver Installer 9.
3.
4.
In the upper-left menu, choose Uninstall, and click Uninstall.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove the printer driver or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Status Monitor >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Status Monitor) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Status Monitor.
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility (Windows)
Remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility as follows.
1.
From the Windows start menu, select Programs > imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility >
Uninstaller (imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility) to start the wizard.
2.
3.
In the wizard window, click Delete, and then click Next.
Follow the instructions on the screen to remove imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.
750 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
Clearing jammed paper
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper
If roll paper jams, follow the steps below to remove jams.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.19)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Troubleshooting 751
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
Important
• If you push the Carriage to the left edge, the blade of the Cutter Unit will be lowered in preparation
to cut the paper. Be careful not to pinch your ngers between the Carriage and Platen if you have
pushed the Carriage to the left edge or if a paper jam occurs during cutting.
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
752 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
5.
Holding the paper on both sides, pull the jammed portion out toward the front. Use a scissors or
cutting tool to cut away the printed or wrinkled portion.
Caution
• When cutting paper, be careful to avoid scratching the printer.
6.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
Troubleshooting 753
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
7.
Hold the edge of the roll paper in the middle as you gently pull it evenly to the position of the
Ejection Guide (a). Align the right side of the roll paper with the Paper Alignment Line (b),
keeping this side parallel to the line, and then lower the Release Lever.
Important
• Do not force the roll paper into alignment with the Paper Alignment Line (b). This may prevent the
paper from being advanced straight.
• If you pull out too much of the roll, an excessive amount will be cut away.
8.
Close the Top Cover.
9.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
The roll is now advanced. After it is nished being advanced, you can resume printing.
Note
• You can ensure that the edge is cut neatly by following the steps below.
1. Press the Online button to bring the printer ofine.
2. Hold down the ▼ button to advance the paper.
3. Set Paper Cutting to Yes in the printer menu to cut the edge.
(→P.193)
754 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
Clearing a Jammed Sheet
If a sheet jams, follow the steps below to remove it.
Caution
• Remove any jammed paper promptly.
1.
2.
Turn the printer off. (→P.19)
3.
If the Carriage is out, move the Carriage to separate it from the paper.
Open the Top Cover.
Important
• Do not touch the Linear Scale (a), Carriage Shaft (b), or Fixed Blade (c).
Troubleshooting 755
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
4.
Lift the Release Lever.
5.
If the paper is visible, grasp the paper and pull it forward.
6.
If the paper is not visible, lift the Ejection Guide, remove the Roll Holder, and remove the
jammed paper from below.
After removing the paper, make sure there are no other scraps of paper in the printer, and
lower the Ejection Guide.
756 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Clearing jammed paper
7.
If the Carriage is on the left, move the Carriage to the right until it stops.
Important
• Always move the Carriage to the right side. If the Carriage is on the left, a Carriage error may
occur when you turn on the printer.
8.
Lower the Release Lever and close the Top Cover.
9.
Turn the printer on. (→P.19)
Troubleshooting 757
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
If the Printer makes a strange sound
If the Printer makes a strange sound
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound
The following sounds do not indicate a problem with the printer.
• There is a sound of vacuum from the Platen
To prevent paper from rising, paper is held against the Platen by suction from Vacuum holes under it.
• There is a sound when a different size of paper is used and when the Carriage goes from side to side
This may happen especially when using B0 or 44-inch paper.
When paper of a different size is used, a valve is automatically activated to switch the area for paper
suction, which may make a sound. This mechanism prevents vacuum from Vacuum holes where
there is no paper.
In addition, ink is ejected in sync with the movement of the Carriage back and forth to ensure optimal ink
ow. At this time, the valve automatically switches the area for paper suction, which may make a sound.
• Roll paper makes a uttering sound during printing
There may be a uttering sound when large paper is advanced.
• If you suddenly hear the tone for cleaning operations
At regular intervals, for printer maintenance, cleaning operations will begin automatically, even if the
printer is in Sleep mode.
• If you suddenly hear the tone for ink agitation
At regular intervals, to ensure optimal printing quality, the ink is agitated automatically, even if the printer
is in Sleep mode.(*1) The ink is also agitated automatically under the following conditions.
Note that other operations are not possible while Agitating is displayed on the control panel.
• After you turn the printer on (*2/*3)
• After data transmission (*4)
• After you replace an ink tank (*3/*5)
*1: Ink agitation takes about a minute and a half.
*2: The time for agitation varies depending on how long the printer has been turned off. (Between
about a minute and a half to twenty minutes.)
*3: During agitation, if Online mode is accessible, you can print or do other operations.
*4: After about a minute and a half, the printer goes Online, and printing operations begin.
However, printing may start later after data reception, depending on the size of print data.
*5: Ink agitation takes about three and a half minutes.
In other cases, contact your Canon dealer.
758 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other problems
Other problems
The printer consumes a lot of ink
Cause
Corrective Action
Many full-page color images are printed.
In print jobs such as photos, images are lled with
color. This consumes a lot of ink. This does not
indicate a problem with the printer.
Head Cleaning B is used often.
Head Cleaning B consumes a lot of ink. This does
not indicate a problem with the printer. Unless the
printer has been moved or stored for a long period
or you are troubleshooting Printhead problems, we
recommend not performing Head Cleaning B , to
the extent possible.
You have just nished initial installation, when more
ink is consumed to ll the system.
After initial installation or at the rst-time use after
transfer, ink ows into the system between the Ink
Tank and Printhead , which may cause the ink level
indicators to drop to 80%. This does not indicate a
problem with the printer.
A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge is not
cleared after you replace the Maintenance Cartridge
Cause
The printer has not detected the new Maintenance
Cartridge .
Corrective Action
Remove the new Maintenance Cartridge you have
just installed and insert it again rmly.
Restart the printer.
Paper is not cut neatly
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper is bent or curled at the cut position.
Straighten out any curling by the edges of the paper.
Paper rises by the ends of the cut position before
it is cut.
Reload the paper correctly.
The Cutter Unit is installed incorrectly.
Install the Cutter Unit correctly. (→P.705)
The blade of the Cutter Unit is dull.
Replace the Cutter Unit . (→P.705)
Troubleshooting 759
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other problems
Paper cannot be cut
Cause
Corrective Action
In the printer driver, No or Print Cut Guideline is
specied in Auto Cut .
Specify Yes in Auto Cut in the printer driver.
In MAIN MENU , Eject or Manual is specied in
Cutting Mode .
Specify Automatic in Cutting Mode in MAIN MENU .
The Cutter Unit is not installed.
Install the Cutter Unit .
(→P.705)
Rolls are not cut when you are using the Media
Take-up Unit .
Either execute Paper Cutting in the Control Panel or
lift the Release Lever and cut the roll with scissors.
(→P.239)
The printer does not go on
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer is unplugged.
Plug the power cord into the outlet, and then turn on
the printer.
The specied voltage is not supplied.
Check the voltage of the outlet and breaker.
For information on the specied voltage, see
“Specications”. (→P.135)
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed Slot
Cause
The roll paper is warped.
Corrective Action
Straighten out curls and reload the roll.
Cannot Load Sheets
Cause
The paper source selection is incorrect.
760 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Press the Feeder Selection button to activate the
Cut Sheet lamp .
Other problems
The Media Take-up Unit Continues Rotating
Cause
Corrective Action
There is a foreign object in the path of the Media
Take-up Sensor (indicated by a dotted line).
Remove the foreign object from the Media Take-up
Sensor path. Arrange the Basket Cloth and Basket
Rod so they do not interfere with the Media Take-up
Sensor .
The Media Take-up Sensor cord is not connected to
the Right Media Take-up Unit correctly.
Reconnect the Media Take-up Sensor cord as
follows.
1. Turn the printer off.
2. Disconnect the Media Take-up Sensor cord from
the Right Media Take-up Unit and reconnect it
rmly, all the way in.
3. Turn the printer on.
(→P.230)
If the Media Take-up Unit continues rotating, contact
your Canon dealer for assistance.
Troubleshooting 761
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other problems
Ink level detection
Ink level detection will be deactivated if you load ink tanks once emptied.
Ink level detection
Ink Tanks (→P.678) specied for this printer feature an ink level detection function to prevent the ink from
running out during printing, which prevents printer damage.
This function will not work correctly if you use rell ink tanks. As a result, printing stops. Thus, before using
rell ink tanks, you must cancel the ink level detection.
Printing with the ink level detection canceled may lead to printer damage and printing problems. Canon Inc.
is not liable for any damage that may occur as a result of relling ink.
Caution
• After ink level detection has been disabled, this function cannot be reactivated for the currently loaded
Ink Tank. To use ink level detection again, replace the Ink Tank with a new ink tank specied for use
with the printer.
• Repeatedly removing and inserting an Ink Tank may damage the connection between the Ink Tank and
the printer, which may cause ink leakage from the Ink Tank and damage the printer.
Disabling Ink Level Detection
1.
On the Display Screen, a message indicates that the ink level cannot be detected.
2.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Information, and then press the OK button.
A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen about disabling ink level detection.
3.
Press ► and check the message on the Display Screen.
762 Troubleshooting
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other problems
4.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A conrmation message is shown on the Display Screen.
5.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
A conrmation message about updating ink information is shown on the Display Screen.
6.
Press ▲ or ▼ to select Yes, and then press the OK button.
Ink level detection is now disabled, and the printer goes online.
Troubleshooting 763
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Responding to Messages
Error Message
Responding to Messages
Responding to Messages
Warning messages
Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.
Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take the
appropriate action. (→P.766)
Error messages (if action can be taken)
Error messages are indicated on the Display Screen if you must respond before the printer can resume
operation.
Check the message and take the appropriate action. (→P.766)
764 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Responding to Messages
Error messages (if no action can be taken)
In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.
If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on
again.
• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.
Note
• Messages are also displayed in imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows) or imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh).
Error Message 765
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Responding to Messages
Error Messages
Warning messages
Warning messages are shown on lines 2-4 of the Display Screen.
Although warning messages do not prevent printer operation, you should check the message and take
the appropriate action.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number) (→P.787)
Close Ink Tank Cover (→P.779)
Ink tank is empty. Replace the ink tank. (→P.778)
No ink tank loaded. (→P.777)
Ink Level: Check (→P.777)
End of paper feed. (→P.774)
Prepare for parts replacement. (→P.788)
Parts replacement time has passed. (→P.788)
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR) (→P.783)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data. (→P.785)
Mail box nearly full. (→P.785)
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data (→P.785)
Turn on the media take-up unit. (→P.776)
Prepare for maint cart replacement. (→P.784)
Paper Mismatch (→P.768)
Papr Size Mismatch (→P.769)
Papr Type Mismatch (→P.768)
Error messages (if action can be taken)
Check the message and take the appropriate action.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Ink tank is empty. Press OK and replace ink tank. (→P.778)
Ink insufcient. (→P.778)
Ink tank error. (→P.779)
No ink tank loaded. (→P.777)
Top cover is open. (→P.787)
Sheet printing is selected. (→P.771)
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded. (→P.771)
No sheets. (→P.770)
Carriage Cover is open. (→P.787)
Cannot calibrate. (→P.781)
Insufcient paper for job (→P.770)
Use another paper. (→P.780)
This paper cannot be used. (→P.769)
Cannot print as specied. (→P.780)
Hard disk error. (→P.786)
Cannot adjust band. (→P.780)
Unknown le. (→P.788)
File read error. (→P.786)
Borderless printng not possible. (→P.772)
x printhead error (x is Left or Right) (→P.783)
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right) (→P.782)
PHeads: wrong pos. (→P.782)
766 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Responding to Messages
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Cannot adjust printhead. (→P.781)
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to resume printing. (→P.785)
Mail box full. Cannot save. (→P.785)
Rewinding error. (→P.776)
Media take-up unit ready. (→P.776)
Multi-sensor error (→P.788)
Maintenance cartridge full. (→P.784)
Maintenance cartridge problem. (→P.784)
No maintenance cartridge. (→P.784)
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity. (→P.784)
Paper Mismatch (→P.768)
Paper jam. (→P.774)
Paper loaded askew. (→P.773)
Papr Size Mismatch (→P.769)
Paper size not detected. (→P.774)
Papr Type Mismatch (→P.768)
Leading edge detection error. (→P.774)
Cannot feed paper. (→P.774)
Cannot cut paper. (→P.775)
Rel lever is in wrong position. (→P.775)
The roll is empty. (→P.776)
Roll printing is selected. (→P.771)
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded. (→P.771)
Error messages (if no action can be taken)
• Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.788)
• ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number) (→P.787)
Other Messages
These messages do not prevent printer operation. Check the information on the Display Screen and take
action as necessary. Messages requiring special attention are as follows:
• Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected. (→P.779)
• Excessive temperature or humidity. (→P.781)
• Cannot execute this command. Use other paper. (→P.780)
Error Message 767
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Messages regarding paper
Paper Mismatch
Cause
Corrective Action
You printed a test pattern for printer adjustment on
several sheets, but sheets of different types or sizes
of paper were used.
When printing a test pattern, use sheets of the same
type and size of paper.
Papr Type Mismatch
Cause
The paper type as specied on the printer does not
match the type specied in the printer driver.
Corrective Action
Make sure the same type of paper is specied on the
printer as in the printer driver.
(→P.142)
(→P.146)
Follow these steps to ensure the paper type matches
on the printer and in the printer driver.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Either change the type of paper specied in the
printer driver settings or replace the loaded paper
and change the paper type setting on the printer.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, this may cause a paper jam or printing
problem.
*Printing will continue if you have set Detect Mismatch to Warning or None.
768 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Papr Size Mismatch
Cause
The paper size as specied on the printer does not
match the size specied in the printer driver.
Corrective Action
Adjust the paper size setting in the printer driver to
match the size loaded in the printer as follows.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Change the paper size setting in the printer driver
to the size loaded in the printer and try printing
again.
Replace the loaded paper with paper of a size that
matches the size setting in the printer driver as
follows.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Replace the loaded paper to match the paper size
setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, this may cause a paper jam or printing
problem.
This paper cannot be used.
Check supported paper sizes.
Cause
Corrective Action
The loaded paper is too large for the printer.
Load paper of the correct size.
(→P.175)
The loaded paper is too small for the printer.
Load paper of the correct size.
(→P.175)
Paper has been loaded that is too small to print
the test pattern for printhead adjustment or nozzle
checking.
Load unused paper A4/Letter-sized or larger. More
than one sheet may be required depending on the
adjustment.
Error Message 769
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Insufcient paper for job
Cause
The printer has received a print job longer than the
amount of roll paper left.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to replace the roll.
1. Press the Load/Eject button and remove the roll.
(→P.186)
(→P.181)
2. Load a roll with enough paper left.
(→P.179)
(→P.182)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper type.
(→P.188)
4. Specify the paper length, unless a barcode has
been printed on the roll and you have deactivated
the automatic detection function of the remaining
roll paper.
(→P.189)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Press the Online button to resume printing.
However, the roll paper may run out during the
print job and you may not be able to print all of the
document.
* When using the Media Take-up Unit, either hold down the Stop button for a second or more to cancel
printing or press the Online button to continue printing. However, if you continue printing, the roll paper
may run out during the print job and you may not be able to print all of the document.
No sheets.
Cause
A sheet has not been loaded.
Or, paper was removed during feeding.
Corrective Action
Load paper of the type and size you have specied
in the printer driver.
(→P.212)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
770 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded.
Cause
A print job for printing on sheets was sent when a
roll is loaded.
Corrective Action
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Press the OK button and remove the roll, and then
load a sheet of the paper type and size you have
specied in the printer driver.
(→P.186)
(→P.146)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Change the printer driver settings to match the roll
already loaded and try printing again.
You are using a roll with the Media Take-up Unit , but
a print job requiring sheets was sent.
1. Press the Stop button for a second to cancel the
job involving sheets.
2. Choose Paper Cutting in the menu.
3. Press the Load/Eject button and remove the roll.
4. Load a sheet and resend the print job.
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.
Cause
A print job for rolls was received when a sheet is
loaded.
Corrective Action
Press the OK button and remove the sheet.
(→P.216)
Load a roll and try printing again.
(→P.142)
Hold down the Stop button for a second or more to
cancel printing.
Roll printing is selected.
Cause
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or
other printer status information on a roll, but no roll
is loaded.
Corrective Action
Load a roll and try printing again.
To print on a sheet instead, hold the Stop button for
more than a second to cancel printing, load a sheet,
and then print. (→P.146)
Sheet printing is selected.
Cause
Corrective Action
You have attempted to print a test print sheet or other Load a sheet and try printing again.
printer status information on a sheet, but no sheet
To print on a roll instead, hold the Stop button for
is loaded.
more than a second to cancel printing, load a roll,
and then print. (→P.142)
Error Message 771
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Borderless printng not possible.
Check roll position.
Cause
The paper is loaded askew.
Corrective Action
Press the Load/Eject button and reload the paper.
Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the
Roll Holder .
(→P.179)
(→P.182)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
The paper loaded is not compatible with borderless
printing.
Load paper compatible with borderless printing and
try printing again. Paper you can use for borderless
printing is restricted to particular types of paper and
rolls of particular widths. For information on types of
paper compatible with borderless printing, refer to the
Paper Reference Guide . (→P.169)
Because paper expands or contracts depending on Use each type of paper only where the recommended
the environment of use, it may become narrower or environmental conditions are met. For details on
wider than the supported width for borderless printing. environmental conditions for various paper, see the
Paper Reference Guide . (→P.169)
Lift the release lever and reload paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
Data for a borderless printing job was sent when you Lift the Release Lever and reload the paper.
are using the Media Take-up Unit , but the paper is
Insert the roll rmly until it touches the ange of the
loaded crooked.
Roll Holder .
(→P.179)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
Check supported paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The print job received species a type or width of
paper that is not compatible with borderless printing.
Follow these steps to change the settings of the print
job to enable borderless printing.
1. Hold down the Stop button for a second or more
to cancel printing.
2. Make sure the correct printer driver for the printer
is selected and try printing again.
For information on types of paper compatible with
borderless printing, refer to the Paper Reference
Guide . (→P.169)
If you press the Online button and continue printing,
the document will be printed with a border.
772 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Paper loaded askew.
Cause
Paper has been loaded askew.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to reload the roll.
1. Lift the Release Lever .
2. Open the Top Cover .
3. Align the right edge of the roll paper parallel to the
Paper Alignment Line .
4. Lower the Release Lever .
5. Close the Top Cover .
(→P.182)
Remove the Roll Holder , insert the roll on the Roll
Holder rmly until it reaches the ange, and load the
Roll Holder in the printer again.
(→P.179)
Follow the steps below to reload the sheet.
1. Lift the Release Lever .
2. Open the Top Cover .
3. Align the right edge of the sheet parallel to the
Paper Alignment Line and the trailing edge of the
sheet parallel to the paper alignment line under
the Paper Retainer .
4. Lower the Release Lever .
5. Close the Top Cover .
(→P.212)
Note
• To disable this message (if it is displayed repeatedly despite reloading paper, for example), choose Off
or Loose in the Skew Check Lv. setting of the printer menu. However, this may cause jams as paper
may be askew when it is printed. Also, the Platen may become soiled, which may soil the back of
the next document when it is printed.
Error Message 773
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
Paper size not detected.
Cause
Paper has been loaded askew, or warped paper has
been loaded.
Corrective Action
Reload paper straight, in the correct position.
(→P.182)
(→P.212)
Remove the Roll Holder , insert the roll on the Roll
Holder rmly until it reaches the ange, and load the
Roll Holder in the printer again.
(→P.179)
Leading edge detection error.
Cause
Corrective Action
A roll has been loaded when sheets are selected as
the paper source on the Control Panel .
Either remove the roll and load a sheet or select the
roll as the media source on the Control Panel .
The sheet is loaded askew.
Reload the sheet straight, in the correct position.
(→P.212)
End of paper feed.
Cause
You are pressing the ▲ button on the Control Panel
and trying to rewind the roll to the edge.
Corrective Action
Release the ▲ button.
Paper can be retracted only up to 17 mm when using Release the ▲ button.
the Media Take-up Unit .
Cannot feed paper.
Cause
Paper came out of the feed path during feeding.
Corrective Action
Reload the paper correctly and advance it again.
(→P.182)
If the message is displayed when paper is not being
advanced, contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Paper jam.
Cause
A paper jam occurred in the printer during printing.
774 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Lift the Release Lever and remove the jammed paper.
(→P.201)
(→P.217)
Messages regarding paper
Cannot cut paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
There are sheets left on the Ejection Guide .
Remove the paper.
There is a foreign object by the Output Tray ,
obstructing the Cutter Unit .
Remove the foreign object.
You are not using the printer under the recommended Use the printer only where the recommended
environmental conditions for the paper.
environmental conditions for the paper are met.
Note that various environmental conditions are
recommended for various types of paper. For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper, see “Types of Paper”. (→P.169)
You are using paper that is not compatible with
automatic cutting.
Cut the roll manually.
(→P.193)
The Cutter Unit stops in the middle of cutting.
Move the Carriage to the left, remove the paper, and
return the Carriage to the right. If the roll cannot be
cut using the Cutter Unit , cut the roll manually.
(→P.201)
(→P.217)
(→P.193)
The Cutter Unit is not installed.
Install the Cutter Unit .
(→P.705)
In other cases, the Cutter Unit may be damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Rel lever is in wrong position.
Cause
The Release Lever is up.
Corrective Action
Lower the Release Lever .
If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait
a while before restoring power.
Error Message 775
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding paper
The roll is empty.
Cause
There is no more paper left on the roll.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to replace the used roll with a
new roll of the same type and size.
1. Remove the roll.
(→P.186)
(→P.181)
2. Load the new roll.
(→P.182)
3. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper type.
(→P.188)
4. If no barcode was printed on the roll, specify the
paper length.
(→P.189)
Rewinding error.
Cause
Corrective Action
There is some foreign object near the Media Take-up Remove the foreign object near the sensor.
Unit sensor and the roll cannot be detected.
The Media Take-up Unit sensor is soiled and the roll
cannot be detected.
Wipe the sensor with a dry cloth to clean it.
The roll is out of range of detection of the Media
Take-up Unit sensor.
Reload the roll. (→P.182)
The Media Take-up Unit sensor is damaged.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
* Printing will stop momentarily if an error involving the Media Take-up Unit occurs. If you prefer printing
not to stop, set Skip Take-Up Err to On.
Turn on the media take-up unit.
Cause
The Media Take-up Unit was off when you selected
Enable for Take-up Reel .
Corrective Action
Turn the Media Take-up Unit on.
Media take-up unit ready.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Take-up Reel setting in the printer MAIN MENU Press the Stop button and stop printing.
was changed from Enable to Disable , but a print job The mode switches from take-up mode to regular
was received before the roll was removed.
mode after you change the Take-up Reel setting in
the MAIN MENU from Enable to Disable and lift the
Release Lever , or after you execute Paper Cutting .
Press the Online button to resume printing.
776 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding ink
Messages regarding ink
Ink Level: Check
Cause
Not much ink is left.
Corrective Action
Prepare a new Ink Tank .
We recommend replacing the Ink Tank with a new Ink
Tank at this point if you plan to print large-format or
high-quantity jobs.
No ink tank loaded.
Cause
Corrective Action
There is no Ink Tank of the indicated color in the
printer.
Load or reload the Ink Tank .
(→P.680)
There is a problem with the Ink Tank .
Replace it with a new Ink Tank .
(→P.680)
Error Message 777
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding ink
Ink insufcient.
Cause
The ink level is low, so you cannot print, clean the
Printhead , or do other operations that require ink.
Corrective Action
Replace the Ink Tank that is low with a new Ink Tank .
(→P.680)
Ink tank is empty. Press OK and replace the ink tank.
Cause
There is no ink left.
Corrective Action
Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
(→P.680)
Ink tank is empty. Replace the ink tank.
Cause
There is no ink left in an ink tank.
778 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Open the Ink Tank Cover and replace the Ink Tank
for which the Ink Lamp is ashing.
(→P.680)
Messages regarding ink
Close Ink Tank Cover
Cause
The Ink Tank Cover is open.
Corrective Action
Close the Ink Tank Cover .
Ink tank error.
Cause
The Ink Tank in the printer is incompatible.
Corrective Action
Load an Ink Tank specied for use with the printer.
(→P.680)
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly detected.
Cause
Ink level detection cannot work correctly if you use
rell ink tanks.
Corrective Action
The rell ink tank can no longer be used. See the
section “Ink level detection” and take the appropriate
action. (→P.762)
Error Message 779
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Use another paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The Printhead and feed amount cannot be adjusted
when highly transparent lm is loaded.
We recommend using a type of paper that you often
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.650)
Adjust the feed amount manually.
(→P.658)
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper.
Cause
Corrective Action
The loaded paper cannot be used for color calibration. Load paper compatible with color calibration.*1 See
"Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.169)
*1: Always make sure the loaded paper matches the media type setting on the printer. Adjustment cannot
be completed correctly unless the setting value matches the loaded paper.
Cannot print as specied.
Lift the release lever and replace paper with A4/LTR (vertical) or larger
Cause
The loaded paper is too small.
Corrective Action
Switch to paper A4/Letter (vertical) or larger.
Lift the release lever and replace roll with 10 in. wide or larger roll
Cause
The loaded paper is too small.
Corrective Action
Load a roll 10 inches wide or larger.
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.695)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.696)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Adjust the feed amount manually.
for feed amount adjustment.
(→P.658)
780 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding printing or adjusment
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.695)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.696)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used We recommend using a type of paper that you often
for Printhead adjustment.
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.650)
Excessive temperature or humidity.
Cause
The temperature or humidity where the printer is
installed is out of the acceptable range for printer
operation.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button and stop printing.
Use the printer in an environment that meets the
requirements for the operating environment. Note
that various environmental conditions are also
recommended for various types of paper. For details
on the recommended environmental conditions for
paper, see "Paper Reference Guide ." (→P.169)
Press the OK button and complete color calibration.
However, calibration may not be completed
successfully.
Cannot calibrate.
Cause
Corrective Action
The paper for printing a test pattern for adjustment is Load unused paper compatible with color calibration.
soiled. Otherwise, colored paper is loaded.
(→P.169)
The printed test pattern is faint.
Take steps to remedy the faint printing.
(→P.741)
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
Error Message 781
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding printheads
Messages regarding printheads
Cannot adjust printhead.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.695)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.696)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used We recommend using a type of paper that you often
for Printhead adjustment.
use, other than lm, for Printhead adjustment.
(→P.650)
Cannot adjust band.
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Follow the steps below to check the nozzles.
1. Print a test pattern to check the nozzles.
(→P.695)
2. Clean the Printhead if the nozzles are clogged.
(→P.696)
Highly transparent lm is loaded that cannot be used Adjust the feed amount manually.
for feed amount adjustment.
(→P.658)
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right)
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are clogged.
Corrective Action
Specify Printhead cleaning options. (→P.696)
If the message is still displayed after you execute
Head Cleaning B two or three times, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
PHeads: wrong pos.
Cause
Corrective Action
The left Printhead is installed in the right position and Turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds
vice versa.
before restoring the power. If the message is
displayed again, contact your Canon dealer for
assistance.
782 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding printheads
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR)
Cause
The Printhead nozzles are becoming clogged.
Corrective Action
If printing is faint, clean the Printhead . (→P.696)
x printhead error (x is Left or Right)
Cause
Corrective Action
An incompatible Printhead has been installed.
Install a Printhead specied for use with the printer. If
“Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L ; if
“Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead R .
(→P.697)
There is a problem with the Printhead .
Open the Top Cover . If the Carriage is over the
Platen , replace the Printhead with a new one. If
“Printhead L” is displayed, replace the Printhead L ; if
“Printhead R” is displayed, replace the Printhead R .
(→P.697)
If, after opening the Top Cover , you see that the
Carriage is not over the Platen , follow the steps
below.
1. Close the Top Cover and press the Online button.
2. If “Printhead L” is displayed, install the Printhead L
; if “Printhead R” is displayed, install the Printhead
R.
(→P.697)
Error Message 783
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge
No maintenance cartridge.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is not installed.
Corrective Action
Install the Maintenance Cartridge .
(→P.708)
Prepare for maint cart replacement.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is almost full.
Corrective Action
You can continue to print, but prepare a new
Maintenance Cartridge to use when the message for
replacement is displayed.
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge cannot absorb enough
ink for Printhead cleaning or other operation.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
(→P.708)
Maintenance cartridge full.
Cause
The Maintenance Cartridge is full.
Corrective Action
After conrming that the printer has stopped
operating, replace the Maintenance Cartridge .
(→P.708)
Maintenance cartridge problem.
Cause
Corrective Action
An incompatible or used Maintenance Cartridge has
been installed.
Install an unused Maintenance Cartridge specied for
use with the printer.
(→P.708)
784 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding the hard disk
Messages regarding the hard disk
Mail box nearly full.
Cause
The free hard disk space left for Personal Boxes in
the printer’s hard disk does not have more than 1
GB, combined.
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
(→P.109)
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data.
Cause
Corrective Action
No more space is available on the printer’s hard disk, After printing, this message is cleared.
so jobs are now printed without saving them. (Print
jobs can no longer be saved on the hard disk.)
Mail box full. Cannot save.
Cause
Saved jobs exceed the Personal Box capacity.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.115)
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.
(→P.109)
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your computer to
resume printing.
Cause
There is no more space on the printer’s hard disk.
Corrective Action
Press the Stop button to cancel the print job.
Delete print jobs from the queue. (→P.115)
Delete unneeded jobs stored on the hard disk.
(→P.109)
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data
Cause
100 jobs are stored in the Personal Box.
Corrective Action
Delete unneeded jobs stored in Personal Boxes.
(→P.109)
Error Message 785
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Messages regarding the hard disk
Hard disk error.
Cause
The format of the printer’s hard disk is invalid.
Corrective Action
Press the OK button to start reformatting the
hard disk. When formatting is nished, the printer
automatically restarts. (Formatting will erase all data
on the hard disk.)
File read error.
Cause
Files on the printer’s hard disk have become
corrupted.
786 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Corrective Action
Restart the printer. Only the corrupted les will be
deleted, and the printer will restart.
Other Messages
Other Messages
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)
Cause
There is a problem with the print job.
Corrective Action
Try printing again, using the correct printer driver.
It is also possible to continue printing in this state.
However, you may not be able to obtain the desired
printing results.
Top cover is open.
Cause
Corrective Action
The printer has detected that the Top Cover is open.
Open the Top Cover fully, remove any foreign objects,
and close the Top Cover again.
If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait
a while before restoring power.
Carriage Cover is open.
Cause
The Carriage Cover is open.
Corrective Action
Close the Carriage Cover . (→P.697)
If the error occurs again, turn off the printer and wait
a while before restoring power.
ERROR Exxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or number)
In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power.
If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
• “ERROR” is displayed, followed by the error code and Call for service.
Error Message 787
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Other Messages
Unknown le.
Cause
Corrective Action
Data sent to keep the printer up to date (such as
paper information) is in the wrong format.
Check the print job. Turn off the printer and wait a
while before restoring power, and then resend the
data.
You have uploaded rmware for a different model.
Check the rmware version. Turn off the printer and
wait a while before restoring power, and then resend
the rmware.
If the message is displayed again, contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
Prepare for parts replacement.
Cause
It is almost time to replace consumables for which
service is required.
Corrective Action
If Parts replacement time has passed. is displayed,
you can continue to use the printer for some time.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Parts replacement time has passed.
Cause
It is past the recommended time to replace
consumables for which service is required.
Corrective Action
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Multi-sensor error
Cause
Corrective Action
Direct sunlight or strong lighting may be shining on
the printer and causing the sensor to malfunction.
Take steps to ensure the printer is not used when
exposed to direct sunlight or strong lighting.
The performance of a sensor inside the printer may
be impaired.
Contact your Canon dealer for assistance.
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx (x represents a letter or
number)
In the following situations, turn off the printer and wait at least three seconds before restoring power. However,
keep the printer off and remove the roll if the last portion of roll paper was used during a print job and paper
could not be advanced because the trailing edge is taped to the roll. If tape and the Belt Stopper have not
been removed from inside the Top Cover, turn off the printer, open the Top Cover, and remove the tape
and Belt Stopper before restoring power.
If the message is still displayed, write down the error code and message, turn off the printer, and contact your
Canon dealer for assistance.
• The error message is displayed with the following instructions: Turn off printer, wait, then turn on
again.
788 Error Message
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Index
A
Borderless Printing at Actual Size...................348, 369
Borderless Printing....................................348, 369
A message to check the Maintenance Cartridge
is not cleared after you replace the Maintenance
Cartridge..................................................................759
Borderless Printing Method.......................348, 369
Print Image with Actual Size......................349, 370
About This User Manual..............................................1
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Mac OS 9)......................................................355, 376
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS 9)..........................................603
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Mac OS X)......................................................352, 373
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Mac OS X).........................................578
Borderless Printing at Actual Size
(Windows).......................................................350, 371
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from
Applications (Windows)...................................539, 676
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width................................................................367
Accessing the Printer Driver Dialog Box from the
Operating System Menu (Windows)................206, 541
Borderless Printing............................................367
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)......................595
Scale to fit Roll Paper Width..............................368
Additional Settings Pane (Mac OS X).....................571
Adjusting the Color in the Printer Driver..................254
Color Adjustment...............................................254
Color Mode........................................................254
Gray Tone Adjustment.......................................256
Matching............................................................255
Adjusting the feed amount.......................................655
Adjusting the Feed Amount Automatically...............655
Adjusting the feed amount during printing.........657
Adjusting the Feed Amount Manually......................658
Borderless Printing Method...............................367
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Mac OS 9).............................................384
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Mac OS X)............................................381
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Fit the
Roll Width (Windows)..............................................379
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Mac OS 9).....................................392
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Mac OS X).....................................389
Adjusting the feed amount during printing.........660
Borderless Printing by Resizing Originals to Match
the Paper Size (Windows).......................................387
Adjusting the Measurement Scale for Better
Accuracy..................................................................662
Borderless Printing on Paper of Equivalent Size.....365
Borderless Printing............................................365
Adjusting the Printhead...........................................650
Borderless Printing Method...............................365
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Automatically....650
Adjusting the Printhead Alignment Manually...........652
Fit Media Size....................................................366
Borderless printng not possible...............................772
Adjusting the Printhead Height................................654
Check roll position.............................................772
Adjusting the Vacuum Strength...............................661
Check supported paper.....................................772
An error message is shown on the Display
Screen.....................................................................740
Lift the release lever and reload paper..............772
By selecting color tones on Charts before printing
(Windows)...............................................................669
B
Back............................................................................9
Banding in different colors occurs...........................744
Basic Environmental Performance..........................140
Packaging materials..........................................140
Printer................................................................140
Basic Printing Workflow...........................................142
Borderless Printing..................................................365
C
Canceling print jobs.................................................162
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS 9......................166
Canceling background print jobs.......................166
Canceling foreground print jobs........................167
Canceling Print Jobs from Mac OS X......................164
Canceling Print Jobs from the Control Panel..........162
Canceling Print Jobs from Windows........................163
Index 789
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Cannot adjust band.........................................780, 782
Clearing Jammed Roll Paper..........................201, 751
Cannot adjust printhead..................................781, 782
Close Ink Tank Cover..............................................779
Cannot calibrate......................................................781
Color adjustment.....................................................664
Cannot connect the printer to the network..............735
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS 9)..................605
Cannot cut paper.....................................................775
Color Adjustment pane: color............................605
Cannot execute this command. Use other paper....780
Matching pane...................................................607
Cannot feed paper...................................................774
Object Adjustment dialog box............................606
Cannot Load Sheets................................................760
Color Settings Pane: Color (Mac OS X)..................579
Cannot print as specified.........................................780
Color Adjustment pane: color............................579
Cannot print over a NetWare network.....................739
Matching pane...................................................580
Cannot print over a network....................................735
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS 9)......608
Cannot print over a TCP/IP network........................737
Color Adjustment pane: monochrome...............608
Cannot print over AppleTalk or Bonjour networks...738
Object Adjustment dialog box............................609
Carriage..................................................................... 11
Color Settings Pane: Monochrome (Mac OS X)......581
Carriage Cover is open...........................................787
Color Adjustment pane: monochrome...............581
Centering originals..................................................443
Color Settings Sheet: Color (Windows)...................543
Checking a List of Saved Jobs..................................80
Color Adjustment : color....................................543
Displaying a List of Saved Jobs..........................80
Light Source Check Tool...................................548
Printing a List of Saved Jobs...............................84
Checking for Nozzle Clogging.................................695
Matching sheet: Ambient Light Matching Mode
(Kyuanos)..........................................................547
Checking Ink Tank Levels........................................692
Matching sheet: Driver Matching Mode.............545
Checking the Free Hard Disk Space.......................129
Matching sheet: ICC Matching Mode,Driver ICM
Mode,and Host ICM Mode................................546
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................131
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............130
Using RemoteUI................................................129
Using the Control Panel....................................129
Checking the Layout Before Printing.......................561
Preview (Macintosh)..........................................561
Checking the Layout Before Printing (Mac OS X)...562
Checking the Print Quality.......................................694
Checking the Remaining Maintenance Cartridge
Capacity..................................................................716
Choosing a Paper for Printing.................................242
If the paper type is not listed for selection.........242
Media type.........................................................242
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Mac OS 9)............................................264
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Mac OS X)............................................261
Choosing the Document Type and Printing
Conditions (Windows).............................................259
Cleaning Inside the Top Cover................................720
Cleaning the Printer.................................................718
Cleaning the Printer Exterior...................................718
Cleaning the Printhead....................................696, 723
Cleaning the Printhead..............................696, 723
Clearing a Jammed Sheet...............................217, 755
Clearing jammed paper...........................................751
790 Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Object Adjustment dialog box............................544
Color Settings Sheet: Monochrome (Windows)......549
Color Adjustment : monochrome.......................549
Object Adjustment dialog box............................550
Colors in printed images are uneven.......................745
Configuring NetWare Network Settings...................634
Configuring the Communication Mode Manually.....736
Configuring the Destination for AppleTalk Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................640
Activating AppleTalk on the printer....................640
Configuring the destination (Mac OS 9)............641
Configuring the destination (Mac OS X)............642
Configuring the Destination for Bonjour Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................648
Configuring the Destination for TCP/IP Network
(Macintosh)..............................................................644
Configuring the Destination (Mac OS 9)............644
Configuring the Destination (Mac OS X)...........646
Configuring the IP Address on the Printer...............615
Configuring the IP Address Using ARP and PING
Commands..............................................................620
Configuring the IP Address Using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility.........................................537, 637
Configuring the IP Address Using the Printer Control
Panel.......................................................................619
Index
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Macintosh)..............................................................639
D
Configuring the Printer Driver Destination
(Windows)...............................................................635
Deleting Saved Jobs...............................................109
Configuring the Printer's AppleTalk Network
Settings...................................................................638
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............ 112
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................ 114
Configuring the Printer's NetWare Network
Settings...................................................................625
Using RemoteUI................................................ 110
Configuring the Printer's TCP/IP Network
Settings...................................................................617
Detection of the Remaining Roll Paper...................191
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS 9).....................585
Device Settings Sheet (Windows)...........................528
Checking a preview of the settings....................585
Digital Photo Front-Access......................................538
Checking a print preview...................................586
Disabling the Take-Up Reel Function......................231
Confirming Print Settings (Mac OS X).....................559
Documents are printed crooked..............................748
Checking a preview of the settings....................559
Documents are printed in monochrome..................746
Checking a print preview...................................560
Confirming Print Settings (Windows).......................509
Checking a preview of the settings....................509
Using the Control Panel....................................109
Device Settings Pane (Mac OS 9)...........................594
E
Checking a print preview...................................510
Email Notification When Printing is Finished or
Errors Occur............................................................624
Confirming the Print Image Before Printing.............551
Enabling the Take-Up Reel Function.......................231
Conserving roll paper..............................................460
End of paper feed....................................................774
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins.........................................461
Enhanced Printing Options......................................242
No Spaces at Top or Bottom
(Conserve Paper)..............................................461
Erasing all data on the printer's hard disk...............132
ERROR Exxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................787
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS 9)......................467
Error Message.........................................................764
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Mac OS X)......................464
Error messages (if action can be taken)............766
Error Messages.......................................................766
Conserving Roll Paper by Printing Originals Without
Top and Bottom Margins (Windows).......................462
Error messages (if no action can be taken).......767
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees...................................................................460
Warning messages............................................766
Rotate Page 90 degrees (Conserve Paper)......460
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Mac OS 9)...............................................474
Other Messages................................................767
Excessive temperature or humidity..........................781
F
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Mac OS X)...............................................471
Favorites Sheet (Windows).....................................525
Conserving Roll Paper by Rotating Originals 90
Degrees (Windows).................................................469
File read error..........................................................786
Control Panel.......................................................14, 19
Correcting Print Misalignment.................................650
Cutter Unit...............................................................705
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing..............................487
Automatic Cutting..............................................487
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS 9)..........493
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Mac OS X)..........491
Feeding Roll Paper Manually..................................190
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................273
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Mac OS X)..............................................................270
Fine-Tuning Colors of Photos and Images
(Windows)...............................................................267
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS 9)..................................................281
Cutting Roll Paper After Printing (Windows)............490
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Mac OS X).................................................278
Cutting the Leading Edge of Roll Paper
Automatically...........................................................192
Fine-Tuning Monochrome Settings When Printing
Photos (Windows)...................................................276
Finishing Pane (Mac OS 9).....................................592
Index 791
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Frequently Asked Questions...................................731
Front............................................................................7
Ink tank is empty. Press OK and replace the
ink tank....................................................................778
Ink tank is empty. Replace the ink tank...................778
G
Ink Tanks.................................................................678
GARO Wxxxx (x represents a number)...................787
Giving Priority to Particular Graphic Elements and
Colors for Printing....................................................243
Advanced Settings............................................243
Color Settings....................................................245
Enhancing Printing Quality................................246
Print Priority.......................................................243
Installation problems...............................................749
Installing imagePROGRAF Device Setup
Utility................................................................536, 636
Insufficient paper for job..........................................770
Introduction..................................................................1
L
Print Quality.......................................................244
Layout Sheet (Windows).........................................522
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS 9).........................593
Leading edge detection error...................................774
Gray Adjustment................................................593
Line thickness is not uniform (Windows).................748
Gray Adjustment Pane (Mac OS X).........................570
Lines are misaligned...............................................746
Gray Adjustment................................................570
Loading and Printing on Rolls.................................142
Gray Adjustment Sheet (Windows).........................524
Loading and Printing on Sheets..............................146
Gray Adjustment................................................524
Loading the Rewind Spool on the Media
Take-up Unit............................................................232
H
Loading the Roll in the Printer.................................182
Loading the Sheet in the Printer..............................212
Handling Paper........................................................168
Handling rolls...........................................................178
Handling sheets for paper feed slots....................... 211
Hard Disk...................................................................71
Hard disk error.........................................................786
Hardware error. xxxxxxxx-xxxx
(x represents a letter or number).............................788
How to use this manual...............................................1
HTML Version of the Manual for Printing.....................3
I
M
Mac OS 9................................................................584
Mac OS X................................................................558
Mail box full. Cannot save.......................................785
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data........................785
Mail box full. Delete unwanted data on your
computer to resume printing....................................785
Mail box full. Now printing without saving data........785
Mail box nearly full...................................................785
Main Menu Operations..............................................30
IEEE 1394 (FireWire) Expansion Board..................134
Accessing Menus................................................31
If the Printer Makes a Strange Sound.....................758
Executing menu commands................................34
Image Edges are Blurred or White Banding
Occurs.....................................................................748
Specifying menu items........................................32
imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility.....................535
imagePROGRAF Printmonitor (Macintosh).....576, 601
imagePROGRAF Status Monitor (Windows)...........534
Improving the Print Quality......................................694
Initializing the Network Settings..............................616
Ink insufficient..........................................................778
Ink level detection....................................................762
Disabling Ink Level Detection............................762
Ink level detection..............................................762
Ink Level: Check......................................................777
Ink Tank Cover (Inside)..............................................12
Ink tank error...........................................................779
792 Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Specifying numerical values................................33
Main Menu Settings...................................................49
Adjust Printer.......................................................54
Information..........................................................59
Interface Setup....................................................55
Job Management.................................................53
Maintenance........................................................56
Media Menu.........................................................50
Paper Details.......................................................51
System Setup......................................................57
Main Menu Settings (During Printing).......................60
Information..........................................................61
Job Mgmt Menu...................................................62
Index
Main Pane (Mac OS 9)............................................588
Messages regarding the maintenance cartridge.....784
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............589
Modifying Personal Boxes....................................... 119
Configuration using Easy Settings....................588
Naming Personal Boxes....................................124
Main Pane (Mac OS X)...........................................565
Setting Passwords for Personal Boxes............. 119
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............566
Configuration using Easy Settings....................565
Modifying the Current Job
(Deleting or Preempting Other Jobs)....................... 115
Main Sheet (Windows)............................................516
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor................ 118
Configuration using Advanced Settings.............518
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor............ 117
Configuration using Easy Settings....................516
Using RemoteUI................................................ 116
Maintenance............................................................650
Using the Control Panel.................................... 116
Maintenance Cartridge............................................708
Multi-sensor error....................................................788
Maintenance cartridge full.......................................784
Maintenance cartridge problem...............................784
N
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation...............................................................486
Network Environment..............................................613
Mirror.................................................................486
System requirements........................................613
Orientation.........................................................486
Network Setting.......................................................613
Rotate 180 degrees...........................................486
Network Setting (Macintosh)...................................638
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS 9)...........................................500
Network Setting (Windows).....................................625
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Mac OS X)...........................................497
No Maintenance Cartridge capacity.........................784
Making the Original Orientation Match the Paper
Orientation (Windows).............................................495
Managing Saved Jobs...............................................91
Displaying details of saved jobs..........................97
Network environment........................................614
No ink tank loaded...................................................777
No maintenance cartridge.......................................784
No sheets................................................................770
O
Moving saved jobs...............................................91
Optional accessories...............................................133
Renaming saved jobs........................................102
Other Maintenance..................................................724
Manually Loading Paper to the Position for
Printing............................................................150, 220
Other Messages......................................................787
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box
(Mac OS 9)......................................................210, 610
Other useful settings...............................................485
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box
(Mac OS X)......................................................209, 582
Media Detailed Settings Dialog Box
(Windows).......................................................208, 552
Media Size Options Dialog Box (Windows).............553
Media Take-up Unit..........................................133, 228
Media Take-up Unit (Optional)...........................17, 229
Media take-up unit ready.........................................776
Menu Structure..........................................................35
Main Menu...........................................................35
Main menu during printing...................................47
Submenus...........................................................46
Messages regarding ink..........................................777
Other problems........................................................759
Output Stacker..................................................18, 221
P
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS 9).................................590
Page Setup Pane (Mac OS X)................................567
Page Setup Sheet (Windows).................................520
Paper.......................................................................168
Paper size.........................................................168
Types of paper...................................................168
Paper cannot be cut................................................760
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Mac OS X)..............................................................564
Messages regarding paper......................................768
Paper Information on Printer Dialog Box
(Windows)...............................................................512
Messages regarding printheads..............................782
Paper is not cut neatly.............................................759
Messages regarding printing or adjusment.............780
Paper jam................................................................774
Messages regarding the hard disk..........................785
Paper loaded askew................................................773
Index 793
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Paper Mismatch......................................................768
Printing at Full Size (Windows)...............................358
Paper rubs against the Printhead............................742
Printing banners or at other non-standard sizes.....395
Paper size not detected...........................................774
Printing CAD Drawings............................................476
Paper Sizes.............................................................175
Printing does not start.............................................734
Rolls..................................................................175
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER..............................................316
Sheets...............................................................176
Papr Size Mismatch................................................769
Papr Type Mismatch................................................768
Parts replacement time has passed........................788
PHeads: wrong pos.................................................782
Prepare for maint cart replacement.........................784
Prepare for parts replacement.................................788
Preparing to Transfer the Printer.............................724
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS 9)......587
Previewing Images Before Printing (Mac OS X).....563
Previewing Images Before Printing (Windows)....... 511
Print Area.................................................................141
Rolls..................................................................141
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Mac OS X)..........................319
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER.................................................320
Registering a hot folder on your computer........319
Scanning the original and print an
nlargement .......................................................320
Printing Enlargements of Scanned Originals from a
Color imageRUNNER (Windows)....................317, 554
Completing the scanning settings on the Color
imageRUNNER. .......................................318, 555
Registering a hot folder on your
computer...................................................317, 554
Sheets...............................................................141
Scanning the original and print an
enlargement..............................................318, 555
Print quality and color settings................................242
Printing enlargements or reductions........................313
Printed colors are inaccurate...................................747
Printing from Mac OS 9...........................................154
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS 9)..........................584
Printing from the application software...............155
Printer Driver Settings (Mac OS X).........................558
Selecting the printer..........................................154
Printer Driver Settings (Windows)...........................507
Printing from Mac OS X...........................................152
Printer Hard Disk Operations....................................71
Printing from the application software...............153
Printer Menu Operations...........................................28
Registering the printer.......................................152
Main menu operations during printing.................28
Printing from Photoshop..........................................488
Main menu operations when no print job is in
progress..............................................................28
Using the Plug-in to Print...................................488
Submenu operations...........................................29
Printer Modes............................................................21
Menu mode, and state of the Control Panel........25
Mode transition....................................................22
Modes..................................................................21
Offline, and state of the Control Panel................24
Using the Printer Driver to Print.........................488
Printing from Windows............................................151
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured Ambient
Light.........................................................................673
Printing in Ideal Colors for Light in the Viewing
Environment....................................................257, 668
Online, and state of the Control Panel................23
By selecting color tones on Charts before
printing.......................................................257, 668
Submenu mode, and state of the
Control Panel.......................................................25
Printing in Colors Matching the Measured
Ambient Light............................................257, 668
Printer parts.................................................................7
Printing is faint.........................................................741
Printer Specifications...............................................135
Printing Large Posters (Mac OS 9).........................424
Printhead.................................................................694
Printing Large Posters (Windows)...........................422
Printheads...............................................................694
Printing Line Drawings and Text
(Mac OS 9)..............................................252, 289, 482
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS 9)................598
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Mac OS X)................573
Printing Adobe RGB Images (Windows).................531
Printing at full size...................................................346
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS 9)..............................363
Printing at Full Size (Mac OS X)..............................360
794 Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Easy Settings....................................................252
Print Target........................................................252
Print targets for line drawings and text..............252
Printing Line Drawings and Text
(Mac OS X)......................................................286, 479
Index
Printing Line Drawings and Text
(Windows).......................................................284, 477
Printing Options Using Rolls and Sheets................149
Printing Line Drawings and Text
(Windows, Mac OS X).............................................251
Printing options using rolls and sheets..............149
Easy Settings....................................................251
Print Target........................................................251
Print targets for line drawings and text..............251
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other........417
Free Layout (Windows).....................................417
imagePROGRAF Free Layout (Macintosh).......418
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Mac OS X)..............................................................428
Printing Multiple Originals Next to Each Other
(Windows)...............................................................426
Paper size.........................................................149
Rolls and sheets................................................149
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls.......................443
Centering originals relative to roll paper
width..................................................................443
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................450
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
(Mac OS X)..............................................................447
Printing Originals Centered on Rolls
(Windows)...............................................................445
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets....................444
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously......................419
Centering originals on sheets............................444
Roll paper (banner)...........................................419
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................457
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................433
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Mac OS X)..............................................................431
Printing Multiple Pages Continuously
(Windows)...............................................................430
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Mac OS X)..............................................................455
Printing Originals Centered on Sheets
(Windows)..............................................................453
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS 9).........249, 302
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet...........................420
Easy Settings....................................................249
Page Layout......................................................420
Print Target........................................................249
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS 9).......440
Print targets for photos and images..................249
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Mac OS X).......437
Printing Photos and Images (Mac OS X)................299
Printing Multiple Pages Per Sheet (Windows).........435
Printing Photos and Images (Windows)..................297
Printing Office Documents.......................................253
Easy Settings....................................................253
Printing Photos and Images
(Windows, Mac OS X).............................................247
Print Target........................................................253
Easy Settings....................................................247
Print targets for office documents......................253
Print Target........................................................247
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS 9)...................295
Print targets for photos and images..................247
Printing Office Documents (Mac OS X)...................293
Printing Photos in Monochrome..............................258
Printing Office Documents (Windows).....................291
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS 9)...........310
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes...................396
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Mac OS X)..........307
Registering non-standard paper size in the
printer driver......................................................396
Printing Photos in Monochrome (Windows)............305
Specifying custom media sizes for
temporary use...................................................396
Page Layout......................................................421
Printing Posters in Sections....................................421
Printing procedure...................................................142
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................403
Printing Saved Jobs..................................................85
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Mac OS X)..............................................................401
Using imagePROGRAF Status Monitor..............88
Printing on Non-Standard Paper Sizes
(Windows)...............................................................397
Printing by using Custom Media Size................399
Printing by using Custom Size..........................397
Printing on Oversized Paper...................................346
Using imagePROGRAF Printmonitor..................90
Using RemoteUI..................................................86
Using the Control Panel......................................85
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing)...........................................395
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................395
Oversize............................................................346
Index 795
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS 9).........................413
Make sure the printer is ready for Ink Tank
replacement.......................................................681
Print the banner.................................................415
Precautions when handling an Ink Tank............680
Register a Custom Media Size..........................413
Remove the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2 fl oz]).........682
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Mac OS X).........................410
Remove the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7 fl oz]).........684
Replacing the Cutter Unit........................................705
Printing the banner............................................ 411
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge.....................708
Register a Custom Page Size...........................410
Compatible Maintenance Cartridge...................708
Printing Vertical or Horizontal Banners
(Large-Format Printing; Windows)..........................406
Precautions when handling the Maintenance
Cartridge............................................................708
Creating the banner in the application...............407
Replacing the Maintenance Cartridge...............709
Printing the banner............................................407
Replacing the Shaft Cleaner.............................713
Registering a Custom Media Size.....................406
Replacing the Printhead..........................................697
Printing With Watermarks........................................485
Compatible Printhead........................................697
Watermark.........................................................485
Precautions when handling the Printhead.........697
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY,
and so on (Mac OS 9).............................................504
Replacing the Printhead....................................698
Printing with Watermarks-COPY, FILE COPY,
and so on (Windows)...............................................502
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value.......315
Problem with Printhead x (x is L, R, or LR).............783
Problems with the printing quality............................741
Problems with the printing quality caused by the
type of paper...........................................................746
Reducing Dust from Cutting Rolls...........................197
Regular printing is selected, but a roll is loaded......771
When to replace the Printhead..........................697
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................315
Scaling...............................................................315
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................326
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Mac OS X)..............................................................323
Rel lever is in wrong position...................................775
Resizing Originals by Entering a Scaling Value
(Windows)...............................................................321
Remaining level of the ink cannot be correctly
detected...................................................................779
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width...................314
Removing a Roll from the Roll Holder.....................181
Removing Installed Printer Drivers..........................750
Removing imagePROGRAF Device Setup Utility
(Windows).........................................................750
Removing imagePROGRAF Status Monitor
(Windows).........................................................750
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................314
Fit Roll Paper Width..........................................314
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................335
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Mac OS X)..............................................................332
Removing printer drivers (Windows).................750
Resizing Originals to Fit the Roll Width
(Windows)...............................................................330
Removing Printer Drivers and imagePROGRAF
Printmonitor (Macintosh)...................................750
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size............313
R
Enlarged/Reduced Printing...............................313
Fit Media Size....................................................313
Removing Printed Documents from the Media
Take-up Unit (Optional)...........................................239
Removing the Roll from the Printer.........................186
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................343
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Mac OS X)..............................................................340
Replacing Ink Tanks................................................680
Resizing Originals to Match the Paper Size
(Windows)...............................................................338
Access the menu for Ink Tank replacement......681
Responding to Messages........................................764
Compatible Ink Tank..........................................680
Error messages (if action can be taken)............764
How to Replace the Ink Tank.............................680
Error messages (if no action can be taken).......765
Install the Ink Tank (330 ml [11.2 fl oz]).............686
Warning messages............................................764
Install the Ink Tank (700 ml [23.7 fl oz]).............689
Rewinding error.......................................................776
Removing the Sheet................................................216
Roll Holder Set................................................133, 205
796 Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
Roll paper cannot be inserted into the Paper Feed
Slot..........................................................................760
Paper Cutting (to have the roll cut at your
specified position)..............................................196
Roll printing is selected, but sheets are loaded.......771
Specifying the Ink Drying Time for Rolls..................198
Roll printing is selected...........................................771
Mac OS 9..........................................................200
S
Mac OS X..........................................................199
Windows............................................................198
Saved Print Jobs.......................................................72
Format of saved print jobs...................................72
Specifying the Paper Length (Roll)..........................189
Specifying the Printer's Frame Type........................627
Specifying the frame type using imagePROGRAF
Device Setup Utility...........................................627
Storage destination.............................................73
Saving Print Jobs......................................................74
Using imagePROGRAF Print Plug-in..................79
Specifying the frame type using the printer
Control Panel.....................................................628
Using the printer driver (Mac OS 9).....................78
Stand.........................................................................16
Using the printer driver (Mac OS X)....................76
Status Print................................................................64
Using the printer driver (Windows)......................74
Selecting the Paper Type (Roll)...............................188
Checking the information in the Status Print
report...................................................................64
Selecting the Paper Type (Sheet)............................215
Printing Status Print Reports...............................64
Selecting the Roll as the Paper Source...................178
Stowing the Output Stacker.....................................226
Selecting the Sheet as the Paper Source............... 211
Submenu Display......................................................63
Setting the Roll on the Roll Holder..........................179
Information of the loaded paper..........................63
Settings Summaries Dialog Box (Windows)............513
Printer information...............................................63
Sheet printing is selected........................................771
Software..................................................................507
Remaining Maintenance Cartridge capacity and
ink levels..............................................................63
Special Settings Dialog Box (Mac OS 9)................. 611
Support Pane (Mac OS X).......................................572
Special Settings Dialog Box (Windows)..................556
Support Sheet (Windows).......................................527
Specifications..........................................................135
Switching Modes.......................................................26
Hard Disk...........................................................139
Switching the Printer Online/Offline.....................26
Ink......................................................................137
Switching to Menu Mode.....................................27
Interface............................................................136
Paper.................................................................138
T
Printer................................................................135
The back side of the paper is dirty..........................744
Printing performance.........................................136
The contrast becomes uneven during printing........745
Specifying NetWare Print Services..........................629
Choosing the type of print services...................629
The Data lamp on the Control Panel does not
light up.....................................................................734
Using NWADMIN or PCONSOLE to set up the
print server........................................................630
The Display Screen indicates the system is filling
with ink....................................................................734
Specifying NetWare Protocols.................................632
The edges of the paper are dirty.............................743
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver.....................733
The IEEE 1394 Driver Cannot Be Installed
Correctly..................................................................749
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................160
The length of printed images is inaccurate..............746
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Mac OS X)..............................................................158
The Media Take-up Unit Continues Rotating...........761
Specifying Paper in the Printer Driver
(Windows)...............................................................156
The printer does not go on......................................760
The printer consumes a lot of ink............................759
Specifying Printer-Related Information....................622
The Printer Does Not Respond Even if Print Jobs
are Sent...................................................................734
Specifying the Cutting Method for Rolls..................193
The printer ejects blank, unprinted paper................740
Eject (waiting for ink to dry after printing)..........194
The printer stops during a print job..........................740
Manual (when using media that cannot be cut
using the Cutter Unit)........................................195
The roll is empty......................................................776
The surface of the paper is dirty..............................744
Index 797
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Index
This paper cannot be used......................................769
Tiling and multiple pages per sheet.........................417
Top Cover (Inside).....................................................10
Top cover is open....................................................787
Troubleshooting.......................................................731
Turn on the media take-up unit................................776
Turning the Printer On and Off..................................19
Turning the printer off..........................................20
Turning the printer on..........................................19
Types of Paper........................................................169
Updating paper information...............................173
V
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS 9)..............................................................612
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Mac OS X)..............................................................583
View Settings Dialog Box for the Printing Application
(Windows)...............................................................557
W
When to Replace Ink Tanks.....................................693
Before print jobs and maintenance that
consume a lot of ink..........................................693
Viewing the Paper Reference Guide.................170
U
If a message for checking the ink is shown
on the Display Screen.......................................693
Unknown file............................................................788
If a message for ink replacement is shown
on the Display Screen.......................................693
Updating the Firmware............................................730
Confirming the firmware version........................730
When to Replace the Maintenance Cartridge.........717
If a message for checking the Maintenance
Cartridge is shown on the Display Screen........717
Updating the Firmware......................................730
Use another paper...................................................780
If a message for the Maintenance Cartridge
replacement is shown on the Display Screen...717
Using Color Calibration to Adjust Colors.................664
Using Favorites.......................................................487
Favorites............................................................487
When much of the Maintenance Cartridge
capacity is depleted...........................................717
Using Favorites (Mac OS 9)....................................596
Windows..................................................................507
Printing using the favorite..................................596
Registering a favorite........................................596
X
Using Favorites (Mac OS X)....................................572
x printhead error (x is Left or Right).........................783
Using Favorites (Windows).....................................514
x printhead needs cleaning. (x is Left or Right).......782
Printing using the favorite..................................515
Registering a favorite........................................514
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals................489
Edit Using PosterArtist......................................489
Using PosterArtist to Compose Originals
(Windows)...............................................................529
Using RemoteUI......................................................623
Using the Media Take-up Unit (Optional).................230
Using the Output Stacker........................................221
Using the Output Stacker in the position for
ejection in the front of the printer.......................223
Utility Pane (Mac OS X)..........................................569
Utility Sheet (Windows)...........................................526
798 Index
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals
©CANON INC. 2007
Downloaded from ManualsPrinter.com Manuals